-
1 δείκνυμι
δείκνυμι (also [full] δεικνύω Hes.Op. 451, Men.562; [dialect] Ion. [full] δέκνυμι GDI 5653b14 (ἀπο-, Chios), 5493b25 (ἀπο-, Milet.), freq. in Hdt.; Cret. [full] δίκνυμι ([etym.] προ-) GDI5112); [ per.] 3sg.A ; imper. δείκνυε ib. 502, Pl.Phdr. 228e, [ per.] 3sg.: [tense] impf.[ per.] 3pl.ἐδείκνυσαν X.An.4.5.33
, D.18.213, also- υον Hdt.4.150
, Antipho 5.76, etc.; [ per.] 3sg.δείκνυεν Pi.P.4.220
: [tense] fut.δείξω Od.12.25
, etc., [dialect] Ion.δέξω Hdt.4.179
, al.: [tense] aor. 1 ἔδειξα, [dialect] Ep.δεῖξα Od.3.174
, etc., [dialect] Ion.ἔδεξα Hdt.2.30
, al.: [tense] pf.δέδειχα Alex.268
, ([etym.] ἐπι-) D.26.16, ([etym.] ἀνα-) Plb.4.48.3:—[voice] Med., with [tense] pf. [voice] Pass., for [dialect] Ep. forms δεικνύμενος, δείδεκτο, δειδέχαται, δειδέχατο, v. δειδίσκομαι:—[voice] Pass., [tense] fut.δειχθήσομαι Isoc.5.1
, 12.4;δεδείξομαι Plu.2.416d
, A.D.Synt.23.26, al.: [tense] aor. , etc., [dialect] Ion. ἐδέχθην ([etym.] ἀπ-) Hdt.1 Prooem.: [tense] pf. , [dialect] Ion. :—bring to light, show forth,[θεὸς] ἡμῖν δεῖξε [τέρας] Od.3.178
;δεικνὺς σῆμα βροτοῖσιν Il.13.244
;ἄγος δ. S.OT 1427
; τὸν κτανόντα ib. 278;ἵν' ἐλαίας.. ἔδειξε κλάδον Ἀθάνα E.Tr. 802
; of artists, portray, represent, Luc.Im.5; cause,δυσθέατα πήματα ἐδείξατ' A.Th. 982
codd.; render so and so, ;τινὰ ὑπὸ τῶν τραυμάτων δείξας νεκρόν D.S.34.2.21
:—[voice] Med., δείκνυμαι set before one,ἄεθλα Il.23.701
.2 show, point out,δ. Ἀλέξανδρον Μενελάῳ Il.3.452
; δέσμιον.. ἔδειξ' Ἀχαιοῖς (sc. αὐτόν) S.Ph. 609, cf. 492, 630; αὐτὸ δ. experiment will show, Cratin.177, cf. Pl.Tht. 200e, Hp.Ma. 288b; δείξει δὴ τάχα alone, time will show, Ar.Ra. 1261; δ. εἴς τινα point towards, Hdt.4.150:—[voice] Med.,δείξατο δ' εἰς Κρονίωνα h.Merc. 367
.3 show, make known, esp. by words, explain,ὁδόν Od.12.25
, etc.;ἀντολὰς ἐγὼ ἄστρων ἔδειξα A.Pr. 458
, cf. 482.4 show, prove, with part.,ποῦ γὰρ ὢν δείξω φίλος; E.Or. 802
;ἔδειξαν ἕτοιμοι ὄντες Th.4.73
, cf. 5.72;δεικνύω ἐσπουδακώς Men.562
; ; εἰ.. δειχθήσεται τοῦτο πεποιηκώς ib.160; : folld. by a relat. clause with ὡς.., ὅτι.., εἰ..,etc., A.Th. 176, Th.1.76, 143, etc.;πᾶσα ἀπόδειξίς τι κατά τινος δείκνυσι Arist.AP0.90b34
: ὅπερ ἔδει δεῖξαι, = Q.E.D., Euc.1.4,al.: abs., δέδεικται it is clear or proven, Pl.Phd. 66d, etc.;δεδείξεται A.D.
l.c.5 of accusers, inform against, (Dobree ex Sch. ἐγὼ ἐνδείκνυμι).7 offer, proffer,καὶ τὰ πίστ' ἐδειξάτην A.Ag. 651
. (Cf. Lat. dīco, Goth. gateihan 'announce', OHG. zeigōn 'show'.)Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > δείκνυμι
-
2 παριστάνω
παρίστημι/παριστάνω (the word since Hom.+; the later form παριστάνω [Ro 6:13, 16; but παρίστησι 1 Cor 8:8 v.l.; Ath. 33, 1] since Polyb. et al.; Epict. 3, 22, 87; SIG 589, 46 [196 B.C.]; 814, 36 [67 A.D.]; 1109, 76.—B-D-F §93; Mlt-H. 202) pres. inf. παραστᾶν (Tat. 33, 1; Ath. 11, 3), ptc. pl. παριστῶντες (Tat. 1, 3—B-D-F §93); fut. παραστήσω; 1 aor. παρέστησα; 2 aor. παρέστην; pf. παρέστηκα, ptc. παρεστηκώς or παρεστώς; plpf. παρειστήκειν; inf. παρεστάναι (Dt 18:5; PsSol 2:36). Mid.: fut. παραστήσομαι. Pass.: 1 aor. παρεστάθην.① trans. (pres., impf., fut., 1 aor. act.) to cause to be present in any wayⓐ place beside, put at someone’s disposal τινά or τί τινι someone or someth. to someone (Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 7 Jac.; Socrates of Rhodes [I B.C.]: 192 Fgm. 1 p. 927, 25 Jac. [in Athen. 4, 148b]; Lucian, D. Mar. 6, 2) παραστήσει μοι λεγιῶνας Mt 26:53. τὶ someth. (cp. 2 Macc 12:3 v.l. σκάφη) κτήνη provide riding animals Ac 23:24. For protection παρέστησεν αὐτῇ τοὺς υἱούς αὐτοῦ he placed his sons at her side=Joseph placed Mary in the care of his sons GJs 18:1. Here belongs παραστήσατε ἑαυτοὺς τῷ θεῷ Ro 6:13b. W. dat. and double acc. (of the obj. and the pred.) ᾧ παριστάνετε ἑαυτοὺς δούλους (εἰς ὑπακοήν) to whomever you yield yourselves as slaves (to obey him; w. acc., followed by εἰς=to or for [s. MTreu, Alkaios ’52, p. 12]) vs. 16; μηδὲ παριστάνετε τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν ὅπλα ἀδικίας τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ vs. 13a; cp. vs. 19ab.ⓑ present, representα. lit. τινά τινι someone to someone παρέστησαν τὸν Παῦλον αὐτῷ Ac 23:33. παρθένον ἁγνὴν παραστῆσαι τῷ Χριστῷ 2 Cor 11:2. Of the ‘presentation’ of Jesus in the Temple Lk 2:22 (Billerb. II 120–23. Cp. also Olympiodorus, Life of Plato, ed. AWestermann 1850 p. 1: of Plato, said to be of transcendent origin, λαβόντες οἱ γονεῖς βρέφος ὄντα τεθείκασιν ἐν τῷ Ὑμηττῷ βουλόμενοι ὑπὲρ αὐτοῦ τοῖς ἐκεῖ θεοῖς … θῦσαι=his parents took him when he was an infant and placed him on Hymettus with the intent to sacrifice … to the gods there). W. dat. of pers., acc. of obj., and pred. acc. οἷς παρέστησεν ἑαυτὸν ζῶντα to whom he presented himself alive Ac 1:3; without a dat., which is supplied fr. the context παρέστησεν αὐτὴν ζῶσαν 9:41.β. fig. παραστήσω σε κατὰ πρόσωπόν σου I will show you to yourself face to face 1 Cl 35:10 (Ps 49:21).ⓒ ‘present’ becomes almost equivalent to make, render (Plut., Mor. 676c [ἡ πίσσα] τὸν οἶνον εὔποτον παρίστησι) ἵνα παραστήσῃ αὐτὸς ἑαυτῷ ἔνδοξον τὴν ἐκκλησίαν that (Christ) might render the church glorious before himself Eph 5:27. σπούδασον σεαυτὸν δόκιμον παραστῆσαι τῷ θεῷ 2 Ti 2:15. παραστῆσαι ὑμᾶς ἁγίους κατενώπιον αὐτοῦ to make you holy before him Col 1:22. ἵνα παραστήσωμεν πάντα ἄνθρωπον τέλειον ἐν Χριστῷ that we may make everyone complete in Christ vs. 28.ⓓ as a t.t. in the language of sacrifice offer, bring, present (παριστάναι θυσίαν, θύματα etc.: Epici p. 41, 49 B.=p. 19, 16 K.; Polyb. 16, 25, 7; Diod S 3, 72, 1; Lucian, Sacr. 13; Jos., Bell. 2, 89, Ant. 4, 113; SIG 589, 46 [196 B.C.]; 694, 49; 736, 70; OGI 456, 20; 764, 23; 38. The mid. is also used in this way since X., An. 6, 1, 22) fig. παραστῆσαι τὰ σώματα θυσίαν ζῶσαν offer bodies as a living sacrifice Ro 12:1.ⓔ as a legal t.t. bring before (a judge) (Sb 4512, 82 [II B.C.]; OGI 669, 49; BGU 163, 3; 341, 14; 747 II, 26; 759, 22; 1139, 18). Some would prefer to understand 1 Cor 8:8 in this sense: βρῶμα ἡμᾶς οὐ παραστήσει τῷ θεῷ food will not bring us before (the judgment seat of) God. Likew. ἡμᾶς ἐγερεῖ καὶ παραστήσει σὺν ὑμῖν he will raise us and bring us, together with you, before him (=before his judgment seat) 2 Cor 4:14. But the forensic mng. is not certain in either of these places, and the sense is prob. bring before God = bring close to God (cp. Rtzst., ZNW 13, 1912, 19f).ⓕ prove, demonstrate (Lysias 12, 51; X., Oec. 13, 1; Epict. 2, 23, 47; 2, 26, 4; Jos., Ant. 4, 47, Vi. 27; PLips 64, 34) οὐδὲ παραστῆσαι δύνανταί σοι περὶ ὧν νυνὶ κατηγοροῦσίν μου nor can they prove to you the accusations they are now making against me Ac 24:13.—On the 1 aor. pass. Hs 8, 4, 1 s. 2aγ end.② intr. (mid. and perf., plpf., 2 aor. act., but s. also aγ end) to be present in any way, be presentⓐ pres., fut., aor. (TestJos 2:6; 20:6; TestSol 6:1 and C 12:1; TestAbr A 20 p. 103, 19 [Stone p. 54]; ApcMos 35; Mel., P. 62, 450).α. approach, come τινί (to) someone (Philo, De Jos. 94) Ac 9:39; 27:23 (Plut., Lysander 444 [20, 7] αὐτῷ κατὰ τοὺς ὕπνους παραστῆναι τὸν Ἄμμωνα).—Also as a t.t. of legal usage appear before, come before (s. 1e above.—Chariton 6, 6, 4 παρέστην δικαστηρίῳ) Καίσαρί σε δεῖ παραστῆναι you must appear before the Emperor (as judge) Ac 27:24; cp. 2 Ti subscr. πάντες παραστησόμεθα τῷ βήματι τοῦ θεοῦ (v.l. Χριστοῦ) Ro 14:10. πάντας δεῖ παραστῆναι τῷ βήματι τοῦ Χριστοῦ Pol 6:2.β. of appearing with hostile intent (Appian, Illyr. 17 §51) abs. παρέστησαν οἱ βασιλεῖς τῆς γῆς Ac 4:26 (Ps 2:2).γ. come to the aid of, help, stand by τινί someone (Hom. et al.; X., Cyr. 5, 3, 19 al.; PKöln VI, 245, 22 σὺ δὲ θεὰ παρίστασο ‘and you, Goddess, be at my side’, w. suggestion of a relationship between Athena and Odysseus [for parallels and lit. s. ‘Ptocheia’ or ‘Odysseus in Disguise at Troy’ (=ASP 31), ed. MParca ’91, 59]; Mitt-Wilck. II/2, 372 VI, 7; 12; Jos., Bell. 2, 245; SibOr 8, 407) Ro 16:2. ὁ κύριός μοι παρέστη 2 Ti 4:17 (cp. PHerm 125b, 8 [III A.D.] θεὸς παρίσταταί σοι; Jos., Ant. 1, 341; SibOr 3, 705).—The 1 aor. pass. παρεστάθην αὐτῷ Hs 8, 4, 1 is prob. used in act. sense I took a position beside him (so as to be ready for service).ⓑ perf. and plpf. (En 14:22; PsSol 2:36; TestSol 14:2 al.; TestAbr A 7 p. 84, 29 [Stone p. 16]; Just., D. 9, 1)α. of personal beings stand ( near or by), be present τινί (with) someone (LXX; TestJob 24:10; Jos., Bell. 2, 281) Ac 1:10; 1 Cl 34:6 (Da 7:10 Theod.). ἐνώπιόν τινος stand before someone (1 Km 16:21; TestAbr A 7 p. 84, 29f [Stone p. 16]) οὗτος παρέστηκεν ἐνώπιον ὑμῶν ὑγιής Ac 4:10.—Mostly in the ptc.: modifying a noun and followed by an indication of place: ὁ κεντυρίων ὁ παρεστηκὼς ἐξ ἐναντίας αὐτοῦ Mk 15:39 (cp. 1 Macc 11:68 S). Γαβριὴλ ὁ παρεστηκὼς ἐνώπιον τοῦ θεοῦ Lk 1:19 (cp. Jdth 4:14; Tob 12:15 S). Without indication of place (Diod S 17, 66, 7 παρεστὼς Φιλώτας=Philotas, who stood nearby; Diog. L. 2, 102; Aberciusins. 17; EpArist 19) εἷς παρεστηκὼς τῶν ὑπηρετῶν one of the servants who was standing by J 18:22. ἰδὼν τὸν μαθητὴν παρεστῶτα when he saw the disciple standing near 19:26. (ἄγγελοι) λειτουργοῦσιν παρεστῶτες 1 Cl 34:5. παρεστὼς ὁ κύριος MPol 2:2. οἱ παρεστῶτες αὐτῷ those standing near him Ac 23:2.—Subst. οἱ παρεστηκότες (PPetr II, 4, 6, 13 [III B.C.]) or οἱ παρεστῶτες (Diog. L. 9, 27) the bystanders, the spectators, those present Mk 14:47, 69f; 15:35 (vv.ll. παρεστώτων, ἑστηκότων); Lk 19:24; Ac 23:4; in vs. 2 the widely attested rdg. adds a dat.: τοῖς παρεστῶσιν αὐτῷ (cp. POxy 1204, 13 ὁ παρεστώς σοι).β. of a point of time be here, have come (Il. 16, 853; Demosth. 18, 90; 21, 101) παρέστηκεν ὁ θερισμός the time for the harvest is here Mk 4:29.γ. as an agricultural t.t. (cp. OGI 56, 68 ὅταν ὁ πρώϊμος σπόρος παραστῇ; PLille 8, 5) someth. like be fully grown σταφυλὴ παρεστηκυῖα a ripe grape (in contrast to ὄμφαξ) 1 Cl 23:4=2 Cl 11:3 (quot. of unknown orig.).—M-M. DELG s.v. ἵημι. TW. -
3 παρίστημι
παρίστημι/παριστάνω (the word since Hom.+; the later form παριστάνω [Ro 6:13, 16; but παρίστησι 1 Cor 8:8 v.l.; Ath. 33, 1] since Polyb. et al.; Epict. 3, 22, 87; SIG 589, 46 [196 B.C.]; 814, 36 [67 A.D.]; 1109, 76.—B-D-F §93; Mlt-H. 202) pres. inf. παραστᾶν (Tat. 33, 1; Ath. 11, 3), ptc. pl. παριστῶντες (Tat. 1, 3—B-D-F §93); fut. παραστήσω; 1 aor. παρέστησα; 2 aor. παρέστην; pf. παρέστηκα, ptc. παρεστηκώς or παρεστώς; plpf. παρειστήκειν; inf. παρεστάναι (Dt 18:5; PsSol 2:36). Mid.: fut. παραστήσομαι. Pass.: 1 aor. παρεστάθην.① trans. (pres., impf., fut., 1 aor. act.) to cause to be present in any wayⓐ place beside, put at someone’s disposal τινά or τί τινι someone or someth. to someone (Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 7 Jac.; Socrates of Rhodes [I B.C.]: 192 Fgm. 1 p. 927, 25 Jac. [in Athen. 4, 148b]; Lucian, D. Mar. 6, 2) παραστήσει μοι λεγιῶνας Mt 26:53. τὶ someth. (cp. 2 Macc 12:3 v.l. σκάφη) κτήνη provide riding animals Ac 23:24. For protection παρέστησεν αὐτῇ τοὺς υἱούς αὐτοῦ he placed his sons at her side=Joseph placed Mary in the care of his sons GJs 18:1. Here belongs παραστήσατε ἑαυτοὺς τῷ θεῷ Ro 6:13b. W. dat. and double acc. (of the obj. and the pred.) ᾧ παριστάνετε ἑαυτοὺς δούλους (εἰς ὑπακοήν) to whomever you yield yourselves as slaves (to obey him; w. acc., followed by εἰς=to or for [s. MTreu, Alkaios ’52, p. 12]) vs. 16; μηδὲ παριστάνετε τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν ὅπλα ἀδικίας τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ vs. 13a; cp. vs. 19ab.ⓑ present, representα. lit. τινά τινι someone to someone παρέστησαν τὸν Παῦλον αὐτῷ Ac 23:33. παρθένον ἁγνὴν παραστῆσαι τῷ Χριστῷ 2 Cor 11:2. Of the ‘presentation’ of Jesus in the Temple Lk 2:22 (Billerb. II 120–23. Cp. also Olympiodorus, Life of Plato, ed. AWestermann 1850 p. 1: of Plato, said to be of transcendent origin, λαβόντες οἱ γονεῖς βρέφος ὄντα τεθείκασιν ἐν τῷ Ὑμηττῷ βουλόμενοι ὑπὲρ αὐτοῦ τοῖς ἐκεῖ θεοῖς … θῦσαι=his parents took him when he was an infant and placed him on Hymettus with the intent to sacrifice … to the gods there). W. dat. of pers., acc. of obj., and pred. acc. οἷς παρέστησεν ἑαυτὸν ζῶντα to whom he presented himself alive Ac 1:3; without a dat., which is supplied fr. the context παρέστησεν αὐτὴν ζῶσαν 9:41.β. fig. παραστήσω σε κατὰ πρόσωπόν σου I will show you to yourself face to face 1 Cl 35:10 (Ps 49:21).ⓒ ‘present’ becomes almost equivalent to make, render (Plut., Mor. 676c [ἡ πίσσα] τὸν οἶνον εὔποτον παρίστησι) ἵνα παραστήσῃ αὐτὸς ἑαυτῷ ἔνδοξον τὴν ἐκκλησίαν that (Christ) might render the church glorious before himself Eph 5:27. σπούδασον σεαυτὸν δόκιμον παραστῆσαι τῷ θεῷ 2 Ti 2:15. παραστῆσαι ὑμᾶς ἁγίους κατενώπιον αὐτοῦ to make you holy before him Col 1:22. ἵνα παραστήσωμεν πάντα ἄνθρωπον τέλειον ἐν Χριστῷ that we may make everyone complete in Christ vs. 28.ⓓ as a t.t. in the language of sacrifice offer, bring, present (παριστάναι θυσίαν, θύματα etc.: Epici p. 41, 49 B.=p. 19, 16 K.; Polyb. 16, 25, 7; Diod S 3, 72, 1; Lucian, Sacr. 13; Jos., Bell. 2, 89, Ant. 4, 113; SIG 589, 46 [196 B.C.]; 694, 49; 736, 70; OGI 456, 20; 764, 23; 38. The mid. is also used in this way since X., An. 6, 1, 22) fig. παραστῆσαι τὰ σώματα θυσίαν ζῶσαν offer bodies as a living sacrifice Ro 12:1.ⓔ as a legal t.t. bring before (a judge) (Sb 4512, 82 [II B.C.]; OGI 669, 49; BGU 163, 3; 341, 14; 747 II, 26; 759, 22; 1139, 18). Some would prefer to understand 1 Cor 8:8 in this sense: βρῶμα ἡμᾶς οὐ παραστήσει τῷ θεῷ food will not bring us before (the judgment seat of) God. Likew. ἡμᾶς ἐγερεῖ καὶ παραστήσει σὺν ὑμῖν he will raise us and bring us, together with you, before him (=before his judgment seat) 2 Cor 4:14. But the forensic mng. is not certain in either of these places, and the sense is prob. bring before God = bring close to God (cp. Rtzst., ZNW 13, 1912, 19f).ⓕ prove, demonstrate (Lysias 12, 51; X., Oec. 13, 1; Epict. 2, 23, 47; 2, 26, 4; Jos., Ant. 4, 47, Vi. 27; PLips 64, 34) οὐδὲ παραστῆσαι δύνανταί σοι περὶ ὧν νυνὶ κατηγοροῦσίν μου nor can they prove to you the accusations they are now making against me Ac 24:13.—On the 1 aor. pass. Hs 8, 4, 1 s. 2aγ end.② intr. (mid. and perf., plpf., 2 aor. act., but s. also aγ end) to be present in any way, be presentⓐ pres., fut., aor. (TestJos 2:6; 20:6; TestSol 6:1 and C 12:1; TestAbr A 20 p. 103, 19 [Stone p. 54]; ApcMos 35; Mel., P. 62, 450).α. approach, come τινί (to) someone (Philo, De Jos. 94) Ac 9:39; 27:23 (Plut., Lysander 444 [20, 7] αὐτῷ κατὰ τοὺς ὕπνους παραστῆναι τὸν Ἄμμωνα).—Also as a t.t. of legal usage appear before, come before (s. 1e above.—Chariton 6, 6, 4 παρέστην δικαστηρίῳ) Καίσαρί σε δεῖ παραστῆναι you must appear before the Emperor (as judge) Ac 27:24; cp. 2 Ti subscr. πάντες παραστησόμεθα τῷ βήματι τοῦ θεοῦ (v.l. Χριστοῦ) Ro 14:10. πάντας δεῖ παραστῆναι τῷ βήματι τοῦ Χριστοῦ Pol 6:2.β. of appearing with hostile intent (Appian, Illyr. 17 §51) abs. παρέστησαν οἱ βασιλεῖς τῆς γῆς Ac 4:26 (Ps 2:2).γ. come to the aid of, help, stand by τινί someone (Hom. et al.; X., Cyr. 5, 3, 19 al.; PKöln VI, 245, 22 σὺ δὲ θεὰ παρίστασο ‘and you, Goddess, be at my side’, w. suggestion of a relationship between Athena and Odysseus [for parallels and lit. s. ‘Ptocheia’ or ‘Odysseus in Disguise at Troy’ (=ASP 31), ed. MParca ’91, 59]; Mitt-Wilck. II/2, 372 VI, 7; 12; Jos., Bell. 2, 245; SibOr 8, 407) Ro 16:2. ὁ κύριός μοι παρέστη 2 Ti 4:17 (cp. PHerm 125b, 8 [III A.D.] θεὸς παρίσταταί σοι; Jos., Ant. 1, 341; SibOr 3, 705).—The 1 aor. pass. παρεστάθην αὐτῷ Hs 8, 4, 1 is prob. used in act. sense I took a position beside him (so as to be ready for service).ⓑ perf. and plpf. (En 14:22; PsSol 2:36; TestSol 14:2 al.; TestAbr A 7 p. 84, 29 [Stone p. 16]; Just., D. 9, 1)α. of personal beings stand ( near or by), be present τινί (with) someone (LXX; TestJob 24:10; Jos., Bell. 2, 281) Ac 1:10; 1 Cl 34:6 (Da 7:10 Theod.). ἐνώπιόν τινος stand before someone (1 Km 16:21; TestAbr A 7 p. 84, 29f [Stone p. 16]) οὗτος παρέστηκεν ἐνώπιον ὑμῶν ὑγιής Ac 4:10.—Mostly in the ptc.: modifying a noun and followed by an indication of place: ὁ κεντυρίων ὁ παρεστηκὼς ἐξ ἐναντίας αὐτοῦ Mk 15:39 (cp. 1 Macc 11:68 S). Γαβριὴλ ὁ παρεστηκὼς ἐνώπιον τοῦ θεοῦ Lk 1:19 (cp. Jdth 4:14; Tob 12:15 S). Without indication of place (Diod S 17, 66, 7 παρεστὼς Φιλώτας=Philotas, who stood nearby; Diog. L. 2, 102; Aberciusins. 17; EpArist 19) εἷς παρεστηκὼς τῶν ὑπηρετῶν one of the servants who was standing by J 18:22. ἰδὼν τὸν μαθητὴν παρεστῶτα when he saw the disciple standing near 19:26. (ἄγγελοι) λειτουργοῦσιν παρεστῶτες 1 Cl 34:5. παρεστὼς ὁ κύριος MPol 2:2. οἱ παρεστῶτες αὐτῷ those standing near him Ac 23:2.—Subst. οἱ παρεστηκότες (PPetr II, 4, 6, 13 [III B.C.]) or οἱ παρεστῶτες (Diog. L. 9, 27) the bystanders, the spectators, those present Mk 14:47, 69f; 15:35 (vv.ll. παρεστώτων, ἑστηκότων); Lk 19:24; Ac 23:4; in vs. 2 the widely attested rdg. adds a dat.: τοῖς παρεστῶσιν αὐτῷ (cp. POxy 1204, 13 ὁ παρεστώς σοι).β. of a point of time be here, have come (Il. 16, 853; Demosth. 18, 90; 21, 101) παρέστηκεν ὁ θερισμός the time for the harvest is here Mk 4:29.γ. as an agricultural t.t. (cp. OGI 56, 68 ὅταν ὁ πρώϊμος σπόρος παραστῇ; PLille 8, 5) someth. like be fully grown σταφυλὴ παρεστηκυῖα a ripe grape (in contrast to ὄμφαξ) 1 Cl 23:4=2 Cl 11:3 (quot. of unknown orig.).—M-M. DELG s.v. ἵημι. TW. -
4 χάρις
χάρις, ιτος, ἡ (Hom.+) acc. quite predom. χάριν, but χάριτα Ac 24:27; 25:9 v.l.; Jd 4 and pl. χάριτας Ac 24:27 v.l.; 1 Cl 23:1 (Eur., Hel. 1378; Hdt. 6, 41; X., Hell. 3, 5, 16; ins, pap; Zech 4:7; 6:14; EpArist 272, pl. 230.—B-D-F §47, 3; W-S. §9, 7; Mayser 271f; Thackeray 150; Helbing 40f; Mlt-H. 132.—It seems that χάρις is not always clearly differentiated in mng. fr. χαρά; Apollodorus [II B.C.]: 244 Fgm. 90 Jac. says in the second book περὶ θεῶν: κληθῆναι δὲ αὐτὰς ἀπὸ μὲν τ. χαρᾶς Χάριτας• καὶ γὰρ πολλάκις … οἱ ποιηταὶ τ. χάριν χαρὰν καλοῦσιν ‘the [deities] Charites are so called from χαρά [joy], for poets freq. equate χάρις with χαρά’. Cp. the wordplay AcPl Ha 8, 7 χαρᾶς καὶ χάριτος the house was filled with gaiety and gratitude.).① a winning quality or attractiveness that invites a favorable reaction, graciousness, attractiveness, charm, winsomeness (Hom.+; Jos., Ant. 2, 231) of human form and appearance παῖς λίαν εὐειδής ἐν χάριτι an exceptionally fine-looking and winsome youth AcPl Ha 3, 13. Of speech (Demosth. 51, 9; Ps.-Demetr. [I A.D.], Eloc. §127; 133; 135 al.; Eccl 10:12; Sir 21:16; Jos., Ant. 18, 208) οἱ λόγοι τῆς χάριτος (gen. of quality) the gracious words Lk 4:22. ὁ λόγος ὑμῶν πάντοτε ἐν χάριτι let your conversation always be winsome Col 4:6 (cp. Plut., Mor. 514f; s. also HAlmqvist, Plut. u. das NT ’46, 121f; Epict. 3, 22, 90). τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ χάριτος ἐπληροῦτο MPol 12:1 can also be placed here in case χάρις means nothing more than graciousness (s. 4 below); prob. also GJs 7:3 (s. 3b).② a beneficent disposition toward someone, favor, grace, gracious care/help, goodwill (almost a t.t. in the reciprocity-oriented world dominated by Hellenic influence [cp. e.g. OGI 669, 29] as well as by the Semitic sense of social obligation expressed in the term חֶסֶד [NGlueck, Das Wort ḥesed in alttestamentlichen Sprachgebrauche etc. 1927]. Of a different order and spirit is the subset of reciprocity known as Roman patronage, in which superiority of the donor over the client is clearly maintained)ⓐ act., that which one grants to another, the action of one who volunteers to do someth. not otherwise obligatory χάρις θεοῦ ἦν ἐπʼ αὐτό Lk 2:40. ἡ χάρις τοῦ θεοῦ (cp. τῇ τοῦ θεοῦ Κλαυδίου χάριτι OGI 669, 29) Ac 11:2 D; 14:26. τοῦ κυρίου 15:40.—Esp. of the beneficent intention of God (cp. χ. in reference to God: Apollon. Rhod. 3, 1005 σοὶ θεόθεν χάρις ἔσσεται; Dio Chrys. 80 [30], 40 χ. τῶν θεῶν; Ael. Aristid. 13 p. 320 D.; 53 p. 620; Sextus 436b; likew. in LXX, Philo, Joseph.; SibOr 4, 46=189; 5, 330; Ezk. Trag. 162 [Eus., PE 9, 29, 12].—χ. to denote beneficent dispensations of the emperor: OGI 669, 44 [I A.D.]; BGU 19 I, 21 [II A.D.] χάρ. τοῦ θεοῦ Αὐτοκράτορος; 1085 II, 4) and of Christ, who give (undeserved) gifts to people; God: δικαιούμενοι δωρεὰν τῇ αὐτοῦ χάριτι Ro 3:24. Cp. 5:15a, 20f; 6:1; 11:5 (ἐκλογή 1), 6abc; Gal 1:15 (διά A 3e); Eph 1:6f (KKuhn, NTS 7, ’61, 337 [reff. to Qumran lit.]); 2:5, 7, 8; cp. Pol 1:3; 2 Th 1:12; 2:16; 2 Ti 1:9; Tit 2:11 (ἡ χάρ. τοῦ θεοῦ σωτήριος; s. Dibelius, Hdb. exc. after Tit 2:14); 3:7; Hb 2:9 (χωρίς 2aα); 4:16a (DdeSilva, JBL 115, ’96, 100–103); 1 Cl 50:3; ISm 9:2; IPol 7:3. ἐν χάρ[ιτι θεοῦ] AcPl Ha 7, 23 (restoration uncertain). κατὰ χάριν as a favor, out of goodwill (cp. Pla., Leg. 740c; schol. on Soph., Oed. Col. 1751 p. 468 Papag.) Ro 4:4 (opp. κατὰ ὀφείλημα), 16.—The beneficence or favor of Christ: διὰ τῆς χάριτος τοῦ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ πιστεύομεν σωθῆναι Ac 15:11. Cp. Ro 5:15b; 2 Cor 8:9; 1 Ti 1:14; IPhld 8:1. On Ac 2:47 in this sense s. TAnderson, NTS 34, ’88, 604–10.ⓑ pass., that which one experiences fr. another (Arrian, Anab. Alex. 3, 26, 4) χάριν ἔχειν have favor 3J 4 v.l. πρός τινα with someone=win his respect Ac 2:47 (cp. 2a end; cp. Pind., O. 7, 89f χάριν καὶ ποτʼ ἀστῶν καὶ ποτὶ ξείνων grant him respect in the presence of his townfolk as well as strangers); παρά τινι (Appian, Bell. Civ. 2, 89 §376) Hm 10, 3, 1, cp. 5, 1, 5. εὑρεῖν χάριν παρά τινι (Philo, Leg. All. 3, 77, end) Lk 1:30; Hs 5, 2, 10; ἐνώπιόν τινος Ac 7:46; GJs 11:2 (JosAs 15:14). ἐν τοῖς μέλλουσι μετανοεῖν among those who are about to repent Hm 12, 3, 3. Ἰησοῦς προέκοπτεν χάριτι παρὰ θεῷ καὶ ἀνθρώποις Lk 2:52 (an indication of exceptional ἀρετή, cp. Pind. above). Cp. Ac 4:33; 7:10 (ἐναντίον Φαραώ); Hb 4:16b.—ποία ὑμῖν χάρις ἐστίν; what credit is that to you? Lk 6:32–34; s. D 1:3; 2 Cl 13:4. Cp. 1 Cor 9:16 v.l. In these passages the mng. comes close to reward (s. Wetter [5 below] 209ff w. reff.).—Also by metonymy that which brings someone (God’s) favor or wins a favorable response fr. God 1 Pt 2:19, 20.ⓒ In Christian epistolary lit. fr. the time of Paul χάρις is found w. the sense (divine) favor in fixed formulas at the beginning and end of letters (Zahn on Gal 1:3; vDobschütz on 1 Th 1:1; ELohmeyer, ZNW 26, 1927, 158ff; APujol, De Salutat. Apost. ‘Gratia vobis et pax’: Verb. Dom. 12, ’32, 38–40; 76–82; WFoerster, TW II ’34, 409ff; Goodsp., Probs. 141f. S. also the lit. s.v. χαίρω 2b). At the beginning of a letter χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη (sc. εἴη; New Docs 8, 127f) Ro 1:7; 1 Cor 1:3; 2 Cor 1:2; Gal 1:3; Eph 1:2; Phil 1:2; Col 1:2; 1 Th 1:1; 2 Th 1:2; Phlm 3; Rv 1:4; without ὑμῖν Tit 1:4. χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη πληθυνθείη 1 Pt 1:2; 2 Pt 1:2; 1 Cl ins. χάρις, ἔλεος, εἰρήνη 1 Ti 1:2; 2 Ti 1:2; 2J 3 (on the triplet cp. En 5:7 φῶς καὶ χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη).—At the end ἡ χάρις (τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ etc.) μεθʼ ὑμῶν (or μετὰ πάντων ὑμῶν etc.) Ro 16:20, 23 (24) v.l.; 1 Cor 16:23; 2 Cor 13:13; Gal 6:18; Eph 6:24; Phil 4:23; Col 4:18; 1 Th 5:28; 2 Th 3:18; 1 Ti 6:21; 2 Ti 4:22; Tit 3:15; Phlm 25; Hb 13:25; Rv 22:21; 1 Cl 65:2. ἔσται ἡ χάρις μετὰ πάντων τῶν φοβουμένων τὸν Κύριον GJs 25:2. ὁ κύριος τῆς δόξης καὶ πάσης χάριτος μετὰ τοῦ πνεύματος ὑμῶν B 21:9. χάρις ὑμῖν, ἔλεος, εἰρήνη, ὑπομονὴ διὰ παντός ISm 12:2. ἔρρωσθε ἐν χάριτι θεοῦ 13:2.③ practical application of goodwill, (a sign of) favor, gracious deed/gift, benefactionⓐ on the part of humans (X., Symp. 8, 36, Ages. 4, 3; Appian, Bell. Civ. 1, 49 §213; Dionys. Hal. 2, 15, 4) χάριν (-ιτα) καταθέσθαι τινί (κατατίθημι 2) Ac 24:27; 25:9. αἰτεῖσθαι χάριν 25:3 (in these passages from Ac χ. suggests [political] favor, someth. one does for another within a reciprocity system. Cp. Appian, Bell. Civ. 1, 108 §506 ἐς χάριν Σύλλα=as a favor to Sulla; ApcSed 8:1 οὐκ ἐποίησάς μοι χάριν=you did me no favor). ἵνα δευτέραν χάριν σχῆτε that you might have a second proof of my goodwill 2 Cor 1:15 (unless χάρις here means delight [so in poetry, Pind. et al., but also Pla., Isocr.; L-S-J-M s.v. χάρις IV; cp. also the quot. fr. Apollodorus at the beg. of the present entry, and the fact that χαρά is v.l. in 2 Cor 1:15]; in that case δευτέρα means double; but s. comm.). Of the collection for Jerusalem (cp. Appian, Bell. Civ. 3, 42 §173 χάριτας λαμβάνειν=receive gifts) 1 Cor 16:3; 2 Cor 8:4, 6f, 19 (DdeSilva, JBL 115, ’96, 101). Cp. B 21:7.—Eph 4:29 may suggest a demonstration of human favor (cp. Plut., Mor. 514e χάριν παρασκευάζοντες ἀλλήλοις), but a ref. to the means by which divine grace is mediated is not to be ruled out (s. b below).ⓑ on the part of God and Christ; the context will show whether the emphasis is upon the possession of divine favor as a source of blessings for the believer, or upon a store of favor that is dispensed, or a favored status (i.e. standing in God’s favor) that is brought about, or a gracious deed wrought by God in Christ, or a gracious work that grows fr. more to more (so in contrast to the old covenant Mel., P. 3, 16 al.). God is called ὁ θεὸς πάσης χάριτος 1 Pt 5:10, i.e. God, who is noted for any conceivable benefit or favor; cp. B 21:9.—χάριν διδόναι τινί show favor to someone (Anacr. 110 Diehl; Appian, Ital. 5 §10): τὸν δόντα αὐτῷ τὴν χάριν GJs 14:2. ταπεινοῖς δίδωσι χάριν (Pr 3:34) Js 4:6b; 1 Pt 5:5; 1 Cl 30:2; without a dat. Js 4:6a (Menand., Epitr. 231 S. [55 Kö.]). Perh. καὶ ἔβαλλε κύριος … χάριν ἐπʼ αὐτήν GJs 7:3 (but s. 1 above). The Logos is πλήρης χάριτος J 1:14. Those who belong to him receive of the fullness of his grace, χάριν ἀντὶ χάριτος vs. 16 (ἀντί 2). Cp. vs. 17. τὴν χάριν ταύτην ἐν ᾗ ἑστήκαμεν this favor (of God) we now enjoy Ro 5:2 (Goodsp.).—5:17; 1 Cor 1:4; 2 Cor 4:15 (divine beneficence in conversion); cp. Ac 11:23; 6:1; Gal 1:6 (by Christ’s gracious deed); 2:21; 5:4; Col 1:6; 2 Ti 2:1; Hb 12:15; 13:9; 1 Pt 1:10, 13; 3:7 (συνκληρονόμοι χάριτος ζωῆς fellow-heirs of the gift that spells life; s. ζωή 2bα); 5:12; 2 Pt 3:18; Jd 4; IPhld 11:1; ISm 6:2. Christians stand ὑπὸ χάριν under God’s gracious will as expressed in their release from legal constraint Ro 6:14f, or they come ὑπὸ τὸν ζυγὸν τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ 1 Cl 16:17 (ζυγός 1). The proclamation of salvation is the message of divine beneficence τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τῆς χάριτος τοῦ θεοῦ Ac 20:24 or ὁ λόγος τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ (=τοῦ κυρίου) 14:3; 20:32. Even the gospel message can be called ἡ χάρις τοῦ θεοῦ 13:43; cp. 18:27; MPol 2:3. τὸ πνεῦμα τῆς χάριτος the Spirit from or through whom (God’s) favor is shown Hb 10:29 (AArgyle, Grace and the Covenant: ET 60, ’48/49, 26f).—Pl. benefits, favors (Diod S 3, 2, 4; 3, 73, 6; Sb 8139, 4 [ins of I B.C.] of Isis; Jos., C. Ap. 2, 190) 1 Cl 23:1.—Nelson Glueck, Das Wort ḥesed etc. 1927, but s. FAndersen, ‘Yahweh, the Kind and Sensitive God’: God Who is Rich in Mercy, ed. PO’Brien/DPeterson ’86.④ exceptional effect produced by generosity, favor. Of effects produced by divine beneficence which go beyond those associated with a specific Christian’s status (ins μεγάλαι χάριτες τοῦ θεου: FCumont, Syria 7, 1926, 347ff), in the congregations of Macedonia 2 Cor 8:1 and Corinth 9:14; cp. vs. 8; in Rome AcPl Ha 7, 8. The Christian confessor is in full possession of divine grace ISm 11:1. Paul knows that through the χάρις of God he has been called to be an apostle, and that he has been fitted out w. the powers and capabilities requisite for this office fr. the same source: Ro 1:5; 12:3; 15:15; 1 Cor 3:10; 15:10ab (for the subject matter cp. Polyb. 12, 12b, 3 αὐτὸν [Alex. the Great] ὑπὸ τοῦ δαιμονίου τετευχέναι τούτων ὧν ἔτυχεν=whatever he has received he has received from what is divine. [For this reason he does not deserve any divine honors.]); 2 Cor 12:9; Gal 2:9; Eph 3:2, 7f; Phil 1:7.—The χάρις of God manifests itself in various χαρίσματα: Ro 12:6; Eph 4:7; 1 Pt 4:10. This brings into view a number of passages in which χάρις is evidently to be understood in a very concrete sense. It is hardly to be differentiated fr. δύναμις (θεοῦ) or fr. γνῶσις or δόξα (q.v. 1b. On this subj. s. Wetter [5 below] p. 94ff; esp. 130ff; pap in the GLumbroso Festschr. 1925, 212ff: χάρις, δύναμις, πνεῦμα w. essentially the same mng.; PGM 4, 2438; 3165; Herm. Wr. 1, 32; Just., D. 87, 5 ἀπὸ χάριτος τῆς δυνάμεως τοῦ πνεύματος). οὐκ ἐν σοφίᾳ σαρκικῇ ἀλλʼ ἐν χάριτι θεοῦ 2 Cor 1:12. οὐκ ἐγὼ δὲ ἀλλὰ ἡ χάρις τοῦ θεοῦ σὺν ἐμοί 1 Cor 15:10c. αὐξάνετε ἐν χάριτι καὶ γνώσει τοῦ κυρίου 2 Pt 3:18; cp. 1 Cl 55:3; B 1:2 (τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάρις). Stephen is said to be πλήρης χάριτος καὶ δυνάμεως Ac 6:8. Divine power fills the Christian confessor or martyr w. a radiant glow MPol 12:1 (but s. 1 above). As the typical quality of the age to come, contrasted w. the κόσμος D 10:6.⑤ response to generosity or beneficence, thanks, gratitude (a fundamental component in the Gr-Rom. reciprocity system; exx. fr. later times: Diod S 11, 71, 4 [χάριτες=proofs of gratitude]; Appian, Syr. 3, 12; 13. Cp. Wetter [below] p. 206f) χάριν ἔχειν τινί be grateful to someone (Eur., Hec. 767; X., An. 2, 5, 14; Pla., Phlb. 54d; Ath. 2, 1; PLips 104, 14 [I B.C.] χάριν σοι ἔχω) foll. by ὅτι (Epict. 3, 5, 10; Jos., C. Ap. 1, 270; 2, 49) Lk 17:9 (ERiggenbach, NKZ 34, 1923, 439–43); mostly of gratitude to God or Christ; χάρις in our lit. as a whole, in the sense gratitude, refers to appropriate respone to the Deity for benefits conferred (Hom., Pind., Thu. et al.; ins, pap, LXX; Jos., Ant. 7, 208) χάριν ἔχω τῷ θεῷ (POxy 113, 13 [II A.D.] χάριν ἔχω θεοῖς πᾶσιν.—Epict. 4, 7, 9) 2 Ti 1:3; foll. by ὅτι because 1 Ti 1:12 (Herm. Wr. 6, 4 κἀγὼ χάριν ἔχω τῷ θεῷ …, ὅτι; Jos., Ant. 4, 316); χάριν ἔχειν ἐπί τινι be grateful for someth. Phlm 7 v.l. (to humans). ἔχωμεν χάριν let us be thankful (to God) Hb 12:28 (the reason for it is given by the preceding ptc. παραλαμβάνοντες). Elliptically (B-D-F §128, 6; cp. Rob. 1201f) χάρις (ἔστω) τῷ θεῷ (X., Oec. 8, 16 πολλὴ χάρις τοῖς θεοῖς; Epict. 4, 4, 7 χάρις τῷ θεῳ; BGU 843, 6 [I/II A.D.] χάρις τοῖς θεοῖς al. in pap since III B.C..—Philo, Rer. Div. Her. 309) Ro 7:25; MPol 3:1. Foll. by ὅτι (X., An. 3, 3, 14 τοῖς θεοῖς χάρις ὅτι; PFay 124, 16 τοῖς θεοῖς ἐστιν χάρις ὅτι; Epict. 4, 5, 9) Ro 6:17. Foll. by ἐπί τινι for someth. (UPZ 108, 30 [99 B.C.]) 2 Cor 9:15. The reason for the thanks is given in the ptc. agreeing w. τῷ θεῷ 2:14; 8:16; 1 Cor 15:57 (cp. Jos., Ant. 6, 145; Philo, Somn. 2, 213). Thankfulness (Appian, Bell. Civ. 3, 15 §51 πρός τινα=toward someone) χάριτι in thankfulness 10:30. So prob. also ἐν τῇ χάριτι in a thankful spirit Col 3:16 (Dibelius, Hdb. ad loc.). πλησθῆναι χαρᾶς καὶ χάριτος AcPl Ha 8, 7. S. εὐχαριστέω, end. Also PSchubert, Form and Function of the Pauline Thanksgivings ’39.—OLoew, Χάρις, diss., Marburg 1908; GWetter, Charis 1913; AvHarnack, Sanftmut, Huld u. Demut in der alten Kirche: JKaftan Festschr. 1920, 113ff; NBonwetsch, Zur Geschichte des Begriffs Gnade in der alten Kirche: Harnack Festgabe 1921, 93–101; EBurton, Gal ICC 1921, 423f; WWhitley, The Doctrine of Grace ’32; JMoffatt, Grace in the NT ’31; RWinkler, D. Gnade im NT: ZST 10, ’33, 642–80; RHomann, D. Gnade in d. Syn. Ev.: ibid. 328–48; JWobbe, D. Charisgedanke b. Pls ’32; RBultmann, Theologie des NT ’48, 283–310 (Paul); HBoers, Ἀγάπη and Χάρις in Paul’s Thought: CBQ 59, ’97, 693–713; on 2 Cor 8: FDanker, Augsburg Comm. 2 Cor, 116–34; PRousselot, La Grâce d’après St. Jean et d’après St. Paul: SR 18, 1928, 87–108, Christent. u. Wissensch. 8, ’32, 402–30; JMontgomery, Hebrew Hesed and Gk. Charis: HTR 32, ’39, 97–102; Dodd 61f; TTorrance, The Doctrine of Grace in the Apost. Fathers, ’48; JRenié, Studia Anselmiana 27f, ’51, 340–50; CRSmith, The Bible Doctrine of Grace, ’56; EFlack, The Concept of Grace in Bibl. Thought: Bibl. Studies in Memory of HAlleman, ed. Myers, ’60, 137–54; DDoughty, NTS 19, ’73, 163–80.—B. 1166. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. Spicq. Sv. -
5 αὐτός
Aαὐτόν Leg.Gort. 3.4
, al.), reflexive Pron., self:—in oblique cases used for the personal Pron., him, her, it:—with Art., ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (also ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.I self, myself, thyself, etc., acc. to the person of the Verb: freq. joined with ἐγώ, σύ, etc. (v. infr. 10),1 one's true self, the soul, not the body, Od.11.602; reversely, body, not soul, Il.1.4; oneself, as opp. others who are less prominent, as king to subject, 6.18; Zeus to other gods, 8.4; bird to young, 2.317; man to wife and children, Od.14.265; warrior to horses, Il.2.466, or to weapons, 1.47; shepherd to herd, Od.9.167, cf. Il.1.51; Trojans to allies, 11.220; seamen to ships, 7.338: generally, whole to parts, ib. 474; so laterἡ σίδη καὶ αὐτὴ καὶ τὰ φύλλα Thphr.HP4.10.7
, cf. X.Ath.1.19, Pl.Grg. 511e, etc.;αὐτή τε Μανδάνη καὶ τὸν υἱὸν ἔχουσα X.Cyr.1.3.1
;αὐ. τε καὶ τὰ ποιήματα βουλόμενος ἐπιδεῖξαι Pl.R. 398a
: abs., the Master, as in the Pythag. phrase Αὐτὸς ἔφα, Lat. Ipse dixit; so τίς οὗτος.. ;— Αὐτός, i.e. Socrates, Ar.Nu. 218; ἀναβόησον Αὐτόν ib. 219;ἀνοιγέτω τις δώματ'· Αὐτὸς ἔρχεται
the Master,Id.
Fr. 268, cf. Pl.Prt. 314d, Thphr.Char.2.4, Men.Sam.41:αὐ. ἀϋτεῖ Theoc.24.50
: neut., αὐτὸ σημανεῖ the result will show, E.Ph. 623;αὐτὸ δηλώσει D.19.157
;αὐτὰ δηλοῖ Pl.Prt. 329b
; αὐτὸ διδάξει ib. 324a; esp.αὐτὸ δείξει Cratin. 177
, Pl.Hp.Ma. 288b, cf. Tht. 200e; in full,τάχ' αὐτὸ δείξει τοὔργον S.Fr. 388
;τοὔργον τάχ' αὐτὸ δείξει Ar.Lys. 375
; redupl., ; of things, the very, ὑπὸ λόφον αὐτόν, i.e. just, exactly under.., Il.13.615; πρὸς αὐταῖς ταῖς θύραις close by the door, Lys.12.12; αὐτὸ τὸ δέον the very thing needed, X. An.4.7.7; ; αὐτὸ τὸ περίορθρον the point of dawn, Th.2.3; αὐτὰ τὰ ἐναντία the very opposite, X.Mem. 4.5.7;αὐτὰ τὰ χρήσιμα καὶ ἀναγκαῖα D.H.Th.23
; even,οὔ μοι μέλει ἄλγος οὔτ' αὐτῆς Ἑκάβης Il.6.451
; .—In these senses αὐτός in Prose either precedes both the Art. and Subst., or follows both, e.g. αὐτὸς ὁ υἱός or ὁ υἱὸς αὐτός. The Art. is sts. omitted with proper names, or Nouns denoting individuals,αὐτὸς Μένων X.An.2.1.5
; αὐτὸς βασιλεύς ib.1.7.11.2 of oneself, of one's own accord,ἀλλά τις αὐ. ἴτω Il.17.254
; ;καταπαύσομεν· οἱ δὲ καὶ αὐτοὶ παυέσθων Od.2.168
;ἥξει γὰρ αὐτά S.OT 341
; also, in person,τῶν πραγμάτων ὑμῖν.. αὐτοῖς ἀντιληπτέον D.1.2
.3 by oneself or itself, alone, αὐτός περ ἐών although alone, Il.8.99; αὐτὸς ἐγείναο παῖδ', i.e. without a mother, 5.880, cf. Hes.Th. 924; by himself,Hdt.
5.85; αὐτοὶ γάρ ἐσμεν we are by ourselves, i.e. among friends, Ar.Ach. 504, cf. Th. 472, Pl.Prm. 137b, Herod.6.70, Plu.2.755c, Luc. DDeor.10.2;αὐτοῖς τοῖς ἀνδράσι.. ἢ καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις X.An.2.3.7
;ἄνευ τοῦ σίτου τὸ ὄψον αὐτὸ ἐσθίειν Id.Mem.3.14.3
;τὸν τρίβωνα ὃν αὐτὸν φορεῖ Thphr.Char.22.13
(prob.); αὐτὰ γὰρ ἔστιν ταῦτα these and no others, Emp.21.13, al.: strengthd., αὐτὸς κτήσατο οἶος himself alone, Od.14.450; αὐτὸς μόνος, v. μόνος II; αὐτὸς καθ' αὑτόν, v. ἑαυτοῦ.4 in Philosophy, by or in itself, of an abstract concept or idea,δίκαιον αὐτό Pl.Phd. 65d
;αὐτὸ τὸ ἕν Id.Prm. 143a
, al., cf. Arist. Metaph. 997b8: neut., αὐτό is freq. in this sense, attached to Nouns of all genders,οὐκ αὐτὸ δικαιοσύνην ἐπαινοῦντες ἀλλὰ τὰς ἀπ' αὐτῆς εὐδοκιμήσεις Pl.R. 363a
; less freq. with Art.,τί ποτ' ἐστὶν αὐτὸ ἡ ἀρετή Id.Prt. 360e
; more fully, εἰ αὐτὸ τοῦτο πατέρα ἠρώτων, ἆρα ὁ πατήρ ἐστι πατήρ τινος, ἢ οὔ; Id.Smp. 199d; ἀδελφός, αὐτὸ τοῦτο ὅπερ ἔστιν the ideal, abstract brother, ibid.e: later, in compos., αὐτοαγαθόν, αὐτοάνθρωπος, etc. (q. v.), cf. Arist.Metaph. 1040b33; less freq. agreeing with the Subst., , etc.; doubled,ἐκ τῆς εἰκόνος μανθάνειν αὐτήν τε αὐτήν, εἰ καλῶς εἴκασται
its very self,Id.
Cra. 439a.5 in dat. with Subst., in one, together, ἀνόρουσεν αὐτῇ σὺν φόρμιγγι he sprang up lyre in hand, Il.9.194; αὐτῇ σὺν πήληκι κάρη helmet and all, 14.498, cf. Od.13.118;αὐτῷ σὺν ἄγγει E. Ion 32
, cf. Hipp. 1213; also withoutσύν, αὐτῇ κεν γαίῃ ἐρύσαι Il.8.24
: so freq. in Prose and Poetry, αὐτοῖς ἀνδράσι men and all, Hdt.6.93; αὐτοῖσι συμμάχοισι allies and all, A.Pr. 223 (lyr.); : with Art., ;αὐτοῖσι τοῖς πόρπαξι Ar.Eq. 849
, etc.;αὐτοῖς τοῖς ἵπποις κατακρημνισθῆναι X.Cyr.1.4.7
.6 added to ordinal Numbers, e.g. πέμπτος αὐτός himself the fifth, i. e. himself with four others, Th.1.46, cf. 8.35, X.HG2.2.17, Apoc.17.11, etc.:— αὐτός always being the chief person.7 freq. coupled withοὗτος, τοῦτ' αὐτό ἐστι τὸ ζητηθέν Pl.Plt. 267c
, etc.;αὐτὸ τοῦτο μόνον Id.Grg. 500b
; alsoλεγόντων ἄλλο μὲν οὐδέν.. αὐτὰ δὲ τάδε Th.1.139
;πόλεις ἄλλας τε καὶ αὐτὸ τοῦτο τὸ Βυζάντιον X.An.7.1.27
; ταῦτα ἥκω αὐτὰ ἵνα .. Pl.Prt. 310e.9 repeated in apodosi for emphasis,αὐτὸς ἐπαγγειλάμενος σώσειν.. αὐτὸς ἀπώλεσεν Lys.12.68
, cf. A.Fr. 350, X.An.3.2.4.10 in connexion with the person. Pron.,ἐγὼν αὐτός Od.2.194
;σέθεν αὐτοῦ Il.23.312
;νωΐτερον αὐτῶν 15.39
(always divisim in Hom.); folld. by an enclit. Pron.,αὐτόν μιν Od.4.244
; soαὐτὸν γάρ σε δεῖ Προμηθέως A.Pr.86
; alsoαὐτὸς ἔγωγε Pl.Phd. 59b
, etc.:— after Hom. in the oblique cases αὐτός coalesces with the Pron., ἐμαυτοῦ, σεαυτοῦ (these not in Alc. or Sapph., A.D.Pron.80.10 sqq.), ἑαυτοῦ, etc. (q. v.).b with person. Pron. omitted, αὐτός.. ἧσθαι λιλαίομαι, for ἐγὼ αὐτός, Il.13.252; αὐτὸν ἐλέησον, for ἐμὲ αὐτόν, 24.503;αὐτῶν γὰρ ἀπωλόμεθ' ἀφραδίῃσιν Od.10.27
; in 2.33 οἱ αὐτῷ is simply a strengthd. form of οἱ; and so in [dialect] Att., when σὲ αὐτόν, ἐμοὶ αὐτῷ, etc., are read divisim, they are emphatic, not reflexive; in this case αὐτός generally precedes the person. Pron., cf. X.Cyr.6.2.25 with 6.1.14.c with the reflexive ἑαυτοῦ, αὑτοῦ, etc., to add force and definiteness,αὐτὸς καθ' αὑτοῦ A.Th. 406
; αὐτοὶ ὑφ' αὑτῶν ib. 194;αὐτοὶ καθ' αὑτούς X.Mem.3.5.4
;αὐτὸ καθ' αὑτό Pl.Tht. 201e
; sts. between the Art. and reflex. Pron., , cf. Pr. 762; : also κατ' αὐτὺ ([dialect] Boeot. for αὐτοὶ)αὐτῶν IG7.3172.121
(Orchom. [dialect] Boeot.).d αὐτοῦ, αὐτῶν with possess. Pron.,πατρὸς κλέος ἠδ' ἐμὸν αὐτοῦ Il.6.446
;θρῆνον.. ἐμὸν τὸν αὐτῆς A.Ag. 1323
; ; τοῖς οἷσιν αὐτοῦ ib. 1248; ;τοῖς ἡμετέροις αὐτῶν φίλοις X.An. 7.1.29
.e αὐτὸς ἑαυτοῦ with [comp] Comp. and [comp] Sup. Adj.,αὐτὸς ἑωυτοῦ ῥέει πολλῷ ὑποδεέστερος Hdt.2.25
;τῇ εὐρυτάτη ἐστὶ αὐτὴ ἑωυτῆς Id.1.203
.11 αὐτός for ὁ αὐτός, the same, Il.12.225, Od.8.107, 16.138, Pi.N.5.1 (never in Trag.), and in later Prose,αὐταῖς ταῖς ἡμέραις IG 14.966
(ii A. D.), cf. Ev.Luc.23.12.12 [comp] Comp.αὐτότερος Epich.5
: [comp] Sup. his very self,Ar.
Pl.83: neut. pl. αὐτότατα dub. in Phld.Piet.80. Adv., [comp] Comp.αὐτοτέρως Gal.18(2).431
.II he, she, it, for the simple Pron. of 3 pers., only in oblique cases (exc. in later Gk., Ev.Luc.4.15, etc.), and rarely first in a sentence, Pl.La. 194e, and later, Ep.Eph.2.10, etc.: rare in [dialect] Ep., Il. 12.204 (where Hdn. treated it as enclitic), and mostly emphatic, ib.14.457, Od.16.388; so in Trag., E.Hel. 421: in Prose, to recall a Noun used earlier in the sentence,ἐγὼ μὲν οὖν βασιλέα.. οὐκ οἶδα ὅ τι δεῖ αὐτὸν ὀμόσαι X.An.2.4.7
;πειράσομαι τῷ πάππῳ.. συμμαχεῖν αὐτῷ Id.Cyr.1.3.15
;ἄνδρα δὴ.. εἰ ἀφίκοιτο εἰς τὴν πόλιν, προσκυνοῖμεν ἂν αὐτόν Pl.R. 398a
; after a Relative,ὅς κε θεοῖς ἐπιπείθηται.. ἔκλυον αὐτοῦ Il.1.218
;οὓς μὴ εὕρισκον, κενοτάφιον αὐτοῖς ἐποίησαν X.An.6
. 4.9, cf. 1.9.29; esp. where a second Verb requires a change of case in the Pron.,οἳ ἂν ἐξελεγχθῶσι.. ὡς προδότας αὐτοὺς ὄντας τιμωρηθῆναι Id.An.2.5.27
;ἐκεῖνοι οἷς οὐκ ἐχαρίζονθ' οἱ λέγοντες οὐδ' ἐφίλουν αὐτούς D.3.24
; in subdivisions,ὅσοι.. οἱ μὲν αὐτῶν.. X.Cyr.1.1.1
, cf. Pl.Chrm. 168e; later, pleonastically after a Relative,ὧν ὁ μὲν αὐτῶν Call.Epigr.43
, cf. Ev.Luc.3.16, Apoc.7.2, etc.: in S.Ph. 316 αὐτοῖς is emphatic 'in their own persons'.III with Art. ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό, and [dialect] Att. [var] contr. αὑτός, αὑτή, ταὐτό and ταὐτόν (as required by the metre, cf. S.OT 734 with 325, and in Prose to avoid hiatus): gen. ταὐτοῦ, dat. ταὐτῷ, pl. neut. ταὐτά; [dialect] Ion. ὡυτός, τὠυτό:—the very one, the same, rare in Hom., Il. 6.391, Od.7.55, 326;ὁ αὐ. εἰμι τῇ γνώμῃ Th.3.38
, cf. 5.75;ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ. αἱ γνῶμαι ἔφερον Id.1.79
: c. dat., to denote sameness or agreement, esp. in Prose,τὠυτὸ ἂν ὑμῖν ἐπρήσσομεν Hdt.4.119
; ; ὁ αὐτὸς τῷ λίθῳ the same as the stone, Pl. Euthd. 298a; ἐν ταὐτῷ εἶναί τινι to be in the place with.., X.An.3.1.27; προσίεσθαί τινα ἐς ταὐτὸ ἑαυτῷ to have a person meet one, ib.30, cf. A.Ch. 210;κατὰ ταὐτὰ τῷ Νείλῳ Hdt.2.20
;τῇ αὐτῇ.. καί Id.4.109
; ;ὁ αὐτός.. ὥσπερ Pl.Phd. 86a
; face to face,Jul.
Or.2.5a0.2 in later Greek, the said, the above-named,Ἡρώδης ὁ αὐ. PLille23.8
(iii B. C.), etc.IV Adverbial phrases:1 simply, merely,Ph.
2.252, etc.;αὐ. μόνον ἐργάτης Luc.Somn.9
;αὐ. μόνον τὸ ὄνομα τῆς φωνῆς A.D.Synt.22.20
.3 αὐτὸ τοῦτο as Adv., PGrenf.1.114 (ii B. C.), 2 Ep.Pet. 1.5;τῆς αὐτὸ τοῦτο κινουμένης σφαίρας Iamb. Comm.Math.17
.4 with Preps., added together, making a total,PLond.
2.196.37 (ii A. D.); together, at the same time,Act.Ap.
14.1, etc.; but just then,Hdn.
1.12.3.V In Compos.:1 of or by oneself, self-.., as in αὐτοδίδακτος, αὐτογνώμων, αὐτόματος: and so, independently, as in αὐτοκράτωρ, αὐτόνομος.2 hence, as a second self, very.., bodily, as with proper names, Αὐτοθαΐς.3 in the abstract, the ideal, v. supr.1.4.4 precisely, as in αὐτόδεκα.5 rarely with reflex. sense of ἀλλήλων, as in αὐτοκτονέω.6 in one piece with, together with, as in αὐτόκωπος, αὐτοχείλης, αὐτόπρεμνος, αὐτόρριζος.7 by itself: hence, only, as in αὐτόξυλος, αὐτόποκος.—For αὐτοῦ, αὐτῶς, etc., v. the respective Arts. -
6 εἰμί
εἰμί (Hom.+) impv. ἴσθι, ἔσο IPol 4:1, ἔστω—also colloq. ἤτω (BGU 276, 24; 419, 13; POxy 533, 9; Ps 103:31; 1 Macc 10:31) 1 Cor 16:22; Js 5:12; 1 Cl 48:5; Hv 3, 3, 4;—3 pers. pl. ἔστωσαν (ins since 200 B.C. Meisterhans3-Schw. 191; PPetr III, 2, 22 [237 B.C.]) Lk 12:35; 1 Ti 3:12; GJs 7:2. Inf. εἶναι. Impf. 1 pers. only mid. ἤμην (Jos., Bell. 1, 389; 631; s. further below); ἦν only Ac 20:18 D, 2 pers. ἦσθα (Jos., Ant. 6, 104) Mt 26:69; Mk 14:67 and ἦς (Lobeck, Phryn. 149 ‘say ἦσθα’; Jos., Ant. 17, 110 al.; Sb 6262, 16 [III A.D.]) Mt 25:21, 23 al., 3 sg. ἦν, 1 pl. ἦμεν. Beside this the mid. form ἤμην (pap since III B.C.; Job 29:16; Tob 12:13 BA), s. above, gives the pl. ἤμεθα (pap since III B.C.; Bar 1:19) Mt 23:30; Ac 27:37; Eph 2:3. Both forms in succession Gal. 4:3. Fut. ἔσομαι, ptc. ἐσόμενος. The mss. vary in choice of act. or mid., but like the edd. lean toward the mid. (W-S. §14, 1; Mlt-H. 201–3; Rob. index; B-D-F §98; Rdm.2 99; 101f; Helbing 108f; Reinhold 86f). Also s. ἔνι.① be, exist, be on hand a pred. use (for other pred. use s. 3a, 4, 5, 6, 7): of God (Epicurus in Diog. L. 10, 123 θεοί εἰσιν; Zaleucus in Diod S 12, 20, 2 θεοὺς εἶναι; Wsd 12:13; Just., D. 128, 4 angels) ἔστιν ὁ θεός God exists Hb 11:6; cp. 1 Cor 8:5. ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν the one who is and who was (cp. SibOr 3, 16; as amulet PMich 155, 3 [II A.D.] ὁ ὢν θεὸς ὁ Ἰάω κύριος παντοκράτωρ=the god … who exists.) Rv 11:17; 16:5. ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν καὶ ὁ ἐρχόμενος, in this and the two preceding passages ἦν is treated as a ptc. (for the unusual use of ἦν cp. Simonides 74 D.: ἦν ἑκατὸν φιάλαι) 1:4; 4:8 (cp. Ex 3:14; Wsd 13:1; Paus. 10, 12, 10 Ζεὺς ἦν, Ζ. ἔστι, Ζ. ἔσσεται; cp. Theosophien 18. S. OWeinreich, ARW 19, 1919, 178f). οὐδʼ εἶναι θεὸν παντοκράτορα AcPlCor 1:11. ἐγώ εἰμι (ins in the Athena-Isis temple of Saïs in Plut., Is. et Os. 9, 354c: ἐγώ εἰμι πᾶν τὸ γεγονὸς κ. ὸ̓ν κ. ἐσόμενον. On the role of Isis in Gk. rel. s. IBergman, Ich bin Isis ’68; RMerkelbach, Isis Regina—Zeus Sarapis ’95; for further lit. s. MGustafson in: Prayer fr. Alexander to Constantine, ed. MKiley et al. ’97, 158.) Rv 1:8 (s. ἐγώ beg.). ὁ ὤν, … θεός Ro 9:5 is classed here and taken to mean Christ by JWordsworth ad loc. and HWarner, JTS 48, ’47, 203f. Of the λόγος: ἐν ἀρχῇ ἦν ὁ λ. J 1:1 (for ἦν cp. Herm. Wr. 1, 4; 3, 1b ἦν σκότος, Fgm. IX 1 p. 422, 23 Sc. γέγονεν ἡ ὕλη καὶ ἦν).—Of Christ πρὶν Ἀβραὰμ γενέσθαι, ἐγὼ εἰμί before Abraham was born, I am 8:58 (on the pres. εἰμί cp. Parmenides 8, 5: of the Eternal we cannot say ἦν οὐδʼ ἔσται, only ἔστιν; Ammonius Hermiae [Comm. in Aristotl. IV 5 ed. ABusse 1897] 6 p. 172: in Timaeus we read that we must not say of the gods τὸ ἦν ἢ τὸ ἔσται μεταβολῆς τινος ὄντα σημαντικά, μόνον δὲ τὸ ἔστι=‘was’ or ‘will be’, suggesting change, but only ‘is’; Ps 89:2; DBall, ‘I Am’ in John’s Gospel [JSNT Suppl. 124] ’96).—Of the world πρὸ τοῦ τὸν κόσμον εἶναι before the world existed 17:5. Satirically, of the beast, who parodies the Lamb, ἦν καὶ οὐκ ἔστιν Rv 17:8. Of God’s temple: ἔστιν B 16:6f it exists. τὸ μὴ ὄν that which does not exist, the unreal (Sallust. 17 p. 32, 7 and 9; Philo, Aet. M. 5; 82) Hm 1:1. τὰ ὄντα that which exists contrasted w. τὰ μὴ ὄντα Ro 4:17; cp. 1 Cor 1:28; 2 Cl 1:8. Of God κτίσας ἐκ τοῦ μὴ ὄντος τὰ ὄντα what is out of what is not Hv 1, 1, 6 (on the contrast τὰ ὄντα and τὰ μὴ ὄντα cp. Ps.-Arist. on Xenophanes: Fgm. 21, 28; Artem. 1, 51 p. 49, 19 τὰ μὴ ὄντα ὡς ὄντα; Ocellus Luc. 12; Sallust. 17, 5 p. 30, 28–32, 12; Philo, Op. M. 81; PGM 4, 3077f ποιήσαντα τὰ πάντα ἐξ ὧν οὐκ ὄντων εἰς τὸ εἶναι; 13, 272f τὸν ἐκ μὴ ὄντων εἶναι ποιήσαντα καὶ ἐξ ὄντων μὴ εἶναι; Theoph. Ant. 1, 4 [p. 64, 21] τὰ πάντα ὁ θεὸς ἐποίησεν ἐξ οὐκ ὄντων εἰς τὸ εἶναι).—Of existing in the sense be present, available, provided πολλοῦ ὄχλου ὄντος since a large crowd was present Mk 8:1. ὄντων τῶν προσφερόντων those are provided who offer Hb 8:4. οὔπω ἦν πνεῦμα the Spirit had not yet come J 7:39. ἀκούσας ὄντα σιτία when he heard that grain was available Ac 7:12.—Freq. used to introduce parables and stories (once) there was: ἄνθρωπός τις ἦν πλούσιος there was (once) a rich man Lk 16:1, 19. ἦν ἄνθρωπος ἐκ τ. Φαρισαίων there was a man among the Pharisees J 3:1.—There is, there are ὥσπερ εἰσὶν θεοὶ πολλοί as there are many gods 1 Cor 8:5. διαιρέσεις χαρισμάτων εἰσίν there are various kinds of spiritual gifts 12:4ff; 1J 5:16 al. Neg. οὐκ ἔστι there is (are) not, no (Ps 52:2; Simplicius in Epict. p. 95, 42 as a quot. from ‘tragedy’ οὐκ εἰσὶν θεοί) δίκαιος there is no righteous man Ro 3:10 (Eccl 7:20). ἀνάστασις νεκρῶν οὐκ ἔστιν there is no resurr. of the dead 1 Cor 15:12; οὐδʼ εἶναι ἀνάστασιν AcPlCor 1:12; 2:24; cp. Mt 22:23; Ac 23:8 (cp. 2 Macc 7:14). εἰσὶν οἵ, or οἵτινες there are people who (Hom. et al.; LXX; Just., D. 47, 2 εἰ μήτι εἰσὶν οἱ λέγοντες ὅτι etc.—W. sing. and pl. combined: Arrian, Ind. 24, 9 ἔστι δὲ οἳ διέφυγον=but there are some who escaped) Mt 16:28; 19:12; Mk 9:1; Lk 9:27; J 6:64; Ac 11:20. Neg. οὐδείς ἐστιν ὅς there is no one who Mk 9:39; 10:29; Lk 1:61; 18:29. As a question τίς ἐστιν ὅς; who is there that? Mt 12:11—In an unusual (perh. bureaucratic terminology) participial construction Ac 13:1 ἡ οὖσα ἐκκλησία the congregation there (cp. Ps.-Pla., Eryx. 6, 394c οἱ ὄντες ἄνθρωποι=the people with whom he has to deal; PLond III 1168, 5 p. 136 [18 A.D.] ἐπὶ ταῖς οὔσαις γειτνίαις=on the adjoining areas there; PGen 49; PSI 229, 11 τοῦ ὄντος μηνός of the current month); cp. 14:13.—αἱ οὖσαι (sc. ἐξουσίαι) those that exist Ro 13:1 (cp. UPZ 180a I, 4 [113 B.C.] ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν).② to be in close connection (with), is, freq. in statements of identity or equation, as a copula, the equative function, uniting subject and predicate. On absence of the copula, Mlt-Turner 294–310.ⓐ gener. πραΰς εἰμι I am gentle Mt 11:29. ἐγώ εἰμι Γαβριήλ Lk 1:19. σὺ εἶ ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ θεοῦ Mk 3:11; J 1:49 and very oft. ἵνα … ὁ πονηρὸς … ἐλεγχθῇ [το? s. app. in Bodm.] μὴ ὢν θεός AcPlCor 2:15 (Just., D. 3, 3 φιλολόγος οὖν τις εἶ σύ).—The pred. can be supplied fr. the context: καὶ ἐσμέν and we are (really God’s children) 1J 3:1 (Eur., Ion 309 τ. θεοῦ καλοῦμαι δοῦλος εἰμί τε. Dio Chrys. 14 [31], 58 θεοφιλεῖς οἱ χρηστοὶ λέγονται καὶ εἰσίν; Epict. 2, 16, 44 Ἡρακλῆς ἐπιστεύθη Διὸς υἱὸς εἶναι καὶ ἦν.—The ptc. ὤν, οὖσα, ὄν used w. a noun or adj.and serving as an if-, since-, or although-clause sim. functions as a copula πονηροὶ ὄντες Mt 7:11; 12:34.—Lk 20:36; J 3:4; 4:9; Ac 16:21; Ro 5:10; 1 Cor 8:7; Gal 2:3 al.).—W. adv. of quality: οὕτως εἶναι be so preceded by ὥσπερ, καθώς or followed by ὡς, ὥσπερ Mt 13:40; 24:27, 37, 39; Mk 4:26; Lk 17:26. W. dat. of pers. οὕτως ἔσται ὁ υἱὸς τ. ἀ. τῇ γενεᾷ ταύτῃ so the Human One (Son of Man) will be for this generation 11:30. εἰμὶ ὡσ/ὥσπερ I am like Mt 6:5; Lk 18:11. W. dat. ἔστω σοι ὥσπερ τελώνης he shall be to you as a tax-collector Mt 18:17. εἰμὶ ὥς τις I am like someone of outward and inward similarity 28:3; Lk 6:40; 11:44; 22:27 al. καθώς εἰμι as I am Ac 22:3; 1J 3:2, 7; 4:17.—W. demonstr. pron. (Just., A I, 16, 1 ἃ ἔφη, ταῦτά ἐστι: foll. by a quotation; sim. 48, 5 ἔστι δὲ ταῦτα; and oft.) τὰ ὀνόματά ἐστιν ταῦτα Mt 10:2. αὕτη ἐστὶν ἡ μαρτυρία J 1:19. W. inf. foll. θρησκεία αὕτη ἐστίν, ἐπισκέπτεσθαι Js 1:27. W. ὅτι foll. αὕτη ἐστὶν ἡ κρίσις, ὅτι τὸ φῶς ἐλήλυθεν J 3:19; cp. 21:24; 1J 1:5; 3:11; 5:11. W. ἵνα foll. τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ ἔργον, ἵνα πιστεύητε J 6:29; cp. vs. 39f; 15:12; 17:3; 1J 3:11, 23; 5:3. W. τηλικοῦτος: τὰ πλοῖα, τηλικαῦτα ὄντα though they are so large Js 3:4. W. τοσοῦτος: τοσοῦτων ὄντων although there were so many J 21:11. W. τοιοῦτος: τοιοῦτος ὤν Phlm 9 (cp. Just., A I, 18, 4 ὅσα ἄλλα τοιαῦτά ἐστι).—W. interrog. pron. ὑμεῖς τίνα με λέγετε εἶναι; who do you say I am? Mt 16:15; cp. 21:10; Mk 1:24; 4:41; 8:27, 29; Lk 4:34 al.; σὺ τίς εἶ; J 1:19; 8:25; 21:12 al. (cp. JosAs 14:6 τίς εἶ συ tell me ‘who you are’). σὺ τίς εἶ ὁ κρίνων; (Pla., Gorg. 452b; Strabo 6, 2, 4 σὺ τίς εἶ ὁ τὸν Ὅμηρον ψέγων ὡς μυθογράφον;) Ro 14:4; ἐγὼ τίς ἤμην; (cp. Ex 3:11) Ac 11:17; τίς εἰμι ἐγὼ ὅτι who am I, that GJs 12:2 (Ex 3:11). W. πόσος: πόσος χρόνος ἐστίν; how long a time? Mk 9:21. W. ποταπός of what sort Lk 1:29.—W. relative pron. οἷος 2 Cor 10:11; ὁποῖος Ac 26:29; 1 Cor 3:13; Gal 2:6; ὅς Rv 1:19; ὅστις Gal 5:10, 19.—W. numerals ἦσαν οἱ φαγόντες πεντακισχίλιοι ἄνδρες 6:44 (cp. Polyaenus 7, 25 ἦσαν οἱ πεσόντες ἀνδρῶν μυριάδες δέκα); cp. Ac 19:7; 23:13. Λάζαρος εἷς ἦν ἐκ τῶν ἀνακειμένων L. was one of those at the table J 12:2; cp. Gal 3:20; Js 2:19. τῶν πιστευσάντων ἦν καρδία καὶ ψυχὴ μία Ac 4:32. εἷς εἶναι be one and the same Gal 3:28. ἓν εἶναι be one J 10:30; 17:11, 21ff; 1 Cor 3:8.—οὐδʼ εἶναι τὴν πλάσιν τὴν τῶν ἀνθρώπων τοῦ θεοῦ (that) the creation of humankind is not God’s doing AcPlCor 1:13.—To establish identity the formula ἐγώ εἰμι is oft. used in the gospels (corresp. to Hebr. אֲנִי הוּא Dt 32:39; Is 43:10), in such a way that the predicate must be understood fr. the context: Mt 14:27; Mk 6:50; 13:6; 14:62; Lk 22:70; J 4:26; 6:20; 8:24, 28; 13:19; 18:5f and oft.; s. on ἐγώ.—In a question μήτι ἐγώ εἰμι; surely it is not I? Mt 26:22, 25.ⓑ to describe a special connection betw. the subject and a predicate noun ἡμεῖς ναὸς θεοῦ ἐσμεν ζῶντος we are a temple of the living God 2 Cor 6:16. ἡ ἐπιστολὴ ὑμεῖς ἐστε you are our letter (of recommendation) 3:2. σφραγίς μου τῆς ἀποστολῆς ὑμεῖς ἐστε you are the seal of my apostleship 1 Cor 9:2 and oft.ⓒ in explanations:α. to show how someth. is to be understood is a representation of, is the equivalent of; εἰμί here, too, serves as copula; we usually translate mean, so in the formula τοῦτʼ ἔστιν this or that means, that is to say (Epict., Ench. 33, 10; Arrian, Tact. 29, 3; SIG 880, 50; PFlor 157, 4; PSI 298, 9; PMert 91, 9; Jos., C. Ap. 2, 16; ApcMos 19; Just., D. 56, 23; 78, 3 al.) Mk 7:2; Ac 19:4; Ro 7:18; 9:8; 10:6, 8; Phlm 12; Hb 7:5 al.; in the sense that is (when translated) (Polyaenus 8, 14, 1 Μάξιμος ἀνηγορεύθη• τοῦτο δʼ ἄν εἴη Μέγιστον) Mt 27:46; Ac 1:19. So also w. relative pron.: ὅ ἐστιν Mk 3:17; 7:11, 34; Hb 7:2. After verbs of asking, recognizing, knowing and not knowing (Antiphanes Com. 231, 1f τὸ ζῆν τί ἐστι;) μάθετε τί ἐστιν learn what (this) means Mt 9:13. εἰ ἐγνώκειτε τί ἐστιν 12:7; cp. Mk 1:27; 9:10; Lk 20:17; J 16:17f; Eph 4:9. W. an indir. question (Stephan. Byz. s.v. Ἀγύλλα: τὶς ἠρώτα τί ἂν εἴη τὸ ὄνομα) τί ἂν εἴη ταῦτα Lk 15:26; τί εἴη τοῦτο 18:36. τίνα θέλει ταῦτα εἶναι what this means Ac 17:20; cp. 2:12, where the question is not about the mng. of terms but the significance of what is happening.—Esp. in interpr. of the parables (Artem. 1, 51 p. 48, 26 ἄρουρα οὐδὲν ἄλλο ἐστὶν ἢ γυνή=field means nothing else than woman) ὁ ἀγρός ἐστιν ὁ κόσμος the field means the world Mt 13:38; cp. vss. 19f, 22f; Mk 4:15f, 18, 20; Lk 8:11ff (cp. Gen 41:26f; Ezk 37:11; Ath. 22, 4 [Stoic interpr. of myths]). On τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ σῶμά μου Mt 26:26; Mk 14:22; Lk 22:19 and its various interpretations, see lit. s.v. εὐχαριστία. Cp. Hipponax (VI B.C.) 45 Diehl αὕτη γάρ ἐστι συμφορή=this means misfortune.β. to be of relative significance, be of moment or importance, amount to someth. w. indef. pron. εἰδωλόθυτόν τί ἐστιν meat offered to idols means anything 1 Cor 10:19. Esp. εἰμί τι I mean someth. of pers. 1 Cor 3:7; Gal 2:6; 6:3; and of things vs. 15. εἰμί τις Ac 5:36.—Of no account ἐμοὶ εἰς ἐλάχιστόν ἐστιν (telescoped fr. ἐλάχ. ἐστιν and εἰς ἐλάχ. γίνεται, of which there are many exx. in Schmid, I 398; II 161, 237; III 281; IV 455) it is of little or no importance to me 1 Cor 4:3.③ be in reference to location, persons, condition, or time, beⓐ of various relations or positions involving a place or thing: w. ἀπό: εἶναι ἀπό τινος be or come from a certain place (X., An. 2, 4, 13) J 1:44.—W. ἐν: ἐν τοῖς τ. πατρός μου in my father’s house Lk 2:49 (cp. Jos., Ant. 16, 302 καταγωγὴ ἐν τοῖς Ἀντιπάτρου). ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ on the way Mk 10:32. ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ Mt 24:26. ἐν ἀγρῷ Lk 15:25. ἐν δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ at God’s right hand Ro 8:34; in heaven Eph 6:9.—W. εἰς: τὴν κοίτην Lk 11:7; τὸν κόλπον J1:18.—W. ἐπὶ w. gen. be on someth. of place, roof Lk 17:31; head J 20:7 (cp. 1 Macc 1:59); also fig., of one who is over someone (1 Macc 10:69; Jdth 14:13 ὁ ὢν ἐπὶ πάντων τῶν αὐτοῦ) Ro 9:5 (of the angel of death Mel., P. 20, 142 ἐπὶ τῶν πρωτοτόκων); also ἐπάνω τινός J 3:31.—W. dat. be at someth. the door Mt 24:33; Mk 13:29.—W. acc. be on someone: grace Lk 2:40; Ac 4:33; spirit (Is 61:1) Lk 2:25; εἶναι ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό be in the same place, together (Gen 29:2 v.l.) Ac 1:15; 2:1, 44; 1 Cor 7:5.—W. κατά w. acc. εἶναι κατὰ τὴν Ἰουδαίαν be in Judea Ac 11:1; εἶναι ἐν Ἀντιοχείᾳ κατὰ τὴν οὖσαν ἐκκλησίαν were at Antioch in the congregation there 13:1.—W. ὑπό w. acc. τι or τινα of place be under someth. J 1:48; 1 Cor 10:1.—W. παρά w. acc. παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν by the sea- (i.e. lake-) shore Mk 5:21; Ac 10:6.—W. πρός τι be close to, facing someth. Mk 4:1.—W. adv. of place ἐγγύς τινι near someth. Ac 9:38; 27:8. μακρὰν (ἀπό) Mk 12:34; J 21:8; Eph 2:13; also πόρρω Lk 14:32. χωρίς τινος without someth. Hb 12:8. ἐνθάδε Ac 16:28. ἔσω J 20:26. ἀπέναντί τινος Ro 3:18 (Ps 35:2). ἐκτός τινος 1 Cor 6:18; ἀντίπερά τινος Lk 8:26; ὁμοῦ J 21:2; οὗ Mt 2:9; ὅπου Mk 2:4; 5:40. ὧδε Mt 17:4; Mk 9:5; Lk 9:33. Also w. fut. mng. (ESchwartz, GGN 1908, 161 n.; on the fut. use of the pres. cp. POxy 531, 22 [II A.D.] ἔστι δὲ τοῦ Τῦβι μηνὸς σοὶ ὸ̔ θέλεις) ὅπου εἰμί J 7:34, 36; 12:26; 14:3; 17:24. As pred., to denote a relatively long stay at a place, stay, reside ἴσθι ἐκεῖ stay there Mt 2:13, cp. vs. 15; ἐπʼ ἐρήμοις τόποις in lonely places Mk 1:45; ἦν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν he stayed by the lakeside 5:21.ⓑ involving humans or transcendent beings: w. adv. ἔμπροσθέν τινος Lk 14:2. ἔναντί τινος Ac 8:21; ἐνώπιόν τινος Lk 14:10; Ac 4:19; 1 Pt 3:4; Rv 7:15; ἐντός τινος Lk 17:21; ἐγγύς τινος J 11:18; 19:20; Ro 10:8 (Dt 30:14).—W. prep. ἐν τινί equiv. to ἔκ τινος εἶναι be among Mt 27:56; cp. Mk 15:40; Ro 1:6. Of God, who is among his people 1 Cor 14:25 (Is 45:14; Jer 14:9); of the Spirit J 14:17. Of persons under Christ’s direction: ἐν θεῷ 1J 2:5; 5:20 (s. Norden, Agn. Th. 23, 1). ἔν τινι rest upon, arise from someth. (Aristot., Pol. 7, 1, 3 [1323b, 1] ἐν ἀρετῇ; Sir 9:16) Ac 4:12; 1 Cor 2:5; Eph 5:18.—εἴς τινα be directed, inclined toward Ac 23:30; 2 Cor 7:15; 1 Pt 1:21.—κατά w. gen. be against someone (Sir 6:12) Mt 12:30; Mk 9:40 and Lk 9:50 (both opp. ὑπέρ); Gal 5:23.—σύν τινι be with someone (Jos., Ant. 7, 181) Lk 22:56; 24:44; Ac 13:7; accompany, associate w. someone Lk 8:38; Ac 4:13; 22:9; take sides with someone (X., Cyr. 5, 4, 37; 7, 5, 77; Jos., Ant. 11, 259 [of God]) Ac 14:4.—πρός τινα be with someone Mt 13:56; Mk 6:3; J 1:1f. I am to be compared w. IMg 12.—μετά and gen. be with someone (Judg 14:11) Mt 17:17; Mk 3:14; 5:18; J 3:26; 12:17; ἔστω μεθʼ ὑμῶν εἰρήνη AcPlCor 2:40; of God, who is with someone (Gen 21:20; Judg 6:13 al.; Philo, Det. Pot. Ins. 4; Jos., Ant. 6, 181; 15, 138) Lk 1:66; J 3:2; 8:29; Ac 10:38 al.; also be with in the sense be favorable to, in league with (Ex 23:2) Mt 12:30; Lk 11:23; of punishment attending a pers. τὸ πῦρ ἐστι μετʼ αὐτοῦ AcPlCor 2:37.—παρά and gen. come from someone (X., An. 2, 4, 15; Just., D. 8, 4 ἔλεος παρὰ θεοῦ) fr. God J 6:46; 7:29; w. dat. be with, among persons Mt 22:25; Ac 10:6. W. neg. be strange to someone, there is no … in someone Ro 2:11; 9:14; Eph 6:9.—ὑπέρ w. gen. be on one’s side Mk 9:4 and Lk 9:50 (both opp. κατά); w. acc. be superior to (Sir 25:10; 30:16) Lk 6:40.ⓒ of condition or circumstance: κατά w. acc. live in accordance with (Sir 28:10; 43:8; 2 Macc 9:20) κατὰ σάκρα, πνεῦμα Ro 8:5. οὐκ ἔστιν κατὰ ἄνθρωπον not human (in origin) Gal 1:11.—Fig. ὑπό w. acc. be under (the power of) someth. Ro 3:9; 6:14f; Gal 3:10, 25.—W. ἐν of existing ἐν τῷ θεῷ εἶναι of humankind: have its basis of existence in God Ac 17:28. Of states of being: ἐν δόξῃ 2 Cor 3:8; ἐν εἰρήνῃ Lk 11:21; ἐν ἔχθρᾳ at enmity 23:12; ἐν κρίματι under condemnation vs. 40. ἐν ῥύσει αἵματος suffer from hemorrhages Mk 5:25; Lk 8:43 (cp. Soph., Aj. 271 ἦν ἐν τῇ νόσῳ; cp. TestJob 35:1 ἐν πληγαῖς πολλαῖς). Periphrastically for an adj. ἐν ἐξουσίᾳ authoritative Lk 4:32. ἐν βάρει important 1 Th 2:7. ἐν τῇ πίστει true believers, believing 2 Cor 13:5. Be involved in someth. ἐν ἑορτῇ be at the festival=take part in it J 2:23. ἐν τούτοις ἴσθι devote yourself to these things 1 Ti 4:15 (cp. X., Hell. 4, 8, 7 ἐν τοιούτοις ὄντες=occupied w. such things; Jos., Ant. 2, 346 ἐν ὕμνοις ἦσαν=they occupied themselves w. the singing of hymns).—Fig., live in the light 1J 2:9; cp. vs. 11; 1 Th 5:4; in the flesh Ro 7:5; 8:8; AcPlCor 1:6. ἐν οἷς εἰμι in the situation in which I find myself Phil 4:11 (X., Hell. 4, 2, 1; Diod S 12, 63, 5; 12, 66, 4; Appian, Hann. 55 §228 ἐν τούτοις ἦν=he was in this situation; Jos., Ant. 7, 232 ἐν τούτοις ἦσαν=found themselves in this sit.; TestJob 35:6 ἐν τίνι ἐστίν; s. ZPE VIII 170). ἐν πολλοῖς ὢν ἀστοχήμασι AcPlCor 2:1. Of characteristics, emotions, etc. ἔν τινί ἐστιν, e.g. ἀδικία J 7:18; ἄγνοια Eph 4:18; ἀλήθεια J 8:44; 2 Cor 11:10 (cp. 1 Macc 7:18); ἁμαρτία 1J 3:5.ⓓ of time ἐγγύς of καιρός be near Mt 26:18; Mk 13:28. πρὸς ἑσπέραν ἐστίν it is toward evening Lk 24:29 (Just., D. 137, 4 πρὸς δυσμὰς … ὁ ἥλιός ἐστι).④ to be alive in a period of time, live, denoting temporal existence (Hom., Trag., Thu. et al.; Sir 42:21; En 102:5 Philo, De Jos. 17; Jos., Ant. 7, 254) εἰ ἤμεθα ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν if we had lived in the days of our fathers Mt 23:30. ὅτι οὐκ εἰσὶν because they were no more 2:18 (Jer 38:15). ἦσαν ἐπὶ χρόνον ἱκανόν (those who were healed and raised by Christ) remained alive for quite some time Qua.⑤ to be the time at which someth. takes place w. indications of specific moments or occasions, be (X., Hell. 4, 5, 1, An. 4, 3, 8; Sus 13 Theod.; 1 Macc 6:49; 2 Macc 8:26; Jos., Ant. 6, 235 νουμηνία δʼ ἦν; 11, 251): ἦν ὥρα ἕκτη it was the sixth hour (=noon acc. to Jewish reckoning) Lk 23:44; J 4:6; 19:14.—Mk 15:25; J 1:39. ἦν ἑσπέρα ἤδη it was already evening Ac 4:3. πρωί̈ J 18:28. ἦν παρασκευή Mk 15:42. ἦν ἑορτὴ τῶν Ἰουδαίων J 5:1. σάββατόν ἐστιν vs. 10 et al. Short clauses (as Polyaenus 4, 9, 2 νὺξ ἦν; 7, 44, 2 πόλεμος ἦν; exc. 36, 8 ἦν ἀρίστου ὥρα; Jos., Ant. 19, 248 ἔτι δὲ νὺξ ἦν) χειμὼν ἦν J 10:22; ἦν δὲ νύξ (sim. Jos., Bell. 4, 64) 13:30; ψύχος it was cold 18:18; καύσων ἔσται it will be hot Lk 12:55.⑥ to take place as a phenomenon or event, take place, occur, become, be, be in (Hom., Thu. et al.; LXX; En 104:5; 106:6.—Cp. Just., D. 82, 2 of Christ’s predictions ὅπερ καὶ ἔστι ‘which is in fact the case’.) ἔσται θόρυβος τοῦ λαοῦ a popular uprising Mk 14:2. γογγυσμὸς ἦν there was (much) muttering J 7:12. σχίσμα there was a division 9:16; 1 Cor 1:10; 12:25. ἔριδες … εἰσίν quarrels are going on 1:11. δεῖ αἱρέσεις εἶναι 11:19. θάνατος, πένθος, κραυγή, πόνος ἔσται Rv 21:4. ἔσονται λιμοὶ κ. σεισμοί Mt 24:7. Hence τὸ ἐσόμενον what was going to happen (Sir 48:25) Lk 22:49. πότε ταῦτα ἔσται; when will this happen? Mt 24:3. πῶς ἔσται τοῦτο; how can this be? Lk 1:34. Hebraistically (הָיָה; s. KBeyer, Semitische Syntax im NT, ’62, 63–65) καὶ ἔσται w. fut. of another verb foll. and it will come about that Ac 2:17 (Jo 3:1); 3:23 (w. δέ); Ro 9:26 (Hos 2:1).—W. dat. ἐστί τινι happen, be granted, come, to someone (X., An. 2, 1, 10; Jos., Ant. 11, 255; Just., D. 8, 4 σοὶ … ἔλεος ἔσται παρὰ θεοῦ) Mt 16:22; Mk 11:24; Lk 2:10; GJs 1:1; 4:3; 8:3; τί ἐστίν σοι τοῦτο, ὅτι what is the matter with you, that GJs 17:2.—Of becoming or turning into someth. become someth. εἰς χολὴν πικρίας εἶναι become bitter gall Ac 8:23. εἰς σάρκα μίαν Mt 19:5; Mk 10:8; 1 Cor 6:16; Eph 5:31 (all Gen 2:24. Cp. Syntipas p. 42, 24 οὐκ ἔτι ἔσομαι μετὰ σοῦ εἰς γυναῖκα); τὰ σκολιὰ εἰς εὐθείας Lk 3:5 (Is 40:4); εἰς πατέρα 2 Cor 6:18; Hb 1:5 (2 Km 7:14; 1 Ch 22:10; 28:6); εἰς τὸ ἕν 1J 5:8.— Serve as someth. (IPriene 50, 39 [c. II B.C.] εἶναι εἰς φυλακὴν τ. πόλεως; Aesop., Fab. 28 H.=18 P.; 26 Ch.; 18 H-H. εἰς ὠφέλειαν; Gen 9:13; s. also εἰς 4d) 1 Cor 14:22; Col 2:22; Js 5:3.—Of something being ἀνεκτότερον ἔσται it will be more tolerable τινί for someone Lk 10:12, 14.⑦ to exist as possibility ἔστιν w. inf. foll. it is possible, one can (Περὶ ὕψους 6; Diog. L. 1, 110 ἔστιν εὑρεῖν=one can find; Just., A I, 59, 10 ἔστι ταῦτα ἀκοῦσαι καὶ μαθεῖν; D. 42, 3 ἰδεῖν al.; Mel., P. 19, 127); neg. οὐκ ἔστιν νῦν λέγειν it is not possible to speak at this time Hb 9:5. οὐκ ἔστιν φαγεῖν it is impossible to eat 1 Cor 11:20 (so Hom. et al.; UPZ 70, 23 [152/151 B.C.] οὐκ ἔστι ἀνακύψαι με πώποτε … ὑπὸ τῆς αἰσχύνης; 4 Macc 13:5; Wsd 5:10; Sir 14:16; 18:6; EpJer 49 al.; EpArist 163; Jos., Ant. 2, 335; Ath. 22, 3 ἔστιν εἰπεῖν).⑧ to have a point of derivation or origin, be,/come from somewhere ἐκ τῆς ἐξουσίας Ἡρῴδου from Herod’s jurisdiction Lk 23:7; ἐκ Ναζαρέτ (as an insignificant place) J 1:46; ἐκ τῆς γῆς 3:31; ἐκ γυναικός 1 Cor 11:8 al. ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, ἐξ ἀνθρώπων be of heavenly (divine), human descent Mt 21:25; Mk 11:30; Lk 20:4. Be generated by (cp. Sb 8141, 21f [ins I B.C.] οὐδʼ ἐκ βροτοῦ ἤεν ἄνακτος, ἀλλὰ θεοῦ μεγάλου ἔκγονος; En 106:6) Mt 1:20. Esp. in Johannine usage ἐκ τοῦ διαβόλου εἶναι originate from the devil J 8:44; 1J 3:8. ἐκ τοῦ πονηροῦ 3:12; ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου J 15:19; 17:14, 16; 1J 4:5. ἐκ τῆς ἀληθείας εἶναι 2:21; J 18:37 etc. Cp. 9 end.⑨ to belong to someone or someth. through association or genetic affiliation, be, belong w. simple gen. (X., Hell. 2, 4, 36; Iambl., Vi. Pyth. 33, 230 τῶν Πυθαγορείων) οἱ τῆς ὁδοῦ ὄντες those who belong to the Way Ac 9:2. εἰμὶ Παύλου I belong to Paul 1 Cor 1:12; 3:4; cp. Ro 8:9; 2 Cor 10:7; 1 Ti 1:20; Ac 23:6. ἡμέρας εἶναι belong to the day 1 Th 5:8, cp. vs. 5. W. ἔκ τινος 1 Cor 12:15f; Mt 26:73; Mk 14:69f; Lk 22:58 al. (cp. X., Mem. 3, 6, 17; oft LXX). ἐκ τοῦ ἀριθμοῦ τῶν δώδεκα belong to the twelve 22:3. ὅς ἐστιν ἐξ ὑμῶν who is a fellow-countryman of yours Col 4:9.—To belong through origin 2 Cor 4:7. Of Mary: ἦν τῆς φυλῆς τοῦ Δαυίδ was of David’s line GJs 10:1. Cp. 8 above.⑩ to have someth. to do with someth. or someone, be. To denote a close relationship ἐξ ἔργων νόμου εἶναι rely on legal performance Gal 3:10. ὁ νόμος οὐκ ἔστιν ἐκ πίστεως the law has nothing to do with faith vs. 12.—To denote a possessor Mt 5:3, 10; l9:14; Mk 12:7; Lk 18:16; 1 Cor 6:19. Esp. of God who owns the Christian Ac 27:23; 1 Cor 3:23; 2 Ti 2:19 (Num 16:5). οὐδʼ εἶναι τὸν κόσμον θεοῦ, ἀλλὰ ἀγγέλων AcPlCor 1:15 (cp. Just., A II, 13, 4 ὅσα … καλῶς εἴρηται, ἡμῶν τῶν χριστιανῶν ἐστι).—W. possess. pron. ὑμετέρα ἐστὶν ἡ βασιλεία Lk 6:20. οὐκ ἔστιν ἐμὸν δοῦναι Mk 10:40 (cp. Just., A I, 4, 2 ὑμέτερον ἀγωνιᾶσαί ἐστι ‘it is a matter for your concern’).—To denote function (X., An. 2, 1, 4) οὐχ ὑμῶν ἐστιν it is no concern of yours Ac 1:7—Of quality παιδεία οὐ δοκεῖ χαρᾶς εἶναι discipline does not seem to be (partake of) joy Hb 12:11.—10:39.⑪ as an auxiliary: very commonly the simple tense forms are replaced by the periphrasis εἶναι and the ptc. (B-D-F §352–55; Mlt. 225–27, 249; Mlt-H. 451f; Rdm.2 102, 105, 205; Kühner-G. I 38ff; Rob. 374–76, 1119f; CTurner, Marcan Usage: JTS 28, 1927 349–51; GKilpatrick, BT 7, ’56, 7f; very oft. LXX).ⓐ (as in Hom et al.) w. the pf. ptc. to express the pf., plpf. and fut. pf. act. and pass. (s. Mayser 329; 377) ἦσαν ἐληλυθότες they had come Lk 5:17. ἦν αὐτῶν ἡ καρδία πεπωρωμένη their hearts were hardened Mk 6:52. ἠλπικότες ἐσμέν we have set our hope 1 Cor 15:19. ὁ καιρὸς συνεσταλμένος ἐστίν the time has become short 7:29. ἦν ἑστώς (En 12:3) he was standing (more exactly he took his stand) Lk 5:1.ⓑ w. pres. ptc. (B-D-F §353).α. to express the pres. ἐστὶν προσαναπληροῦσα τὰ ὑστερήματα supplies the wants 2 Cor 9:12 (Just., A I, 26, 5 Μαρκίων … καὶ νῦν ἔτι ἐστὶ διδάσκων; Mel., P. 61, 441 ἐστὶν … κηρυσσόμενον).β. impf. or aor. ἦν καθεύδων he was sleeping Mk 4:38. ἦσαν ἀναβαίνοντες … ἦν προάγων 10:32; cp. Lk 1:22; 5:17; 11:14 al. (JosAs 1:3 ἦν συνάγων τὸν σίτον; Mel., P. 80, 580 ἦσθα εὐφραινόμενος). ἦν τὸ φῶς τὸ ἀλήθινόν … ἐρχόμενον εἰς τὸν κόσμον the true light entered the world J 1:9, w. ἦν introducing a statement in dramatic contrast to the initial phrase of vs. 8.—To denote age (Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 1, 2 al. Jac.; POxy 275, 9 [66 A.D.] οὐδέπω ὄντα τῶν ἐτῶν; Tob 14:11) Mk 5:42; Lk 3:23; Ac 4:22; GJs 12:3.—Mussies 304–6.γ. fut. ἔσῃ σιωπῶν you will be silent Lk 1:20; cp. 5:10; Mt 24:9; Mk 13:13; Lk 21:17, 24 al.; 2 Cl 17:7 Bihlm. (the child) shall serve him (God).ⓒ w. aor. ptc. as plpf. (Aelian, NA 7, 11; Hippiatr. 34, 14, vol. I p. 185, 3 ἦν σκευάσας; ISyriaW 2070b ἦν κτίσας; AcThom 16; 27 [Aa II/2 p. 123, 2f; p. 142, 10]; B-D-F §355 m.—JVogeser, Z. Sprache d. griech. Heiligenlegenden, diss. Munich 1907, 14; JWittmann, Sprachl. Untersuchungen zu Cosmas Indicopleustes, diss. Munich 1913, 20; SPsaltes, Gramm. d. byzant. Chroniken 1913, 230; Björck [διδάσκω end] 75; B-D-F §355). ἦν βληθείς had been thrown Lk 23:19; J 18:30 v.l.—GPt 6:23; 12:51. (Cp. Just., A II, 10, 2 διʼ εὑρέσεως … ἐστὶ πονηθέντα αὐτοῖς ‘they achieved through investigation’).ⓓ Notice esp. the impersonals δέον ἐστίν it is necessary (Pla. et al.; POxy 727, 19; Sir praef. ln. 3; 1 Macc 12:11 δέον ἐστὶν καὶ πρέπον) Ac 19:36; εἰ δέον ἐστίν if it must be 1 Pt 1:6 (s. δεῖ 2a); 1 Cl 34:2; πρέπον ἐστίν it is appropriate (Pla. et al.; POxy 120, 24; 3 Macc 7:13) Mt 3:15; 1 Cor 11:13.ⓔ In many cases the usage w. the ptc. serves to emphasize the duration of an action or condition (BGU 183, 25 ἐφʼ ὸ̔ν χρόνον ζῶσα ᾖ Σαταβούς); JosAs 2:1 ἦν … ἐξουθενοῦσα καὶ καταπτύουσα πάντα ἄνδρα). ἦν διδάσκων he customarily taught Mk 1:22; Lk 4:31; 19:47. ἦν θέλων he cherished the wish 23:8. ἦσαν νηστεύοντες they were keeping the fast Mk 2:18. ἦσαν συλλαλοῦντες they were conversing for a while 9:4. ἦν προσδεχόμενος he was waiting for (the kgdm.) 15:43. ἦν συγκύπτουσα she was bent over Lk 13:11.ⓕ to emphasize the adjectival idea inherent in the ptc. rather than the concept of action expressed by the finite verb ζῶν εἰμι I am alive Rv 1:18. ἦν ὑποτασσόμενος he was obedient Lk 2:51. ἦν ἔχων κτήματα πολλά he was very rich Mt 19:22; Mk 10:22. ἴσθι ἐξουσίαν ἔχων you shall have authority Lk 19:17 (Lucian, Tim. 35 ἴσθι εὐδαιμονῶν). ἦν καταλλάσσων (God) was reconciling 2 Cor 5:19 (cp. Mel., P. 83, 622 οὗτος ἦν ὁ ἐκλεξάμενός σε; Ath. 15, 2 οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ … καρπούμενος).—LMcGaughy, Toward a Descriptive Analysis of ΕΙΝΑΙ as a Linking Verb in the Gk. NT, diss. Vanderbilt, ’70 (s. esp. critique of treatment of εἰμί in previous edd. of this lexicon pp. 12–15).—Mlt. 228. B. 635. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. Sv. -
7 ἄν
1I. ἄν (after relatives ἐάν [q.v.] is oft. used for ἄν, but the mss. vary greatly, s. B-D-F §107; 377; Mlt. 42ff, 165ff; Mayser 152f; Crönert 130f; Thackeray 67; Dssm., NB 30ff [BS 202ff]). A particle peculiar to Gk. (Hom.+) denoting aspect of contingency, incapable of translation by a single English word; it denotes that the action of the verb is dependent on some circumstance or condition; the effect of ἄν upon the meaning of its clause depends on the mood and tense/aspect of the verb w. which it is used. The NT use of ἄν corresponds in the main to older Gk., although the rich variety of its employment is limited, as is generally the case in later Greek. In certain constructions (s. aβ) an aspect of certainty is indicated, suggesting the gloss would. In most other instances aspects of varying possibility or conditionality find expression in ways that can be rendered ever, but with other glosses required when ἄν is used in conjunction with other particles.ⓐ ἄν w. aor. or impf. indic.α. denoting repeated action in past time, but only under certain given conditions, esp. after relatives (B-D-F §367; Rob. index): aor. (Gen 30:42; Num 9:17; 1 Km 14:47; Ezk 10:11) ὅσοι ἂν ἥψαντο αὐτοῦ, ἐσῴζοντο whoever touched him was cured Mk 6:56. Impf. (Ezk 1:20; 1 Macc 13:20; Tob 7:11) ὅπου ἂν εἰσεπορεύετο εἰς κώμας wherever he went (as he was accustomed to do—ADebrunner, D. hellenist. Nebensatziterativpräteritum mit ἄν: Glotta 11, 1920, 1–28) into villages Mk 6:56. καθότι ἄν τις χρείαν εἶχεν as anyone was in need Ac 2:45; 4:35. Similarly ὡς ἂν ἤγεσθε (v.l. ἀνήγεσθε) 1 Cor 12:2. Cp. also ὅταν 1bγ and δ.β. in the apodosis of a contrary to fact (unreal) condition w. εἰ (B-D-F §360; but ἄν is not always used [s. the vv.ll. J 18:36]: §360, 1; Mlt. 199ff; PMelcher, De sermone Epicteteo 1905, 75); it is foundא. w. impf. (4 Macc 17:7; Bar 3:13; ParJer 5:20; GrBar 6:6; ApcMos 39) οὗτος εἰ ἦν προφήτης, ἐγίνωσκεν ἄν if he were a prophet, he would (now) know (but he does not) Lk 7:39. εἰ ἔχετε πίστιν …, ἐλέγετε ἄν if you had faith …, you would say 17:6. εἰ ἐπιστεύετε Μωϋσεῖ, ἐπιστεύετε ἂν ἐμοί J 5:46. εἰ ἐμὲ ᾔδειτε, καὶ τὸν πατέρα μου ἄν ᾔδειτε 8:19; cp. vs. 42; 9:41; 15:19. εἰ ἔτι ἀνθρώποις ἤρεσκον, Χριστοῦ δοῦλος οὐκ ἂν ἤμην Gal 1:10; cp. 3:21. εἰ ἑαυτοὺς διεκρίνομεν, οὐκ ἂν ἐκρινόμεθα 1 Cor 11:31. εἰ ἦν ἐπὶ γῆς, οὐδʼ ἂν ἦν ἱερεύς if he were on earth, he would not even be a priest Hb 8:4; cp. 4:8; 8:7; 11:15.ב. w. aor., placing the assumption in the past (Gen 30:27; Wsd 11:25; Jdth 11:2; 4 Macc 2:20; TestJob 7:9 al.; ParJer 5:5; GrBar 8:7; PGiss 47, 17) εἰ ἐγένοντο αἱ δυνάμεις, πάλαι ἂν … μετενόησαν if the miracles had been performed, they would long ago have repented Mt 11:21. εἰ ἔγνωσαν, οὐκ ἂν ἐσταύρωσαν 1 Cor 2:8; cp. Ro 9:29 (Is 1:9). εἰ ἐγνώκειτε, οὐκ ἂν κατεδικάσατε if you had recognized, you would not have condemned Mt 12:7. εἰ ἠγαπᾶτέ με, ἐχάρητε ἄν if you loved me, you would have rejoiced J 14:28; cp. 11:21. The plpf. for aor. indic. (PGiss 79 II, 6 εἰ δυνατόν μοι ἦν, οὐκ ἂν ὠκνήκειν; BGU 1141, 27f) εἰ ἦσαν, μεμενήκεισαν ἄν 1J 2:19; cp. J 11:21 v.l.—In κἀγὼ ἐλθὼν σὺν τόκῳ ἂν αὐτὸ ἔπραξα Lk 19:23, ἐλθών functions as an unreal-temporal protasis (B-D-F §360, 2); cp. καὶ ἐλθὼν ἐγὼ ἐκομισάμην ἂν τὸ ἐμόν Mt 25:27. Sim. ἐπεὶ οὐκ ἂν ἐπαύσαντο προσφερόμεναι; where ἐπεί functions as protasis, otherwise (i.e. if the sacrifices had really brought about a lasting atonement) would they not have ceased to offer sacrifices? Hb 10:2.ⓑ ἄν w. subjunc. after relatives, the rel. clause forming virtually the protasis of a conditional sentence (B-D-F §380, 1) of the future more vivid or present general type.α. w. fut. or impf. in apodosis, to show that the condition and its results are thought of as in the future, of single and repeated action (IG XIV, 865 [VI B.C.] ὸ̔ς δʼ ἄν με κλέψῃ, τυφλὸς ἔσται; TestAbr B 4 p. 109, 10 [Stone p. 66]). ὸ̔ς δʼ ἂν ποιήσῃ καὶ διδάξῃ, οὗτος μέγας κληθήσεται but whoever does and teaches=if a person does and teaches it Mt 5:19. ὸ̔ς ἂν ἐσθίῃ …, ἔνοχος ἔσται 1 Cor 11:27. οὓς ἐὰν (v.l. ἂν) δοκιμάσητε, τούτους πέμψω 16:3—Mt 10:11; 1 Cor 16:2.β. w. pres. in apodosis, to show that the condition and its results involve repeated action, regardless of the time element: ἃ ἂν ἐκεῖνος ποιῇ, ταῦτα καὶ ὁ υἱὸς ὁμοίως ποιεῖ whatever he does, the Son does likewise J 5:19. ὅπου ἐὰν (v.l. ἂν) αὐτὸν καταλάβῃ, ῥήσσει αὐτόν wherever it seizes him Mk 9:18. ὑμῖν ἐστὶν ἡ ἐπαγγελία …, ὅσους ἂν προσκαλέσηται κύριος Ac 2:39. ὸ̔ς ἐὰν (v.l. ἂν) βουληθῇ φίλος εἶναι τοῦ κόσμου, ἐχθρὸς τοῦ θεοῦ καθίσταται whoever wishes to be a friend of the world Js 4:4. Cp. ὅπου ἄν 3:4 v.l.—Where ὅς or ὅστις appears w. subj. without ἄν (but cp. IG XII/1, 671 ὸ̔ς ἀνασπαράξῃ τ. τάφον; CPR I, 24, 33; 25, 19; AcThom 93 [Aa II/2, 206], 19; Is 7:2; 31:4), the reading that gives the fut. ind. is prob. the right one: ὅστις τηρήσῃ (v.l.-σει) Js 2:10. ὅσοι (without ἄν PPetr I, 13, 3;5; CPR I, 237, 3; IPergamon 249, 26 ὅσοι … ἐγλίπωσι τὴν πόλιν; Vett. Val. 125, 16): ὅσοι μετανοήσωσιν καὶ καθαρίσωσιν Hs 8, 11, 3 (s. W. and Joly app. for the textual tradition). See Reinhold 108; B-D-F §380, 4.ⓒ In temporal clauses ἄν is found w. the subjunct. when an event is to be described which can and will occur, but whose occurrence cannot yet be assumed w. certainty. Soα. ὅταν (=ὅτε ἄν; s. ὅταν) w. pres. subjunct. to indicate regularly recurring action (Wsd 12:18): ὅταν ἄρτον ἐσθίωσιν whenever they eat bread Mt 15:2. ὅταν λαλῇ τὸ ψεῦδος whenever he tells a lie J 8:44. ὅταν λέγῃ τις whenever anyone says 1 Cor 3:4.—W. aor. subjunct. to express action in the future which is thought of as already completed (Sir Prol. ln. 22; Tob 8:21) ὅταν ποιήσητε πάντα when you have done Lk 17:10. ὅταν ἔλθῃ ὁ κύριος when the owner has come Mt 21:40; ὅταν ἔλθῃ ἐν τῇ δόξῃ Mk 8:38; cp. J 4:25; 16:13; Ac 23:35. ὅταν πάλιν εἰσαγάγῃ τὸν πρωτότοκον Hb 1:6.β. ἡνίκα ἄν every time that (Ex 1:10; 33:22; 34:24 al.; POxy 104, 26 [96 A.D.]; PTebt 317, 18 [174/75] ἡνίκα ἐὰν εἰς τὸν νόμον παραγένηται). ἡνίκα ἂν (also ἐάν mss.) ἀναγινώσκηται Μωϋσῆς every time that Moses is read aloud 2 Cor 3:15; cp. vs. 16.γ. ὁσάκις ἐάν as often as: ὁσάκις ἐὰν (also ἄν mss.) πίνητε 1 Cor 11:25. ὁσάκις ἐὰν (also ἄν mss.) ἐσθίητε vs. 26.δ. ὡς ἄν as soon as (PHib 59, 2 [c. 245 B.C.] ὡς ἂν λάβῃς; 66, 4; PEleph 9, 3 [III B.C.]; PParis 46, 18 [143 B.C.]; BGU 1209, 13 [23 B.C.]; Josh 2:14; Jdth 11:15; 1 Macc 15:9): ὡς ἂν πορεύωμαι as soon as I travel Ro 15:24. ὡς ἂν ἔλθω as soon as I come 1 Cor 11:34. ὡς ἂν ἀφίδω τὰ περὶ ἐμέ as soon as I see how it will go with me Phil 2:23. ὡς ἐάν (PFay 111, 16 [95/96]) Hv 3, 8, 9; 3, 13, 2.—ἀφʼ οὗ ἄν after Lk 13:25.—In the case of temporal particles indicating a goal, viz. ἕως οὗ, ἄχρις (οὗ), μέχρις (οὗ), the mss. show considerable variation; the addition of ἄν is prob. correct only in rare cases (see B-D-F §383, 2). Only ἕως ἄν (PPetr II, 40a, 28 [III B.C.] ἕως ἂν ὑγιαίνοντας ὑμᾶς ἴδωμεν; Gen 24:14, 19; 49:10; Ex 23:30 al.) has certain attestation: μείνατε ἕως ἂν ἐξέλθητε stay until you go away Mt 10:11. ἕως ἂν ἴδωσιν τὴν βασιλείαν τοῦ θεοῦ Lk 9:27.—Mt 2:13; 5:26. ἕως ἂν λάβῃ Js 5:7 v.l.—ἄχρις οὗ (+ ἄν v.l.) ἔλθῃ 1 Cor 11:26. ἄχρις οὗ (+ ἄν v.l.) θῇ 15:25; ἄχρις οὗ ἂν ἥξω Rv 2:25 (v.l. ἄχρι). ἄχρις ἂν ἔλθῃ (cp. BGU 830, 13 [I A.D.] ἄχρις ἄν σοι ἔλθω) Gal 3:19 v.l.—πρὶν ἄν: πρὶν ἢ ἂν (vv.ll. πρὶν ἄν, πρὶν ἢ, only πρὶν or ἕως ἂν) ἴδῃ τὸν Χριστόν Lk 2:26 (B-D-F §383, 3).ⓓ In purpose clauses the Attic (EHermann, Griech. Forschungen I, 1912, 267f; JKnuenz, De enuntiatis Graec. finalibus 1913, 13ff; 26ff) ὅπως ἄν, esp. freq. in earlier ins (Meisterhans3-Schw. 254), has become quite rare (LXX still rather often: Gen 18:19; 50:20; Ex 33:13; Jer 7:23 al.) ὅπως ἂν ἀποκαλυφθῶσιν διαλογισμοί Lk 2:35. ὅπως ἂν ἔλθωσιν καιροί Ac 3:20.—15:17 (Am 9:12 v.l.); Ro 3:4 (Ps 50:6); Mt 6:5 v.l.ⓔ The opt. w. ἄν in a main clause (potential opt.) has almost wholly disappeared; a rare ex. is εὐξαίμην (v.l. εὐξάμην) ἄν Ac 26:29 in Paul’s speech before Agrippa (literary usage; s. B-D-F §385, 1; also Rob. 938; Themist. 6 p. 80 D.—On the rarity of the potential opt. in pap, LXX, Apost. Fathers see CHarsing, De Optat. in Chartis Aeg. Usu, diss. Bonn 1910, 28; Reinhold 111). Cp.—also in the literary lang. of Lk—direct rhetor. questions (Gen 23:15; Job 19:23; Sir 25:3; 4 Macc 7:22; 14:10 v.l.; TestJob 13:5 τίς ἄν δώῃ 35:5) πῶς γὰρ ἂν δυναίμην; Ac 8:31. τί ἂν θέλοι οὗτος λέγειν; 17:18. Dg has also preserved the opt. as a mark of elegant style (2:3, 10; 3:3f; 4:5; 7:2f; 8:3). MPol 2:2 has τίς οὐκ ἂν θαυμάσειεν;—More freq. in an indirect question, after an impf. or histor. pres. (B-D-F §386, 1; Rob. 938f) τὸ τί ἂν θέλοι καλεῖσθαι αὐτό what he wanted the child’s name to be Lk 1:62. τίς ἂν εἴη περὶ οὗ λέγει J 13:24. τὸ τίς ἂν εἴη μείζων αὐτῶν which of them was the greatest Lk 9:46; cp. 18:36 v.l. τί ἂν ποιήσαιεν τῷ Ἰησοῦ what they should do to Jesus 6:11. τί ἂν γένοιτο τοῦτο Ac 5:24. τί ἂν εἴη τὸ ὅραμα 10:17. (IMagnMai 215 [I A.D.] ἐπερωτᾷ … τί ἂν ποιήσας … ἀδεῶς διατελοίη; Esth 3:13c πυθομένου δέ μου … πῶς ἂν ἀχθείη τοῦτο.)ⓕ The use of ἄν w. inf. and ptc., freq. in earlier Gk., is not found in the NT at all (B-D-F §396); ἵνα μὴ δόξω ὡς ἂν (or ὡσὰν, q.v.) ἐκφοβεῖν ὑμᾶς 2 Cor 10:9 is surely to be expl. in such a way that ὡς ἂν=Lat. quasi: I would not want it to appear as if I were frightening you; s. B-D-F §453, 3; Mlt. 167.—On εἰ μήτι ἂν (sc. γένηται) ἐκ συμφώνου except perhaps by agreement 1 Cor 7:5 s. B-D-F §376; Mlt. 169.—M-M.2II. ἄν for ἐάν is rare in Hellen. Gk. (B-D-F §107; Mlt. 43 n. 2; cp. Hyperid. 4, 5; 5, 15; Teles p. 31, 6; Plut., Mor. 547a; Epict., index Schenkl; pap [Mayser 152]; ins, esp. of the Aegean Sea [Rdm.2 198, 3; s. also SIG index IV 204]; 1 Esdr 2:16; 4 Macc 16:11; Jos., Ant. 4, 70; 219; Test12Patr; Mel. Fgm. 8b 24), but appears J 13:20; 16:23; 20:23; as v.l. 5:19; 9:22; 12:32; 19:12; Ac 9:2; and IMg 10:1.—Mlt. 63, 1.—M-M. -
8 μετά
μετά (Hom.+) prep. w. gen. and acc., in the NT not (B-D-F §203; Rob. 610) w. dat.—For lit. s. ἀνά, beg.; also for μετά (and σύν) Tycho Mommsen, Beiträge zu d. Lehre v. den griech. Präp. 1895. Basic idea: ‘in the vicinity of ’.A. w. gen. with① marker of placement, with, among, in company with someone (Gen 42:5; EpArist 180; En 22:13; 99:10; PsSol 4:6; JosAs 10:3 al.) or someth. ἦν μετὰ τῶν θηρίων he was among the wild animals Mk 1:13 (Diog. L. 6, 92 μόσχοι μετὰ λύκων). ἦν συγκαθήμενος μ. τῶν ὑπηρετῶν he sat down among the servants 14:54. μετὰ ἀνόμων ἐλογίσθη he was classed among the criminals Mk 15:28; Lk 22:37. τὸ μέρος αὐτοῦ μ. τῶν ἀπίστων θήσει he will assign him his lot among the faithless (unbelievers?) Lk 12:46; cp. Mt 24:51. ζῆτειν τὸν ζῶντα μ. τῶν νεκρῶν seek the living among the dead Lk 24:5. μὴ γογγύζετε μετʼ ἀλλήλων do not grumble among yourselves J 6:43. εἱστήκει Ἰούδας μετʼ αὐτῶν 18:5. ἡ σκηνὴ τ. θεοῦ μετὰ τ. ἀνθρώπων Rv 21:3a. μετὰ τῶν νεφελῶν in the midst of the clouds 1:7.② marker of assoc. in gener. sense denoting the company within which someth. takes place, withⓐ w. gen. of pers. in company w. whom someth. takes placeα. w. verbs of going, remaining, etc. προσέρχεσθαι μ. τινος come (in company) with someone Mt 20:20; cp. 5:41; Mk 1:29; 3:7; 5:24, 37; 11:11; 14:17; Lk 2:51; 6:17; 9:49; 14:31; J 3:22b; 11:54; Ac 24:1; Gal 2:1. Angels accompanying the Messiah Mt 25:31; cp. 16:27; Mk 8:38; 1 Th 3:13; 2 Th 1:7. περιπατεῖν μ. τινος (Menand., Fgm. 178 Kö., Sam. 587f S. [242f Kö.]; ApcEsdr 6:12) J 6:66. γίνεσθαι μ. τινος be, remain with someone Ac 7:38; 9:19; 20:18; AcPlCor 2:4 (ApcMos 2 ἐγένοντο μ. ἀλλήλων). οἱ μ. αὐτοῦ γενόμενοι his companions Mk 16:10. μένειν μ. τινος stay with someone 1J 2:19 (ParJer 3:15). ζήσασα μ. ἀνδρός Lk 2:36. ἀκολουθεῖν μ. τινος follow (after) someone Rv 6:8; 14:13 (s. ἀκολουθέω 2).β. used w. trans. verbs ἄγειν τινὰ μ. ἑαυτοῦ bring someone along (s. ἄγω 1b) 2 Ti 4:11. παραλαμβάνειν τινὰ μεθʼ ἑαυτοῦ take or bring someone along (as a companion) (Gen 22:3) Mt 12:45; 18:16; Mk 14:33. ἔχειν τι μ. ἑαυτοῦ have someth. with oneself: bread 8:14; τινά someone (PGM 4, 1952): the lame Mt 15:30; the poor Mk 14:7; Mt 26:11; J 12:8; the bridegroom Mk 2:19b. Pass. συγκατεψηφίσθη μετὰ τ. ἕνδεκα ἀποστόλων he was chosen (to serve) with the eleven apostles Ac 1:26 (cp. Himerius, Or. 44 [=Or. 8], 3 μετὰ τῶν θεῶν ἀριθμούμενος=numbered with the gods).γ. esp. εἶναι μ. τινος be with someone, in someone’s company.א. lit. of close association: the disciples w. Jesus Mt 26:69, 71; Mk 3:14; 14:67; Lk 22:59; J 15:27; 17:24. Also of accompaniment for a short time Mt 5:25; J 3:26; 9:40; 12:17; 20:24, 26. Of Jesus’ association w. his disciples 13:33; 14:9; 16:4; 17:12. Of relations between the superintendent and the congregation μετὰ τ. ἐπισκόπου εἶναι be with, on the side of, the supervisor/bishop IPhld 3:2. οἱ μ. τινος (sc. ὄντες) someone’s friends, companions, etc. (Diod S 17, 96, 2 οἱ μεθʼ Ἡρακλέους; SIG 175, 5; 659, 5; 826e II, 30; Am 4:2; 8:10; Gen 24:59; 1 Macc 7:23; JosAs 27:7; AscIs 2:15; 3:6, 14; Jos., Vi. 397, Ant. 7, 20; Just., D. 8, 3 al.) Mt 12:3f; 26:51; Mk 1:36; 2:25; Lk 6:3f. Of things ἄλλα πλοῖα ἦν μ. αὐτοῦ other boats were with him, accompanied him Mk 4:36. ὁ μισθός μου μετʼ ἐμοῦ (sc. ἐστιν) Rv 22:12. τὸ πῦρ ἐστι μετʼ αὐτοῦ the fire (of judgment) awaits him (the interpretation of the Armenian text; sim. the Lat.) AcPlCor 2:37.ב. in ref. to supportiveness be with someone, stand by, help someone of God’s help (Gen 21:20; 26:3; 28:20 al.; Jos., Ant. 15, 138) J 3:2; 8:29; 16:32; Ac 7:9 (cp. Gen 39:2, 21); 10:38; cp. Mt 1:23 (Is 8:8); Lk 1:28; Ro 15:33. Of God’s hand (1 Ch 4:10) Lk 1:66; Ac 11:21. Of Christ: Mt 28:20; Ac 18:10.ג. a favorite expr. in conclusions of letters ὁ θεὸς τῆς ἀγάπης καὶ εἰρήνης ἔσται μ. ὑμῶν will be with you 2 Cor 13:11; cp. Phil 4:9; ὁ κύριος κτλ. 2 Th 3:16 (cp. Ruth 2:4); 2 Ti 4:22. ἡ χάρις τοῦ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ μ. ὑμῶν (sc. ἔσται) 1 Cor 16:23; cp. 1 Th 5:28; 1 Cl 65:2. μ. τοῦ πνεύματος ὑμῶν Gal 6:18; Phil 4:23; Phlm 25; 21:9. μ. πάντων ὑμῶν 2 Th 3:18; cp. Eph 6:24. Short and to the point: ἡ χάρις μ. ὑμῶν Col 4:18; 1 Ti 6:21; cp. Tit 3:15; Hb 13:25. ἔσται μεθʼ ἡμῶν χάρις ἔλεος εἰρήνη 2J 3.—ἡ ἀγάπη μου μ. πάντων ὑμῶν ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ my love is with you all in Christ Jesus 1 Cor 16:24. ἡ χάρις τοῦ κυρίου Ἰ. Χρ. καὶ ἡ ἀγάπη τ. θεοῦ καὶ ἡ κοινωνία τοῦ ἁγίου πνεύματος μετὰ πάντων ὑμῶν 2 Cor 13:13 (WvanUnnik, Dominus Vobiscum: liturg. formula, TManson memorial vol., ’59, 270–305; on the Trinitarian formula s. the lit. on πνεῦμα 8).—In the expr. ὅσα ἐποίησεν ὁ θεὸς μ. αὐτῶν Ac 14:27; 15:4 (cp. Hs 5, 1, 1) ὤν could be supplied what God has done in helping them; but ποιεῖν can just as well go w. μ. αὐτῶν has done for them, after the analogy of עָשָׂה עִם פּ׳ (Tob 12:6; 13:7 ἃ ποιήσει μεθʼ ὑμῶν; Jdth 8:26 ὅσα ἐποίησεν μετὰ Ἀβραάμ; 15:10; 1 Macc 10:27. In addition, cp. BGU 798, 8 εὐχαριστοῦμεν τῇ ἡμῶν δεσποίνῃ εἰς πάντα τὰ καλὰ ἃ ἐποίησεν μετὰ τ. δούλων αὐτῆς. But s. also LMaloney, ‘All That God Had Done with Them’ ’91, 118–21: God works ‘with’ the apostles and ‘through’ them). Here also belongs ποιεῖν ἔλεος μ. τινος have mercy on someone, show mercy to someone (Gen 24:12; 2 Km 3:8; JosAs 23:4) Lk 1:72; 10:37 (MWilcox, The Semitisms in Ac, ’65, 84f). ἐμεγάλυνεν κύριος τὸ ἔλεος αὐτοῦ μετʼ αὐτῆς the Lord has shown great mercy to her 1:58 (cp. 1 Km 12:24; Ps 125:2f).—In πληρώσεις με εὐφροσύνης μ. τοῦ προσώπου σου Ac 2:28=Ps 15:11 the LXX has literally translated אֶת־פָּנֶיךָ; it means in your presence.ד. in ref. to taking sides or being allied in some way with someone: in contrast to εἶναι κατά τινος be against someone is εἶναι μ. τινος be with someone, on someone’s side Mt 12:30a; Lk 11:23a (AFridrichsen, ZNW 13, 1912, 273–80).ⓑ to denote the company in which an activity or experience takes place: ἀνακεῖσθαι μ. τινος recline at table with someone (for a meal) Mt 26:20. ἀνακλιθῆναι 8:11; cp. Lk 24:30. βασιλεύειν Rv 20:4, 6. γρηγορεῖν Mt 26:38, 40. δειπνεῖν Rv 3:20 (TestJob 15:2). δουλεύειν Gal 4:25. ἐμπαίζειν Mt 27:41. ἐσθίειν 9:11; 24:49; Mk 2:16ab; 14:14, 18; Lk 5:30 (TestAbr A 4 p. 81, 9 [Stone p. 10]). ἠρώτα … ἵνα φάγῃ μ. αὐτοῦ he asked (him) to eat with him 7:36 (cp. TestAbr B 6 p. 110, 21 [Stone p. 68]; JosAs 7:1). εὐφραίνεσθαι 15:29; Ro 15:10 (Dt 32:43). κλαίειν 12:15b. κληρονομεῖν Gal 4:30 (Gen 21:10; Just., D. 26, 1; cp. συγκληρονομεῖν JosAs 24:9). πίνειν Mt 26:29. ποιεῖν τὸ πάσχα celebrate the Passover (with someone) 26:18. συνάγειν 12:30b; Lk 11:23b. συνεσθίειν Gal 2:12. ταράττεσθαι Mt 2:3. τρώγειν J 13:1 v.l. χαίρειν Ro 12:15a.ⓒ The associative aspect can also derive expression from the fact that two opposite parties exert influence upon one another or that one party brings the other to adopt a corresponding, and therefore common, attitudeα. in friendly, or at least not in hostile, fashion: εἰρηνεύειν (3 Km 22:45) Ro 12:18; cp. 2 Ti 2:22; Hb 12:14. εὐθηνίαν ἔχειν Hm 2:3. κοινωνίαν ἔχειν 1J 1:3a, 7. λαλεῖν μετά τινος (cp. Gen 31:24, 29; 1 Macc 7:15) Mk 6:50; J 4:27ab. συλλαλεῖν μ. τινος Mt 17:3; Ac 25:12. συμβούλιον διδόναι Mk 3:6. συνάγεσθαι Mt 28:12; J 18:2. συνᾶραι λόγον Mt 18:23; 25:19. ἐγένοντο φίλοι ὅ τε. Ἡρῴδης καὶ ὁ Πιλᾶτος μετʼ ἀλλήλων Lk 23:12. οἱ μοιχεύοντες μετʼ αὐτῆς those who commit adultery with her Rv 2:22. πορνεύειν (cp. Ezk 16:34; TestAbr A 10 p. 88, 7 [Stone p. 24]) 17:2; 18:3, 9. μολύνεσθαι 14:4 (cp. En 12:4 τῶν γυναικῶν ἐμιάνθησαν).β. in hostile fashion; after verbs of fighting, quarreling, etc. to denote the pers. w. whom the strife is being carried on πολεμεῖν μ. τινος carry on war with = against someone (נִלְחַם עִם פּ׳ 1 Km 17:33; 3 Km 12:24; ParJer 7:10. But s. also OGI 201, 3 ἐπολέμησα μετὰ τῶν Βλεμύων; BGU 1035, 9; 11. Also in Mod. Gk. [AThumb, Hdb. der neugriech. Volkssprache2 1910 §162, 1 note]) Rv 2:16; 12:7; 13:4; 17:14 (B-D-F §193, 4; Rob. 610). Also πόλεμον ποιεῖν (Gen 14:2; 1 Ch 5:19) 11:7; 12:17; 13:7 (Da 7:21 Theod.); 19:19. ζητεῖν μ. τινος deliberate or dispute w. someone J 16:19; cp. 3:25 (cp. ApcEsdr 2:6 δικάζου μεθʼ ἡμῶν). κρίνεσθαι go to law w. someone 1 Cor 6:6. κρίματα ἔχειν μ. τινος have lawsuits w. someone vs. 7.ⓓ of any other relation betw. persons, whether already existing or brought about in some manner εἶδον τὸ παιδίον μ. Μαρίας Mt 2:11. ἀνταποδοῦναι ὑμῖν ἄνεσιν μ. ἡμῶν 2 Th 1:7. ἐκδέχομαι αὐτὸν μ. τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 Cor 16:11. Of delegations, composed of several units Mt 22:16; 2 Cor 8:18. συμφωνεῖν Mt 20:2.ⓔ of things ὧν τὸ αἷμα ἔμιξεν μ. τῶν θυσιῶν αὐτῶν Lk 13:1. Pass. πιεῖν οἶνον μ. χολῆς μεμιγμένον Mt 27:34.ⓕ to show a close connection betw. two nouns, upon the first of which the main emphasis lies (Thu. 7, 75, 3 λύπη μ. φόβου; Pla., Rep. 9, 591b ἰσχύν τε καὶ κάλλος μετὰ ὑγιείας λαμβάνειν; Ar. 11:2 τόξον ἔχειν μ. φαρέτρας) ἀγάπη μ. πίστεως Eph 6:23. πίστις μ. σωφροσύνης 1 Ti 2:15. εὐσέβεια μ. αὐταρκείας 6:6. Cp. Eph 4:2b; Col 1:11; 1 Ti 1:14. φάρμακον μ. οἰνομέλιτος ITr 6:2.③ marker of attendant circumstances of someth. that takes place, withⓐ of moods, emotions, wishes, feelings, excitement, states of mind or body (Xenophon Eph. 1, 15, 5 μ. ἀδείας; 2, 10, 4 μ. ἐπιμελείας; PAmh II, 133, 11 μετὰ πολλῶν κόπων; PLond II, 358, 8 p. 172 [II A.D.]; SIG index IV p. 445f; LXX [Johannessohn, Präp. 209ff]; En et al.) μ. αἰδοῦς with modesty 1 Ti 2:9. μ. αἰσχύνης with shame (s. αἰσχύνη 2) Lk 14:9. μ. εὐνοίας Eph 6:7. μ. εὐχαριστίας Phil 4:6; 1 Ti 4:3f; cp. Ac 24:3. μετὰ χαρᾶς (2 Macc 15:28; 3 Macc 5:21; 6:34; En 10:16; PsSol 8:16 al.; s. χαρά 1a) 1 Th 1:6; Hb 10:34; 13:17; cp. Phil 2:29. μ. φόβου καὶ τρόμου 2 Cor 7:15; Eph 6:5; Phil 2:12. μ. φόβου καὶ χαρᾶς Mt 28:8. μ. πραΰτητος καὶ φόβου 1 Pt 3:16. μ. παρρησίας (Lev 26:13; 1 Macc 4:18; s. παρρησία 3a) Ac 2:29; 4:29, 31; 28:31; Hb 4:16. μ. πεποιθήσεως 1 Cl 31:3. μ. σπουδῆς (3 Macc 5:24, 27; Mel., P. 12, 80) Mk 6:25; Lk 1:39. μ. ταπεινοφροσύνης Eph 4:2a; cp. Ac 20:19. μ. ὀργῆς (3 Macc 6:23; TestJob 4:4) Mk 3:5. μ. δακρύων in tears (3 Macc 1:16; 4:2; 5:7; TestAbr A 9 p. 86, 19 [Stone p. 20]; 14 p. 94, 21 [St. p. 36]; JosAs 28:8; ApcEsdr 6:23; s. δάκρυον) Mk 9:24 v.l.; Hb 5:7; 12:17. μ. εἰρήνης (s. εἰρήνη 1b) Ac 15:33; Hb 11:31.ⓑ of other accompanying phenomena (Antig. Car. 148 μετὰ φλογὸς καίεσθαι) μ. διωγμῶν though with persecutions Mk 10:30. μ. ἐπιθέσεως τῶν χειρῶν 1 Ti 4:14. μ. νηστειῶν Ac 14:23. μ. θορύβου (Jos., Ant. 5, 216) 24:18. μ. παρακλήσεως 2 Cor 8:4. μ. παρατηρήσεως Lk 17:20. μ. ὕβρεως καὶ πολλῆς ζημίας Ac 27:10 (s. ὕβρις 3). μ. φαντασίας 25:23. μ. δυνάμεως καὶ δόξης Mt 24:30; Mk 13:26; Lk 21:27 (Just., A I, 50, 1 al. μ. δόξης, D. 132, 1 w. δυνάμεως). μ. ἐξουσίας καὶ ἐπιτροπῆς Ac 26:12 (Jos., Ant. 20, 180 μετʼ ἐξουσίας). μ. βραχίονος ὑψηλοῦ ἐξάγειν τινά (s. βραχίων) Ac 13:17. μ. φωνῆς μεγάλης w. a loud voice Lk 17:15 (cp. EpArist 235; 281; JosAs 28:9). μ. σάλπιγγος with a trumpet call Mt 24:31 (Plut., Mor. 1135f μετʼ αὐλῶν=with the sound of flutes). σφραγίσαντες τ. λίθον μετὰ τ. κουστωδίας makes the stationing of the guard an accompaniment to the sealing of the stone Mt 27:66 (another possibility here is the instrumental use of μετά [Lycurgus the orator 124 μ. παραδειγμάτων διδάσκειν; SEG VIII, 246, 8 μετὰ κυνῶν—an instrument of torture—βασανίσαι; CWessely, Neue griech. Zauberpap. 1893, 234 γράφε μ. μέλανος; 2 Macc 6:16]: secure the stone by means of a guard; s. σφραγίζω 1).ⓒ of concrete objects, which serve as equipment (Appian, Maced. 9 §4 μετὰ χρυσῶν στεφάνων; POxy 123, 15; 19 μετὰ τῶν χλαμύδων εἰσβῆναι; 1 Esdr 5:57; Jdth 15:13; TestJob 24:10 μ. ψαλίδος; JosAs 7:4 μ. χρυσίου καὶ ἀργύριου; ParJer 9:31 μ. πολλῶν λίθων; ApcSed 7:10 μ. χαλιναρίου; ApcMos 40 μ. τῶν σινδόνων) μ. μαχαιρῶν καὶ ξύλων Mt 26:47; 55; Mk 14:43, 48; Lk 22:52. μ. φανῶν καὶ λαμπάδων καὶ ὅπλων (Xenophon Eph. p. 336, 20 μ. λαμπάδων) J 18:3.B. w. acc. In our lit. only in the mng. after, behind① marker of position that is behind someth., behind (Hom.+; Polyb.; Just., A I, 13, 4; Tat. 2, 2; not LXX) μ. τὸ δεύτερον καταπέτασμα behind the second curtain Hb 9:3.② marker of time after another point of time, after (Hom.+; ins, pap, LXX)ⓐ with the time expressly given μ. πολὺν χρόνον (2 Macc 6:1.—μετʼ οὐ πολὺν χρ.: Hero Alex. I p. 340, 6; SIG 1169, 54; Jos., Vi. 407) Mt 25:19. μ. τοσοῦτον χρόνον (4 Macc 5:7; ParJer 5:18) Hb 4:7. μ. χρόνον τινά (Diod S 9, 10, 2; Witkowski 26, 9 [III B.C.]; Jos., Ant. 8, 398; cp. En 106:1 μ. δὲ χρόνον; ApcSed 13:3 μ. χρόνον) Hv 1, 1, 2f; Hs 5, 2, 5; 9, 13, 8. μ. ἡμέρας ἕξ after six days Mt 17:1; Mk 9:2 (ApcMos 42 μ. τὰς ἓξ ἡμέρας). μ. τρεῖς ἡμέρας (Artem. 4, 33 p. 224, 5; Polyaenus 6, 53; 8, 62; EpArist 301; TestJob 52:1f; 53:7; ParJer 9:14; Jos., Ant 7, 280) Mt 27:63; Mk 8:31; 10:34; Lk 2:46; cp. μ. τρεῖς ἡμέρας καὶ τρεῖς νύκτας AcPlCor 2:30. μ. δύο ἡμέρας Mt 26:2; Mk 14:1 (cp. Caesar, Bell. Gall. 4, 9, 1 post tertiam diem=on the third day). μ. τινας ἡμέρας Ac 15:36; 24:24. μετʼ οὐ πολλὰς ἡμέρας (Artem. 1, 78 p. 72, 30; Jos., Ant. 5, 328, Vi. 309) Lk 15:13. οὐ μ. πολλὰς ταύτας ἡμέρας not long after these days = within a few days Ac 1:5 (B-D-F §226; 433, 3; Rob. 612; 1158; Dssm., ZVS 45, 1913, 60). W. gen. foll. μ. ἡμέρας εἴκοσι τῆς προτέρας ὁράσεως twenty days after the former vision Hv 4, 1, 1 (cp. Biogr. p. 31 μετὰ ξ´ ἔτη τοῦ Ἰλιακοῦ πολέμου; Gen 16:3). μ. τρεῖς μῆνας Ac 28:11. μ. τρία ἔτη Gal 1:18. ὁ μ. τετρακόσια καὶ τριάκοντα ἔτη γεγονὼς νόμος 3:17.ⓑ w. designations that are general, but include the idea of time: μ. τὴν ἄφιξίν μου Ac 20:29. μ. τὸ πάσχα after the Passover 12:4. μ. τὴν μετοικεσίαν Βαβυλῶνος Mt 1:12.ⓒ gener. μ. τὴν θλῖψιν after the (time of) tribulation Mk 13:24; cp. μ. τὴν θλῖψιν τῶν ἡμερῶν ἐκείνων Mt 24:29. μ. τὴν ἔγερσιν 27:53. μ. τὴν ἀνάγνωσιν Ac 13:15. μ. τὸ βάπτισμα 10:37. μ. μίαν καὶ δευτέραν νουθεσίαν Tit 3:10. μ. τὸ ψωμίον after he had eaten the piece of bread J 13:27.—Quite gener. μ. τοῦτο after this, afterward (Lucian, Hermot. 31; Gen 18:5; Lev 14:19; EpArist 258; TestJob 11:4; TestReub 1:9; TestLevi 6:3; Just., D. 57, 4) J 2:12; 11:7, 11; 19:28; Hb 9:27; Rv 7:1. μ. ταῦτα after this (Aeneas Tact. 240; 350; Diod S 1, 7, 1; Ex 3:20; 11:8 and oft.; TestJob 21:4; TestLevi 6:5; TestJos 19:5; JosAs 10:15; ParJer 3:10; ApcEsdr 4:36; ApcMos 2; Just., A I, 32, 6) Mk 16:12; Lk 5:27; 10:1 and oft. μ. οὐ πολύ (Dio Chrys. 56 [73], 8; Lucian, Scyth. 1; Herodian 1, 9, 7; BGU 614, 14; Mitt-Wilck. II/2, 96 II, 9; 1 Esdr 3:22; Jos., Ant. 12, 132) not long afterward Ac 27:14. μ. μικρόν a short while afterward Mt 26:73; Mk 14:70 (Just., D. 56, 17). Also μ. βραχύ Lk 22:58 (cp. μετʼ ὀλίγον: Lucian, Dial, Mort. 15, 3; PRyl 77, 41; Wsd 15:8; Jdth 13:9; TestAbrA 7 p. 84, 8 [Stone p. 16]; GrBar 9:3; Jos., Ant. 12, 136; 10:15; Just., D. 56, 18).ⓓ w. subst. aor. inf. foll.α. w. acc. (SIG 633, 105; 640, 13; 695, 78; 1233, 1; Sir 46:20; Jdth 16:25; Bar 1:9; 1 Macc 1:1, 9; TestAbr B 12 p. 116, 11 [Stone p. 80]; 117, 5 [St. p. 82]; TestJob 5:2; TestLevi 18:1; ApcMos 1; Just., A I, 50, 12.—B-D-F §406, 3; Rob. 979) μ. τὸ ἐγερθῆναί με after I am raised up Mt 26:32; Mk 14:28. μ. τὸ παραδοθῆναι τὸν Ἰωάννην after John was arrested Mk 1:14.—Ac 1:3; 7:4; 10:41; 15:13; 19:21; 20:1; Hv 2, 1, 3; m 4, 1, 7; Hs 8, 1, 3; 8, 2, 5.β. without acc. (Aelian, VH 12, 1 p. 118, 27; Herodian 2, 9, 5; SIG 976, 39; UPZ 110, 193 [164 B.C.]; Sir 23:20; 32:18 v.l.; 1 Macc 1:20; ApcMos 26:42f; Just., A I, 14, 1; Tat. 16, 1) μ. τὸ λαλῆσαι αὐτοῖς after he had spoken to them Mk 16:19.—Lk 12:5; 1 Cor 11:25; Hb 10:26.—W. perf. inf. 10:15.—M-M. EDNT. TW. -
9 ποιέω
ποιέω (Hom.+) impf. ἐποίουν; fut. ποιήσω; 1 aor. ἐποίησα; pf. πεποίηκα; plpf. πεποιήκειν Mk 15:7 (as IMagnMai 93b, 24; on the omission of the augment s. B-D-F §66, 1; Mlt-H. 190). Mid.: impf. ἐποιούμην; 1 aor. ἐποιησάμην; pf. πεποίημαι 1 Cl 1:1. Pass. (has disappeared almost entirely; B-D-F §315): 1 fut. ποιηθήσομαι; 1 aor. 3 pl. ἐποιήθησαν (En 22:9); pf. 3 sg. πεποίηται (Ec 8:14; Tat. 11, 2), ptc. πεποιημένος (Ec 1:14 al.) Hb 12:27. A multivalent term, often without pointed semantic significance, used in ref. to a broad range of activity involving such matters as bringing someth. into being, bringing someth. to pass, or simply interacting in some way with a variety of entities.① to produce someth. material, make, manufacture, produce τὶ someth. (Gen 6:14ff; 33:17 al.; JosAs 16:8; GrBar 3:5 ‘build’; ApcMos 20; Mel., P. 38, 261).ⓐ of human activity: σκεῦος 2 Cl 8:2. χιτῶνας, ἱμάτια Ac 9:39. εἰκόνα Rv 13:14b. θεούς make gods Ac 7:40 (Ex 32:1). ναοὺς ἀργυροῦς 19:24. ἀνθρακιάν J 18:18. τέσσαρα μέρη 19:23 (s. μέρος 1a). πηλόν 9:11, 14. σκηνὰς pitch tents, build huts (1 Ch 15:1; 2 Esdr 18: 16f; Jdth 8:5; Jos., Ant. 3, 79; Just., D. 127, 3 σκηνήν) Mt 17:4; Mk 9:5; Lk 9:33. ἁγίασμα GJs 6:1; καταπέτασμα τῷ ναῷ 10:1; τὴν πορφύραν καὶ τὸ κόκκινον 12:1.—Used w. prepositional expressions ποιῆσαι αὐτὴν (i.e. τὴν σκηνὴν τοῦ μαρτυρίου) κατὰ τὸν τύπον to make it (the tent of testimony) according to the model (Ex 25:40) Ac 7:44; cp. Hb 8:5. ποιεῖν τι ἔκ τινος make someth. from or out of someth. (i.e. fr. a certain material; Hdt. 2, 96; cp. X., An. 4, 5, 14; Theophr., HP 4, 2, 5; Ex 20:24f; 28:15; 29:2) J 2:15; 9:6; Ro 9:21.ⓑ of divine activity, specifically of God’s creative activity create (Hes., Op. 109; Heraclitus, Fgm. 30 κόσμον οὔτε τις θεῶν οὔτε ἀνθρώπων ἐποίησεν, ἀλλʼ ἦν ἀεὶ καὶ ἔστιν καὶ ἔσται; Pla., Tim. 76c ὁ ποιῶν ‘the Creator’; Epict. 1, 6, 5; 1, 14, 10; 2, 8, 19 σε ὁ Ζεὺς πεποίηκε; 4, 1, 102; 107; 4, 7, 6 ὁ θεὸς πάντα πεποίηκεν; Ael. Aristid. 43, 7 K.=1 p. 2 D.: Ζεὺς τὰ πάντα ἐποίησεν; Herm. Wr. 4, 1. In LXX oft. for בָּרָא also Wsd 1:13; 9:9; Sir 7:30; 32:13; Tob 8:6; Jdth 8:14; Bar 3:35; 4:7; 2 Macc 7:28; Aristobulus in Eus., PE13, 12, 12 [pp. 182 and 184 Holladay]; JosAs 9:5; Philo, Sacr. Abel. 65 and oft.; SibOr 3, 28 and Fgm. 3, 3; 16; Just., A II, 5, 2 al.) w. acc. ἡ χείρ μου ἐποίησεν ταῦτα πάντα Ac 7:50 (Is 66:2). τοὺς αἰῶνας Hb 1:2 (s. αἰών 3). τὸν κόσμον (Epict. 4, 7, 6 ὁ θεὸς πάντα πεποίηκεν τὰ ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ καὶ αὐτὸν τὸν κόσμον ὅλον; Sallust. 5 p. 10, 29; Wsd 9:9; TestAbr A 10 p. 88, 21 [Stone p. 24]) Ac 17:24. τὸν οὐρανὸν καὶ τὴν γῆν (cp. Ael. Aristid. above; Gen 1:1; Ex 20:11; Ps 120:2; 145:6; Is 37:16; Jer 39:17 et al.; TestJob 2:4; Jos., C. Ap. 2, 121; Aristobulus above) Ac 4:24; 14:15b; cp. Rv 14:7. τὰ πάντα PtK 2 p. 13, 26 (JosAs 12, 2; Just., D. 55, 2; also s. Ael. Aristid. above). Lk 11:40 is classed here by many. Of the relation of Jesus to God Ἰησοῦν, πιστὸν ὄντα τῷ ποιήσαντι αὐτόν= appointed him Hb 3:2 (cp. Is 17:7).—W. a second acc., that of the predicate (PSI 435, 19 [258 B.C.] ὅπως ἂν ὁ Σάραπις πολλῷ σὲ μείζω ποιήσῃ) ἄρσεν καὶ θῆλυ ἐποίησεν αὐτούς (God) created them male and female Mt 19:4b; Mk 10:6 (both Gen 1:27c).—Pass. Hb 12:27.—ὁ ποιήσας the Creator Mt 19:4a v.l.② to undertake or do someth. that brings about an event, state, or condition, do, cause, bring about, accomplish, prepare, etc.ⓐ ἔργα π. do deeds, also in sg. (as JosAs 29:3 μὴ ποιήσῃς τὸ ἔργον τοῦτο) τὰ ἔργα τοῦ Ἀβραὰμ π. do as Abraham did J 8:39. τὰ ἔργα τοῦ πατρὸς ὑμῶν vs. 41; cp. 10:37. τὰ πρῶτα ἔργα Rv 2:5. ἔργον commit a deed 1 Cor 5:2 v.l. ἔργον ποίησον εὐαγγελιστοῦ 2 Ti 4:5 (s. ἔργον 2).—ἔργον or ἔργα somet. refer to wondrous deeds: ἓν ἔργον ἐποίησα I have done just one (wondrous) deed J 7:21. Pl. 14:12a; cp. vs. 12bc. This illustrates the transition toⓑ do, perform miracles δυνάμεις Mt 7:22; 13:58; Ac 19:11 (Just., A I, 26, 2 al.); sg. Mk 6:5; 9:39. θαυμάσια Mt 21:15 (cp. Sir 31:9). μεγάλα καὶ θαυμάσια AcPl Ha 8, 33=BMM verso 5f (Just., A I, 62, 4). σημεῖα (Ex 4:17) J 2:23; 3:2; 7:31; 9:16; 11:47b; 20:30; Rv 13:13a; 16:14; 19:20. Sing. J 6:30; 10:41. τέρατα καὶ σημεῖα Ac 6:8; 7:36. ὅσα Mk 3:8; 6:30; Lk 9:10.—Ac 10:39; 14:11.ⓒ of conditions bring about, etc.: εἰρήνην make, establish peace Eph 2:15; Js 3:18 (cp. 2 Macc 1:4). τὴν ἔκβασιν provide a way out 1 Cor 10:13 (on the foll. gen. of the inf. w. the art. s. B-D-F §400, 2; Rob. 1067). ἐπίστασιν ὄχλου cause a disturbance among the people Ac 24:12. τὰ σκάνδαλα create difficulties Ro 16:17. On Mk 6:20 v.l. KRomaniuk, ETL 69, ’93, 140f.—W. dat. of advantage ἐποίουν χαρὰν τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς they brought joy to the members Ac 15:3 (s. ἀδελφός 2a).ⓓ used w. a noun as a periphrasis for a simple verb of doing (s. 7a below; B-D-F §310, 1.—ποιέω in such combinations as early as IPriene 8, 63 [c. 328 B.C.], also Plut., Crass. 551 [13, 6]; s. ἑορτή, end). ἐποίησεν ᾆσμα GJs 6:3. διαθήκην π. Hb 8:9 (Jer 38:32 cod. Q; cp. Is 28:15; TestAbr A 8 p. 86, 6 [Stone p. 20] διάταξιν). π. τὴν ἐκδίκησιν Lk 18:7f; cp. Ac 7:24 (s. ἐκδίκησις 1). ἐνέδραν 25:3. κοπετόν 8:2. κρίσιν (s. κρίσις 1aα and β) J 5:27; Jd 15. θρῆνον GJs 3:1. κυνηγίαν AcPl Ha 1, 33. λύτρωσιν Lk 1:68. ὁδὸν ποιεῖν (v.l. ὁδοποιεῖν) Mk 2:23 (ὁδός 2). π. (τὸν) πόλεμον (μετά τινος) wage war (on someone) Rv 11:7; 12:17; 13:7 (Da 7:8 LXX; 7:21 Theod.; Gen 14:2). πρόθεσιν Eph 3:11; συμβούλιον π. Mk 3:6 v.l.; 15:1; συστροφήν Ac 23:12; cp. vs. 13. φόνον Mk 15:7 (cp. Dt 22:8; Callinicus, Vi. Hyp. 98, 21 Bonn; TestAbr B 10 p. 115, 4 [Stone p. 78, 4]).—τὸ ἱκανὸν ποιεῖν τινι vs. 15 s. ἱκανός 1.ⓔ what is done is indicated by the neut. of an adj. or pron.: τὸ ἀγαθὸν π. do what is good Ro 13:3; τὰ ἀγαθὰ π. J 5:29; ἀγαθὸν π. do good Mk 3:4; 1 Pt 3:11 (Ps 33:15). τὸ καλὸν Ro 7:21; 2 Cor 13:7b; Gal 6:9. τὰ καλὰ (καὶ εὐάρεστα ἐνώπιον αὐτοῦ) 1 Cl 21:1. καλόν Js 4:17. τὸ κακόν Ro 13:4. τὰ κακά 3:8. κακόν 2 Cor 13:7a (κακὸν μηδέν; cp. SIG 1175, 20 κακόν τι ποιῆσαι). κακά 1 Pt 3:12 (Ps 33:17). τὰ ἀρεστὰ αὐτῷ (=τῷ θεῷ) J 8:29; cp. Hb 13:21b; 1J 3:22 (TestAbr A 15 p. 96, 12 [Stone p. 40] πάντα τὰ ἀρεστὰ ἐνώπιον σου ἐποίησεν). πάντα 1 Cor 9:23; 10:31b; IEph 15:3.—ὅ Mt 26:13; Mk 14:9; J 13:7, 27a. τοῦτο Mt 13:28; Mk 5:32; Lk 5:6; J 14:13, 14 v.l.; AcPl Ha 9, 27; Ro 7:15f, 20 (cp. Epict. 2, 26, 4 ὸ̔ θέλει οὐ ποιεῖ καὶ ὸ̔ μὴ θέλει ποιεῖ); 1 Cor 11:24f (the specific sense ‘sacrifice’ in this passage is opposed by TAbbott [JBL 9, 1890, 137–52], but favored by FMozley [ET 7, 1896, 370–86], AAndersen [D. Abendmahl in d. ersten zwei Jahrh. 1904], and K Goetz [D. Abendmahlsfrage2 1907]). αὐτὸ τοῦτο Gal 2:10. ταῦτα Mt 21:23; 23:23; Gal 5:17; 2 Pt 1:10b. αὐτά J 13:17; Ro 1:32; 2:3. τὸ αὐτό Mt 5:46, 47b.—τί ποιήσω; Mk 10:17; cp. J 18:35 (TestAbr A 4 p. 81, 19 [Stone p. 10]; ParJer 6:14 τί ποιήσωμεν; ApcEsdr 7:4 p. 32, 14 Tdf.). τί ἀγαθὸν ποιήσω; Mt 19:16. τί κακὸν ἐποίησεν; Mt 27:23; Lk 23:22; Mk 15:14. τί περισσὸν ποιεῖτε; Mt 5:47a. τί ποιεῖτε τοῦτο; what is this that you are doing? or why are you doing this? Mk 11:3 (GrBar 2:2 τί ἐποίησας τοῦτο; s. B-D-F §299, 1; Rob. 736; 738; Rdm.2 25f). τί ταῦτα ποιεῖτε; Ac 14:15a (as Demosth. 55, 5). τί σὺ ὧδε ποιεῖς; Hv 1, 1, 5. W. ptc. foll. (B-D-F §414, 5; Rob. 1121) τί ποιεῖτε λύοντες; what are you doing, untying? Mk 11:5. τί ποιεῖτε κλαίοντες; what are you doing, weeping? or what do you mean by weeping? Ac 21:13. τί ποιήσουσιν οἱ βαπτιζόμενοι; what are they to do, who have themselves baptized? 1 Cor 15:29.—A statement of what is to be done follows in an indirect question ὸ̔ ποιεῖς ποίησον do what you must do J 13:27 (as Epict. 3, 21, 24 ποίει ἃ ποιεῖς; 3, 23, 1; 4, 9, 18; TestJob 7:13).ⓕ of meals or banquets, and of festivities of which a banquet is the principal part give ἄριστον Lk 14:12. δεῖπνον (q.v. bα) Mk 6:21; Lk 14:12, 16; J 12:2; Hs 5, 2, 9. δοχήν (s. δοχή) Lk 5:29; 14:13; GJs 6:2. γάμους (s. γάμος 1a) Mt 22:2 (JosAs 20:6).—Keep, celebrate (PFay 117, 12) the Passover (feast) Mt 26:18; Hb 11:28 (s. πάσχα 3). Also in connection w. τὴν ἑορτὴν ποιῆσαι Ac 18:21 D the Passover is surely meant. But π. is also used of festivals in general (cp. X., Hell. 4, 5, 2 ποιεῖν Ἴσθμια; 7, 4, 28 τὰ Ὀλύμπια).ⓖ of the natural processes of growth; in plant life send out, produce, bear, yield καρπόν, καρπούς (Aristot., Plant. 1, 4, 819b, 31; 2, 10, 829a, 41; LXX [καρπός 1aα]) Mt 3:10; 7:17ab, 18, 19; 13:26; Lk 3:9; 6:43ab; 8:8; 13:9; Rv 22:2; also in imagery Mt 3:8; 21:43; Lk 3:8. κλάδους Mk 4:32. ἐλαίας Js 3:12a (cp. Jos., Ant. 11, 50 ἄμπελοι, αἳ ποιοῦσιν τὸν οἶνον). π. ὕδωρ produce water vs. 12b (but s. ἁλυκός).—Of capital yielding a return ἡ μνᾶ ἐποίησεν πέντε μνᾶς the mina has made five minas Lk 19:18. Also of a person who operates w. capital make money (Ps.-Demosth. 10, 76; Polyb. 2, 62, 12) ἐποίησεν ἄλλα πέντε τάλαντα Mt 25:16 v.l.ⓗ with focus on causalityα. The result of the action is indicated by the acc. and inf.; make (to), cause (someone) to, bring it about that (Hom. et al.; also ins [SIG IV p. 510a index], pap, LXX; TestJob 3:7; 42:6; ParJer 9:16f; ApcMos 16; Just., A I, 26, 5, D. 69, 6; 114, 1; Ath. 13, 2) ποιεῖ αὐτὴν μοιχευθῆναι Mt 5:32. ποιήσω ὑμᾶς γενέσθαι ἁλεεῖς ἀνθρώπων Mk 1:17. Cp. 7:37b; Lk 5:34 ( force someone to fast); J 6:10; Ac 17:26; Rv 13:13b.—ἵνα takes the place of the inf.: ποιήσω αὐτοὺς ἵνα ἥξουσιν Rv 3:9; cp. 13:12b, 16. ἵνα without acc. (TestAbr B 6 p. 110, 20 [Stone p. 68] ποίησον ἵνα φαγῶμεν) J 11:37; Col 4:16; Rv 13:15.—ἡμῖν ὡς πεποιηκόσιν τοῦ περιπατεῖν αὐτόν us, as though we had caused him to walk Ac 3:12 (s. B-D-F §400, 7).β. w. a double accusative, of the obj. and the pred. (Hom. et al.; LXX; ApcEsdr 4:27 p. 38, 32 Tdf. λίθους ἄρτους ποιήσας; Mel., P. 68, 494 ποιήσας ἡμᾶς ἱεράτευμα καινόν), make someone or someth. (into) someth. W. noun as predicate acc.: ποιήσω ὑμᾶς ἁλιεῖς ἀνθρώπων Mt 4:19. ὑμεῖς αὐτὸν (i.e. τὸν οἶκον τοῦ θεοῦ) ποιεῖτε σπήλαιον λῃστῶν 21:13; Mk 11:17; Lk 19:46. Cp. Mt 23:15b; J 2:16; 4:46, 54; cp. 2:11; Ac 2:36; 2 Cor 5:21; Hb 1:7 (Ps 103:4); Rv 1:6; 3:12 al. ποίησόν με ὡς ἕνα τ. μισθίων σου Lk 15:19, 21 v.l. (cp. Gen 45:8; 48:20 and s. B-D-F §453, 4; Rob. 481). If the obj. acc. is missing, it may be supplied fr. the context as self-evident ἁρπάζειν αὐτὸν ἵνα ποιήσωσιν βασιλέα take him by force, in order to make (him) king J 6:15.—1 Cor 6:15. Claim that someone is someth., pretend that someone is someth. J 8:53; 10:33; 19:7, 12; 1J 1:10; 5:10. Cp. 5b.—W. adj. as predicate acc.: εὐθείας ποιεῖτε τὰς τρίβους (Is 40:3) make the paths straight Mt 3:3; Mk 1:3; Lk 3:4. τρίχα λευκὴν π. Mt 5:36. Cp. 12:16; 20:12b; 26:73; 28:14; Mk 3:12; J 5:11, 15; 7:23; 16:2; Ac 7:19; Eph 2:14 ὁ ποιήσας τὰ ἀμφότερα ἕν; Rv 12:15; 21:5. ἴσον ἑαυτὸν ποιῶν τῷ θεῷ (thereby) declaring that he was equal to God or making himself equal to God J 5:18.—Cp. use of the mid. 7b below.γ. w. adv. of place send outside ἔξω ποιεῖν τινα put someone out (=send outside; cp. X., Cyr. 4, 1, 3 ἔξω βελῶν ποιεῖν=‘put outside bowshot’) Ac 5:34.③ to carry out an obligation of a moral or social nature, do, keep, carry out, practice, commitⓐ do, keep the will or law obediently τὸ θέλημα τοῦ θεοῦ etc. (JosAs 12:3; s. θέλημα 1cγ) Mt 7:21; 12:50; Mk 3:35; J 4:34; 6:38; 7:17; 9:31; Eph 6:6; Hb 10:7, 9 (both Ps 39:9), 36; 13:21; 1J 2:17; Pol 2:2; τὰ θελήματα Mk 3:35 v.l.; Ac 13:22; GEb 121, 34. π. τὰ θελήματα τῆς σαρκός Eph 2:3. Cp. Mt 21:31.—π. τὸν νόμον J 7:19; Gal 5:3; cp. Mt 5:19; Ro 2:14; Gal 3:10 (Dt 27:26); vs. 12 (cp. Lev 18:5).—Mt 7:24, 26; Lk 6:46; J 2:5; 8:44. ἐκεῖνο τὸ προσταχθὲν ἡμῖν ποιήσωμεν let us do what has been commanded us GMary 463, 27f (ParJer 6:9).—ὸ̔ ἐὰν φανηρώσῃ … ὁ θεός, τοῦτο ποιήσομεν GJs 8:2.—ἐξουσίαν ποιεῖν exercise authority Rv 13:12a.ⓑ do, practice virtues (cp. SIG 304, 41f τὰ δίκαια): π. τὴν ἀλήθειαν (ἀλήθεια 2b) live the truth J 3:21 (cp. 1QS 1:5 al.); 1J 1:6. (τὴν) δικαιοσύνην (δικαιοσύνη 3a) 1J 2:29; 3:7, 10; Rv 22:11; 2 Cl 4:2; 11:7. τὰ ἐντολά Ro 22:14 v.l. (SGoranson, NTS 43, ’97, 154–57). Differently Mt 6:1 (δικαιοσύνη 3b), which belongs with ποιεῖν ἐλεημοσύνην vs. 2a and 3a (s. ἐλεημοσύνη 1); cp. Ac 9:36; 10:2; 24:17. π. ἐγκράτειαν 2 Cl 15:1. π. χρηστότητα Ro 3:12 (Ps 13:1, 3; 52:4 v.l.). π. ἔλεος show mercy Js 2:13; μετά τινος to someone Lk 1:72; 10:37a (JosAs 23:4; s. ἔλεος a and μετά A2γג).ⓒ do, commit, be guilty of sins and vices (τὴν) ἁμαρτίαν (ἁμαρτία 1a) J 8:34; 2 Cor 11:7; 1 Pt 2:22; 1J 3:4a, 8, 9; pl. Js 5:15 (TestAbr B 10 p. 115, 10 [Stone p. 78, 10]). ἁμάρτημα (TestJob 11:3; ParJer 2:2; s. ἁμάρτημα) 1 Cor 6:18. (τὴν) ἀνομίαν (ἀνομία 2) Mt 13:41; 1J 3:4b; 1 Cl 16:10 (Is 53:9). βδέλυγμα καὶ ψεῦδος Rv 21:27. τὸ πονηρὸν τοῦτο GJs 13:1; cp. 13:2; 15:3f; ταῦτα 15:2. τὰ μὴ καθήκοντα Ro 1:28. ὸ̔ οὐκ ἔξεστιν Mk 2:24; cp. Mt 12:2.ⓓ The manner of action is more definitely indicated by means of an adv. (Jos., C. Ap. 2, 51). καλῶς ποιεῖν do good or well Mt 12:12; 1 Cor 7:37, 38a (ApcMos 17). κρεῖσσον π. 7:38b; Js 2:8 (s. 5d below), 19; φρονίμως π. act wisely Lk 16:8; π. οὕτως do so (Chariton 8, 6, 4 ποιήσομεν οὕτως=this is the way we will proceed; JosAs 10:20; ApcMos 40; Mel., P. 13, 82) Mt 24:46; Lk 9:15; 12:43; J 14:31 (καθὼς … οὕτως π.); Ac 12:8; 1 Cor 16:1; Js 2:12; B 12:7; GJs 7:2. π. ὡσαύτως proceed in the same way Mt 20:5; ὁμοίως π. Lk 3:11; 10:37b. ὥσπερ οἱ ὑποκριταὶ ποιοῦσιν as the dissemblers do Mt 6:2b. καθὼς ποιεῖτε 1 Th 5:11.—ποιεῖν foll. by a clause beginning w. ὡς: ἐποίησεν ὡς προσέταξεν he did as (the angel) had ordered Mt 1:24; cp. 26:19. Or the clause begins w. καθώς Mt 21:6; J 13:15b (TestJob 7:9). For GJs 17:1 s. 5e.ⓔ The manner of the action is more definitely indicated by a prepositional expr. ποιεῖν κατά τι do or act in accordance w. someth. (SIG 915, 13 π. κατὰ τὰς συνθήκας; 1016, 6; PLille 4, 6; 22 [III B.C.]; BGU 998 II, 12 [II B.C.] π. κατὰ τὰ προγεγραμμένα) κατὰ τὰ ἔργα αὐτῶν as they do Mt 23:3b.—Lk 2:27. Also π. πρός τι: πρὸς τὸ θέλημα 12:47.④ to do someth. to others or someth., do someth. to/with, of behavior involving others, π. τι w. some indication of the pers. (or thing) with whom someth. is done; the action may result to the advantage or disadvantage of this person:ⓐ neutral π. τί τινα do someth. with someone (double acc. as Demosth. 23, 194 τὶ ποιεῖν ἀγαθὸν τὴν πόλιν) τί ποιήσω Ἰησοῦν; what shall I do with Jesus? Mt 27:22. τί οὖν αὐτὴν ποιήσωμεν; what, then, shall I do about (Mary)? GJs 8:2; cp. 14:1; 17:1. τί ποιήσεις τὸν ἀγρόν; what will you do with the land? Hs 1:4 (ParJer 3:9 τί θέλει ποιήσω τὰ ἅγια σκεύη). Cp. Mk 15:12.—B-D-F §157, 1; Rob. 484.—Neutral is also the expr. π. τί τινι do someth. to someone J 9:26; 12:16; 13:12; Ac 4:16. Likew. the passive form of the familiar saying of Jesus ὡς ποιεῖτε, οὕτω ποιηθήσεται ὑμῖν as you do (whether it be good or ill), it will be done to you 1 Cl 13:2.ⓑ to someone’s advantage: π. τί τινι (Diod S 18, 51, 3; TestAbr B 12 p. 116, 19 [Stone p. 80]; ParJer 3:12; ApcMos 3): ὅσα ἐὰν θέλητε ἵνα ποιῶσιν ὑμῖν οἱ ἄνθρωποι Mt 7:12a. τί θέλετε ποιήσω ὑμῖν; what do you want me to do for you? Mt 20:32.—25:40; cp. vs. 45; Mk 5:19f; 7:12; 10:35f, 51; Lk 1:49; 8:39ab; J 13:15a.—π. τι εἴς τινα 1 Th 4:10. π. τι μετά τινος (B-D-F §227, 3, add. reff. B-D-R) Ac 14:27; 15:4 (TestJob 1:4; on the constr. w. μετά s. 3b above and cp. BGU 798, 7; 948, 8).ⓒ to someone’s disadvantage: π. τί τινι (Gen 20:9; JosAs 28:10 μὴ ποιήσητε αὐτοῖς κακόν; ApcMos 42) τί ποιήσει τοῖς γεωργοῖς; what will he do to the vine-dressers? Mt 21:40.—Mk 9:13; Lk 6:11; 20:15; Ac 9:13; Hb 13:6 (Ps 117:6); GJs 9:2.—π. τι εἴς τινα (PSI 64, 20; 22 [I B.C.] μηδὲ ποιήσειν εἰς σὲ φάρμακα) J 15:21. π. τι ἔν τινι Mt 17:12; Lk 23:31.ⓓ w. dat. and adv. ἐποίησαν αὐτοῖς ὡσαύτως they treated them in the same way Mt 21:36. οὕτως μοι πεποίηκεν κύριος the Lord has dealt thus with me Lk 1:25; cp. 2:48; Mt 18:35. εὖ ποιεῖν τινι Mk 14:7. καλῶς π. τινι Mt 5:44 v.l.; Lk 6:27. ὁμοίως π. τινι 6:31b.—In a condensed colloquialism (ποιεῖν) καθὼς ἐποίει αὐτοῖς (to do) as he was accustomed to do for them Mk 15:8 (s. εὐποιί̈α 1).ⓔ w. dat. and prep. κατὰ τὰ αὐτὰ ἐποίουν τοῖς προφήταις οἱ πατέρες αὐτῶν Lk 6:23; cp. vs. 26.⑤ do, make, with variations in specialized expressionsⓐ get or gain someth. for oneself, provide oneself with someth. ποιήσατε ἑαυτοῖς βαλλάντια Lk 12:33; φίλους 16:9 (cp. X., An. 5, 5, 12 φίλον ποιεῖσθαί τινα).—Without a dat. Ἰησοῦς μαθητὰς ποιεῖ Jesus was gaining disciples J 4:1.ⓑ of mental construction assume, suppose, take as an example (Hdt. et al.) w. double acc. (Pla., Theaet. 197d) ποιήσατε τὸ δένδρον καλόν suppose the tree is good Mt 12:33a; cp. vs. 33b.ⓒ w. an acc. of time spend, stay (Anth. 11, 330; PSI 362, 15 [251/250 B.C.]; UPZ 70, 21; PFlor 137, 7 [III A.D.] ἡμέραν, ἥν ποιεῖ ἐκεῖ; PGen 54, 18 τρεῖς ἡμέρας; Pr 13:23; Ec 6:12; Tob. 10:7 BA; TestJob 20:5; 31:4; ParJer 6:16; ApcMos 37 ὥρας τρεῖς; Jos. Ant. 6, 18 μῆνας τέσσαρας; cp. our colloquial ‘do time’. Demosth. 19, 163 and Pla., Phileb. 50d are wrongly cited in this connection, as shown by WSchulze, Graeca Latina 1901, 23f) χρόνον (Dionys. Hal. 4, 66; ParJer 7:33; ApcMos 31) Ac 15:33; 18:23. μῆνας τρεῖς 20:3. τρεῖς μῆνας GJs 12:3. νυχθήμερον 2 Cor 11:25. ἐνιαυτόν Js 4:13 (TestJob 21:1 ἔτη).ⓓ καλῶς ποιεῖν w. ptc. foll. do well if, do well to, as a formula somet.= please (s. καλῶς 4a and cp. SIG 561, 6f καλῶς ποιήσειν τοὺς πολίτας προσδεξαμένους; UPZ 110, 11 [164 B.C.]; POxy 300, 5 [I A.D.]; 525, 7; Hdt. 5, 24 εὖ ἐποίησας ἀφικόμενος; SIG 598e, 8f) Ac 10:33; Phil 4:14; 2 Pt 1:19; 3J 6; GEg 252, 53.—Sim. καλῶς ποιεῖν, εἰ … Js 2:8 (cp. PPetr II, 11 [1], 1 καλῶς ποιεῖς εἰ ἔρρωσαι).ⓔ αὕτη ἡ ἡμέρα κυρίου ποιήσει ὡς βούλεται this day of the Lord will turn out as (the Lord) wills GJs 17:1 (deStrycker cites Mt 6:34 for the construction); if the accentuation αὐτή is adopted, render: the day of the Lord shall itself bring things about as (the Lord) wills.⑥ to be active in some way, work, be active, abs. (X., An. 1, 5, 8; Ruth 2:19) w. acc. of time (Socrat., Ep. 14, 8 ποιήσας ἡμέρας τριάκοντα) μίαν ὥραν ἐποίησαν they have worked for only one hour Mt 20:12a. ποιῆσαι μῆνας be active for months Rv 13:5.—Somet. it is not a general action or activity that is meant, but the doing of someth. quite definite. The acc. belonging to it is easily supplied fr. the context: λέγουσιν καὶ οὐ ποιοῦσιν they say (it), but do not do or keep (it) Mt 23:3c (the contrast is not betw. speaking [λαλεῖν] and acting in general).—2 Cor 8:10f (s. Betz, 2 Cor p. 64); 1 Th 5:24.⑦ make/do someth. for oneself or of oneself mid.ⓐ mostly as a periphrasis of the simple verbal idea (s. 2d) ἀναβολὴν ποιεῖσθαι Ac 25:17 (s. ἀναβολή). ἐκβολὴν ποιεῖσθαι 27:18 (s. ἐκβολή); αὔξησιν π. Eph 4:16; δέησιν or δεήσεις π. Lk 5:33; Phil 1:4; 1 Ti 2:1 (s. δέησις). διαλογισμοὺς π. 1 Cl 21:3; τὰς διδασκαλίας Papias (2:15); τὴν ἕνωσιν π. IPol 5:2; ἐπιστροφὴν π. 1 Cl 1:1 (ἐπιστροφή 1); καθαρισμὸν π. Hb 1:3 (καθαρισμός 2). κοινωνίαν Ro 15:26. κοπετόν Ac 8:2 v.l.; λόγον (Isocr., Ep. 2, 2; Just., D. 1, 3 al.) 1:1; 11:2 D; 20:24 v.l. (on these three passages s. λόγος: 1b; 1aγ and 1aα, end). μνείαν Ro 1:9; Eph 1:16; 1 Th 1:2; Phlm 4 (μνεία 2). μνήμην 2 Pt 1:15 (s. μνήμη 1). μονήν J 14:23 (μονή 1). νουθέτησιν 1 Cl 56:2 (Just., A I, 67, 4). ὁμιλίαν IPol 5:1 (ὁμιλία 2). ποιεῖσθαι τὴν παραβολήν AcPlCor 2:28. πορείαν π. (=πορεύεσθαι; cp. X., An. 5, 6, 11, Cyr. 5, 2, 31; Plut., Mor. 571e; Jos., Vi. 57; 2 Macc 3:8; 12:10; Ar. 4, 2) Lk 13:22. πρόνοιαν π. make provision, care (Isocr. 4, 2 and 136; Demosth., Prooem. 16; Ps.-Demosth. 47, 80; Polyb. 4, 6, 11; Dion. Hal. 5, 46; Aelian, VH 12, 56. Oft. in ins and pap [esp. of civic-minded people]; Da 6:19 προν. ποιούμενος αὐτοῦ; Jos., Bell. 4, 317, C. Ap. 1, 9; Ar. 13, 2) Ro 13:14; Papias (2:15). προσκλίσεις π. 1 Cl 47:3; σπουδὴν π. be eager (Hdt. 1, 4; 5, 30 πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούμενος; 9, 8; Pla., Euthyd. 304e, Leg. 1, 628e; Isocr. 5, 45 πᾶσαν τὴν σπ.̀ περὶ τούτου ποιεῖσθαι; Polyb. 1, 46, 2 al.; Diod S 1, 75, 1; Plut., Mor. 4e; SIG 539A, 15f; 545, 14 τὴν πᾶσαν σπ.̀ ποιούμενος; PHib 71, 9 [III B.C.] τ. πᾶσαν σπ. ποίησαι; 44, 8) Jd 3. συνελεύσεις ποιεῖσθαι come together, meet 1 Cl 20:10 (Just., A I, 67, 7). συνωμοσίαν ποιεῖσθαι form a conspiracy (Polyb. 1, 70, 6; Herodian 7, 4, 3; SIG 526, 16) Ac 23:13.—Cp. use of the act. 2d.ⓑ w. double acc., of the obj. and pred. (Lucian, Prom. Es in Verb. 6 σεμνοτάτας ἐποιεῖτο τὰς συνουσίας; GDI 4629, II, 22; 25 [Laconia]; Jos., Ant. 2, 263; s. 2hβ) βεβαίαν τὴν κλῆσιν ποιεῖσθαι make the calling certain 2 Pt 1:10. οὐδενὸς λόγου ποιοῦμαι τὴν ψυχὴν τιμίαν ἐμαυτῷ I don’t consider my life as something of value for myself Ac 20:24. Cp. use of the act. 2hβ.—B. 538. Cp. πράσσω. Schmidt, Syn. I 397–423. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. Sv. -
10 πολύς
πολύς, πολλή, πολύ, gen. πολλοῦ, ῆς, οῦ (Hom.+; ins, pap, LXX, pseudepigr., Philo, Joseph., apolog.) ‘much’.—Comparative πλείων, πλεῖον (18 times in the NT, 4 times in the Apost. Fathers [including Hv 3, 6, 4; Hs 8, 1, 16] and Ath. 12, 3) or πλέον (Lk 3:13 and Ac 15:28 μηδὲν πλέον; otherwise, πλέον in the NT only J 21:15; 14 times in the Apost. Fathers [incl. μηδὲν πλέον Hs 1, 1, 6]; Ar. twice; Just. 6 times; Tat. once; Ath. 7 times), ονος; pl. πλείονες, and acc. πλείονας contracted πλείους, neut. πλείονα and πλείω (the latter Mt 26:53 [πλεῖον, πλείου vv.ll.]; B-D-F §30, 2; Mlt-H. 82; Thackeray p. 81f; Mayser p. 68f) ‘more’ (Hom.+; ins, pap, LXX; TestAbr B 7 p. 111, 27=Stone p. 70 [πλείον]; TestJob 35:2; TestGad 7:2 [πλεῖον]; AscIs 3:8; [πλέον]; EpArist; apolog. exc. Mel.).—Superlative πλεῖστος, η, ον ‘most’ (Hom.+).① pert. to being a large number, many, a great number ofⓐ positive πολύς, πολλή, πολύα. adj., preceding or following a noun (or ptc. or adj. used as a noun) in the pl. many, numerous δυνάμεις πολλαί many mighty deeds Mt 7:22b. δαιμονιζόμενοι πολλοί 8:16. Cp. vs. 30; 9:10; 13:17; 24:11; 27:52, 55; Mk 2:15a; 6:13; 12:41; Lk 4:25, 27; 7:21b; 10:24; J 10:32; 14:2; Ac 1:3; 2:43; 8:7b; 14:22; Ro 4:17f (Gen 17:5); 8:29; 12:4; 1 Cor 8:5ab; 11:30; 12:12a, 20; 1 Ti 6:12; 2 Ti 2:2; Hb 2:10; 1J 4:1; 2J 7; Rv 5:11; 9:9; 10:11; 1 Cl 55:3ab. ἔτη πολλά many years: Lk 12:19b (εἰς ἔτη π.); Ac 24:10 (ἐκ π. ἐτῶν); Ro 15:23 (ἀπὸ π. [v.l. ἱκανῶν] ἐτῶν).—αἱ ἁμαρτίαι αἱ πολλαί Lk 7:47a. αἱ εὐεργεσίαι αἱ π. 1 Cl 21:1.—πολλὰ καὶ βαρέα αἰτιώματα many serious charges Ac 25:7 (cp. Ps.-Pla., Sisyph. 1, 387a πολλά τε καὶ καλὰ πράγματα; B-D-F §442, 11; Rob. 655). πολλὰ καὶ ἄλλα σημεῖα J 20:30 (on the form X., Hell. 5, 4, 1 πολλὰ μὲν οὖν … καὶ ἄλλα λέγειν καὶ Ἑλληνικὰ καὶ βαρβαρικά; Dionys. Hal. 2, 67, 5; Ps.-Demetr. 142 πολλὰς κ. ἄλλας χάριτας; Jos., Ant. 3, 318; Tat. 38, 1. On the subject-matter Bultmann 540, 3; also Porphyr., Vi. Pyth. 28 after a miracle-story: μυρία δʼ ἕτερα θαυμαστότερα κ. θειότερα περὶ τἀνδρὸς … εἴρηται κτλ.).—ἄλλοι πολλοί many others IRo 10:1. ἄλλαι πολλαί Mk 15:41. ἄλλα πολλά (Jos., Bell. 6, 169, Ant. 9, 242; Just., D. 8, 1) J 21:25. ἕτεροι πολλοί Ac 15:35. ἕτερα πολλά (Jos., Vi. 39) Lk 22:65.—Predicative: πολλοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐισερχόμενοι Mt 7:13.—Mk 5:9; 6:31; Gal 4:27 (Is 54:1). AcPl Ha 5, 16.—οὐ πολλοί not many=( only) a few οὐ πολλαὶ ἡμέραι (Jos., Ant. 5, 328, Vi. 309) Lk 15:13; J 2:12; Ac 1:5; AcPl Ha 11, 1. οὐ πολλοὶ σοφοί not many wise (people) 1 Cor 1:26a; cp. bc. οὐ πολλοί πατέρες not many fathers 4:15.β. subst.א. πολλοί many i.e. persons—without the art. Mt 7:22; 8:11; 12:15; 20:28; 24:5ab; 26:28; Mk 2:2; 3:10 (Mt 12:15 has ascensive πάντας; other passages to be compared in this connection are Mk 10:45=Mt 20:28 πολλῶν and 1 Ti 2:6 πάντων. Cp. the double tradition of the saying of Bias in Clem. of Alex., Strom. 1, 61, 3 πάντες ἄνθρωποι κακοὶ ἢ οἱ πλεῖστοι τ. ἀνθρώπων κακοί.—On Mk 10:45 s. OCullmann, TZ 4, ’48, 471–73); 6:2; 11:8; Lk 1:1 (cp. Herm. Wr. 11, 1, 1b and see JBauer, NovT 4, ’60, 263–66), 14; J 2:23; 8:30; Ac 9:42; Ro 16:2; 2 Cor 11:18; Gal 3:16 (πολλοί= a plurality); Tit 1:10; Hb 12:15; 2 Pt 2:2. AcPl Ha 5, 8; 7, 5; 11, 3. Opp. ὀλίγοι Mt 22:14; 20:16 v.l. (cp. Pla., Phd. 69c ναρθηκοφόροι μὲν πολλοί, βάκχοι δέ τε παῦροι=the thyrsus-bearers [officials] are many, but the truly inspired are few)—W. a partitive gen. πολλοὶ τῶν Φαρισαίων Mt 3:7. π. πῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραήλ Lk 1:16.—J 4:39; 12:11; Ac 4:4; 8:7a; 13:43; 18:8; 19:18; 2 Cor 12:21; Rv 8:11.—W. ἐκ and gen. (AscIs 3:1; Jos., Ant. 11, 151) πολλοὶ ἐκ τῶν μαθητῶν J 6:60, 66.—10:20; 11:19, 45; 12:42; Ac 17:12. ἐκ τοῦ ὄχλου πολλοί J 7:31 (Appian, Iber. 78 §337 πολλοὶ ἐκ τοῦ πλήθους).ב. πολλά—many things, much without the art.: γράφειν write at length B 4:9. διδάσκειν Mk 4:2; 6:34b. λαλεῖν Mt 13:3. μηχανᾶσθαι MPol 3. πάσχειν (Pind., O. 13, 63 al.; Jos., Ant. 13, 268; 403) Mt 16:21; Mk 5:26a; 9:12; Lk 9:22; 17:25; B 7:11; AcPl Ha 8, 19. ποιεῖν Mk 6:20 v.l. United w. another neut. by καί (Lucian, Icar. 20 πολλὰ κ. δεινά; Ael. Aristid. 46 p. 345 D.: πολλὰ κ. καλά; Ps.-Demetr., El. 70 πολλὰ κ. ἄλλα; likew. Appian, Bell. Civ. 5, 13 §53; Arrian, Anab. 6, 11, 2) πολλὰ κ. ἕτερα many other things Lk 3:18. πολλὰ ἂν κ. ἄλλα εἰπεῖν ἔχοιμι Dg 2:10 (Eur., Ep. 3, 2, πολλὰ κ. ἕτερα εἰπεῖν ἔχω; Diod S 17, 38, 3 πολλὰ δὲ καὶ ἄλλα … διαλεχθείς). ἐν πολλοῖς in many ways (Diod S 26, 1, 2; OGI 737, 7 [II B.C.]; Just., D. 124, 4 [of line of proof]) 2 Cor 8:22a. ἐπὶ πολλῶν (opp. ἐπὶ ὀλίγα) over many things Mt 25:21, 23.—W. art. (Pla., Apol. 1, 17a) τὰ πολλὰ πράσσειν transact a great deal of business Hs 4:5b.γ. elliptical δαρήσεται πολλά (sc. πληγάς) will receive many (lashes) Lk 12:47 (B-D-F §154; 241, 6).ⓑ comparative πλείων, πλεῖονα. adj. w. a plural (Diod S 14, 6, 1 μισθοφόρους πλείους=many mercenaries) πλείονας πόνους (opp. οὐχ ἕνα οὐδὲ δύο) 1 Cl 5:4. ἐπὶ ἡμέρας πλείους for a (large) number of days, for many days (Jos., Ant. 4, 277; cp. Theophr. in Apollon. Paradox. 29 πλείονας ἡμ.) Ac 13:31.—21:10 (Jos., Ant. 16, 15); 24:17; 25:14; 27:20. οἱ μὲν πλείονές εἰσιν γεγονότες ἱερεῖς the priests of former times existed in greater numbers Hb 7:23. ἑτέροις λόγοις πλείοσιν in many more words (than have been reported) Ac 2:40. ταῦτα καὶ ἕτερα πλείονα MPol 12:1.—W. a gen. of comparison (Just., A I 53, 3; Tat. 3, 2) ἄλλους δούλους πλείονας τῶν πρώτων other slaves, more than (he had sent) at first Mt 21:36. πλείονα σημεῖα ὧν more signs than those which J 7:31. Also w. ἤ: πλείονας μαθητὰς ἤ more disciples than 4:1. After πλείονες (-α) before numerals the word for ‘than’ is omitted (B-D-F §185, 4; Kühner-G. II 311; Rob. 666; Jos., Ant. 14, 96) ἐτῶν ἦν πλειόνων τεσσεράκοντα ὁ ἄνθρωπος the man was more than 40 years old Ac 4:22. πλείους τεσσεράκοντα 23:13, 21. Cp. 24:11; 25:6 (Jos., Ant. 6, 306 δέκα οὐ πλείους ἡμέρας).—The ref. is to relative extent (cp. 2bα) in τὰ ἔργα σου τὰ ἕσχατα πλείονα τῶν πρώτων your deeds, the latter of which are greater than the former Rv 2:19.β. subst.א. (οἱ) πλείονες, (οἱ) πλείους the majority, most (Diog. L. 1, 20; 22; Jos., Ant. 10, 114) Ac 19:32; 27:12. W. ἐξ: ἐξ ὧν οἱ πλείονες most of whom 1 Cor 15:6. W. gen. and a neg. (litotes) οὐκ ἐν τ. πλείοσιν αὐτῶν ηὐδόκησεν ὁ θεός God was pleased with only a few of them 10:5. This is perh. (s. ג below) the place for 1 Cor 9:19; 2 Cor 2:6; 9:2. Phil 1:14; MPol 5:1.ב. (οἱ) πλείονες, (οἱ) πλείους (even) more πλείονες in even greater numbers Ac 28:23. πολλῷ πλείους ἐπίστευσαν many more came to believe J 4:41.—διὰ τῶν πλειόνων to more and more people=those who are still to be won for Christ 2 Cor 4:15.ג. (οἱ) πλείονες, (οἱ) πλείους. In contrast to a minority οἱ πλείονες can gain the sense the others, the rest (so τὰ πλείονα Soph., Oed. Col. 36; τὸ πλέον Thu. 4, 30, 4; Jos., Ant. 12, 240; B-D-F §244, 3). So perh. (s. א above) ἵνα τ. πλείονας κερδήσω (opp. the apostle himself) 1 Cor 9:19; 2 Cor 2:6 (opp. the one who has been punished too severely.—In this case [s. א above] his punishment would have been determined by a unanimous vote of the Christian assembly rather than by a majority). Cp. 9:2; Phil 1:14; MPol 5:1.ד. πλείονα (for πλεῖον) more Mt 20:10 v.l.; various things Lk 11:53. ἐκ τοῦ ἑνὸς πλείονα 1 Cl 24:5 (s. as adv. ParJer 7:26).ⓒ superl. adj. πλείστη w. a plural most of αἱ πλεῖσται δυνάμεις Mt 11:20 (difft. B-D-F §245, 1).② pert. to being relatively large in quantity or measure, much, extensiveⓐ positive πολύς, πολλή, πολύα. adj. preceding or following a noun (or ptc. or adj. used as a noun)א. in the sg. much, large, great πολὺς ἀριθμός Ac 11:21. W. words that in themselves denote a plurality (Appian, Bell. Civ. 5, 80 §338 στρατὸς πολύς) πολὺς ὄχλος (s. ὄχ. 1a) Mt 14:14; 20:29; 26:47; Mk 5:21, 24; 6:34a; 8:1; 9:14; 12:37 (ὁ π. ὄχ.); Lk 5:29; 6:17a; 8:4; J 6:2, 5 (for the expression ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, in which π. follows the noun, J 12:9, 12, cp. Arrian, Anab. 1, 9, 6 ὁ φόνος πολύς); Ac 6:7; Rv 7:9; 19:1, 6. πολὺ πλῆθος (s. pl. 2bα) Mk 3:7f; Lk 5:6; 6:17b; 23:27; Ac 14:1; 17:4; 1 Cl 6:1. λαὸς πολύς many people Ac 18:10. Of money and its value, also used in imagery μισθὸς πολύς Mt 5:12; Lk 6:23, 35 (all three predicative, as Gen 15:1). ἐργασία π. Ac 16:16. π. κεφάλαιον 22:28. χρυσοῦ πολλοῦ … τρυφῆς πολλῆς AcPl Ha 2, 19.—Of things that occur in the mass or in large quantities (Diod S 3, 50, 1 πολλὴ ἄμπελος) γῆ πολλή Mt 13:5; Mk 4:5; θερισμὸς π. Mt 9:37; Lk 10:2 (both pred.). χόρτος π. J 6:10; καρπὸς π. (Cyranides p. 121, 11) 12:24; 15:5, 8.—λόγος π. a long speech (Diod S 13, 1, 2; Just., D. 123, 7) Ac 15:32; 20:2. περὶ οὗ πολὺς ἡμῖν ὁ λόγος about this we have much to say Hb 5:11 (cp. Pla., Phd. 115d).—Of time: πολὺς χρόνος a long time (Hom. et al.; Demetr.(?): 722 Fgm. 7; Jos., Ant. 8, 342; 19, 28; Just., A II, 2, 11) J 5:6 (s. ἔχω 7b); Hs 6, 4, 4 (pred.). μετὰ πολὺν χρόνον (Jos., Ant. 12, 324) Mt 25:19. Differently Mk 6:35ab (s. 3aα).ב. adj. w. a noun in the pl. many, large, great, extensive, plentiful ὄχλοι πολλοί great crowds or probably better many people (as Diod S 20, 59, 2; Ps.-Clem., Hom. 10, 3. For the corresponding mng. of ὄχλοι s. ὄχλος 1a) Mt 4:25; 8:1; 13:2; 15:30a; 19:2; Lk 5:15; 14:25. κτήματα πολλά a great deal of property Mt 19:22; Mk 10:22 (cp. Da 11:28 χρήματα π.). ὕδατα πολλά much water, many waters (Maximus Tyr. 21, 3g of the Nile ὁ πολὺς ποταμός, likew. Procop. Soph., Ep. 111) J 3:23; Rv 1:15; 14:2; 17:1; 19:6b. θυμιάματα πολλά a great deal of incense 8:3. τὰ πολλὰ γράμματα Ac 26:24. πολλοὶ χρόνοι long periods of time (Plut., Thes. 6, 9). πολλοῖς χρόνοις for long periods of time (SIG 836, 6; pap) Lk 8:29; 1 Cl 44:3. χρόνοις πολλοῖς AcPlCor 2:10. ἐκ πολλῶν χρόνων (Diod S 3, 47, 8; Jos., Ant. 14, 110; 17, 204) 1 Cl 42:5.β. subst.א. πολλοί many i.e. pers.—w. the art. οἱ πολλοί the many, of whatever appears in the context Mk 6:2 v.l. (the many people who were present in the synagogue); 9:26b (the whole crowd). Opp. ὁ εἷς Ro 5:15ac, 19ab; the many who form the ἓν σῶμα the one body 12:5; 1 Cor 10:17. Paul pays attention to the interests of the many rather than to his own vs. 33 (cp. Jos., Ant. 3, 212).—The majority, most (X., An. 5, 6, 19; Appian, Maced. 7, Bell. Civ. 4, 73 §309; 2 Macc 1:36; En 104:10; AscIs 3:26; Jos., Ant. 17, 72; Just., D. 4, 3) Mt 24:12; Hb 12:15 v.l. W. a connotation of disapproval most people, the crowd (Socrat., Ep. 6, 2; Dio Chrys. 15 [32], 8; Epict. 1, 3, 4; 2, 1, 22 al.; Plut., Mor. 33a; 470b; Plotinus, Enn. 2, 9, 9; Philo, Rer. Div. Her. 42) 2 Cor 2:17; Pol 2:1; 7:2.—Jeremias, The Eucharistic Words of Jesus3, tr. NPerrin, ’66, 179–82; 226–31, and TW VI 536–45: πολλοί.ב. πολύ much ᾧ ἐδόθη πολύ, πολὺ ζητηθήσεται παρʼ αὐτοῦ, καὶ ᾧ παρέθεντο πολὺ κτλ. Lk 12:48 (Just., A I, 17, 4 twice πλέον). Cp. 16:10ab; 2 Cl 8:5; καρποφορεῖν π. bear much fruit Hs 2:3. πολὺ κατὰ πάντα τρόπον much in every way Ro 3:2 (Ael. Aristid. 34, 43 K.=50 p. 562 D. gives answer to a sim. quest. asked by himself: πολλὰ καὶ παντοῖα).—Js 5:16.—As gen. of price πολλοῦ for a large sum of money (Menand., Fgm. 197 Kö.; PRyl 244, 10. S. στρουθίον.) Mt 26:9.—Of time: ἐπὶ πολύ ( for) a long time (JosAs 19:3; Ar. 65, 3; s. also ἐπί 18cβ) Ac 28:6; AcPl Ha 10, 21. μετʼ οὐ πολύ soon afterward Ac 27:14 (μετά B 2c).—ἐπὶ πολύ more than once, often (Is 55:7) Hm 4, 1, 8.—Before a comp. (as Hom. et al.; B-D-F §246; Rob. 664) in the acc. πολὺ βέλτιον much better Hs 1:9. π. ἐλάττων v 3, 7, 6 (Ar. 6, 2). π. μᾶλλον much more, to a much greater degree (Dio Chrys. 2, 10; 17; 64 al.; Ael. Aristid. 34, 9 K.=50 p. 549 D.; Just., A II, 8, 3; D. 95, 1 al.) Hb 12:9, 25 (by means of a negative it acquires the mng. much less; cp. Diod S 7, 14, 6 πολὺ μᾶλλον μὴ … =even much less); Dg 2:7b. π. πλέον 2:7a (Ar. 11, 7). π. σπουδαιότερος 2 Cor 8:22b. Cp. π. τιμώτερον 1 Pt 1:7 v.l.; in the dat. of degree of difference πολλῷ μᾶλλον (Thu. 2, 51, 4; UPZ 42, 48 [162 B.C.]; EpArist 7; 24 al.; Sir prol. ln. 14; Jos., Ant. 18, 184; Just., A I, 68, 9; Tat. 17, 4) Mt 6:30; Mk 10:48b; Lk 18:39; Ro 5:9f, 15b, 17; 1 Cor 12:22; 2 Cor 3:9, 11; Phil 2:12. πολλῷ μᾶλλον κρείσσον 1:23 (v.l. without μᾶλλον). πολλῷ πλείους J 4:41. πολλῷ στρουθίων as v.l. Mt 20:31 and Lk 12:7 (both N.25 app.; on the strong ms. support for this rdg. s. RBorger, TRu 52, ’87, 21–24).—W. the art. τὸ πολύ (opp. τὸ ὀλίγον as X., An. 7, 7, 36) 2 Cor 8:15 (cp. Ex 16:18).ג. πολύς (Diod S 14, 107, 4 πολὺς ἦν ἐπὶ τῇ τιμωρίᾳ=he was strongly inclined toward punishing) μὴ πολὺς ἐν ῥήμασιν γίνου do not be profuse in speech, do not gossip 1 Cl 30:5 (Job 11:3).—Παπίας ὁ πολύς Papias (7), prob. to be understood as ὁ πάνυ; s. πάνυ d.ⓑ comp. πλείων, πλεῖον; adv. πλειόνωςα. adj., w. a singular (TestJob 35:2 διὰ πλείονος εὐωδίας) καρπὸν πλείονα more fruit J 15:2, 8 P66; Hs 5, 2, 4. τὸ πλεῖον μέρος τοῦ ὄχλου the greater part of the throng 8, 1, 16. ἐπὶ πλείονα χρόνον for a longer time (PTebt 6:31 [II B.C.]) Ac 18:20. Foll. by gen. of comparison: πλείονα τιμήν more honor Hb 3:3b.—IPol 1:3a. Foll. by παρά τινα for comparison Hb 3:3a; 11:4; Hs 9, 18, 2. ὅσῳ πλείονος κατηξιώθημεν γνώσεως, τοσούτῳ μᾶλλον 1 Cl 41:4.—τὸ πλεῖον μέρος as adv. acc. for the greater part Hv 3, 6, 4a.β. as subst. πλεῖον, πλέον more τὸ πλεῖον the greater sum (cp. Diod S 1, 82, 2=the greater part; Ps 89:10) Lk 7:43. πλεῖον λαμβάνειν receive a larger sum Mt 20:10. W. partitive gen. ἐπὶ πλεῖον προκόψουσιν ἀσεβείας they will arrive at an ever greater measure of impiety=become more and more deeply involved in impiety 2 Ti 2:16. W. a gen. of comparison πλεῖον τῆς τροφῆς someth. greater (more important) than food Mt 6:25; Lk 12:23. πλεῖον Ἰωνᾶ Mt 12:41; cp. vs. 42; Lk 11:31, 32. ἡ χήρα πλεῖον πάντων ἔβαλεν the widow put in more than all the rest Mk 12:43; Lk 21:3. μηδὲν πλέον nothing more (Jos., Bell. 1, 43; cp. Just., D. 2, 3 οὐδὲν πλέον); the words than, except following are expressed by παρά and the acc. Lk 3:13 or by πλήν w. gen. Ac 15:28, w. εἰ μή Hs 1:6.—The acc. is used as an adv. more, in greater measure, to a greater degree (Herm. Wr. 13, 21 Nock after the mss.) Lk 7:42; IRo 1:1; IEph 6:2; w. a gen. of comparison Mt 5:20 (περισσεύω 1aβ); J 21:15; IPol 5:2 (s. Ad’Alès, RSR 25, ’35, 489–92). τριετίαν ἢ καὶ πλεῖον for three years or even more Ac 20:18 D (cp. TestAbr B 7 p. 111, 27 [Stone p. 70, 27]).—ἐπὶ πλεῖον any farther (of place) Ac 4:17 (TestGad 7:2; Ath. 12 [ἐπί 4bβ]); (of time) at length Ac 20:9 (ἐπί 18cβ) or any longer, too long 24:4; 1 Cl 55:1 (ἐπί 18cβ); any more, even more (ἐπί 13) 2 Ti 3:9; 1 Cl 18:3 (Ps 50:4). Strengthened πολὺ πλέον much more, much rather (4 Macc 1:8; cp. X., An. 7, 5, 15; BGU 180, 12f [172 A.D.] πολλῷ πλεῖον; Ar. 11, 7 πολλῷ πλεῖον) Dg 2:7; 4:5.—Also w. indications of number (s. 1bα) πλεῖον ἢ ἄρτοι πέντε Lk 9:13 (the words πλ. ἤ outside the constr. as X., An. 1, 2, 11). In πλείω δώδεκα λεγιῶνας ἀγγέλων more than twelve legions of angels Mt 26:53 the text is uncertain (B-D-F §185, 4; s. Rob. 666).—The adv. can also be expressed by πλειόνως (Aeneas Tact. 237; Jos., Ant. 17, 2; Leontios 24, p. 52, 10) more ὅσον … πλειόνως the more … the more IEph 6:1.ⓒ superl. πλεῖστος, ονα. adj.א. superlative proper τὸ πλεῖστον μέρος the greatest part w. partitive gen. Hs 8, 2, 9; 9, 7, 4. As adv. acc. for the greatest part 8, 5, 6; 8, 10, 1 (s. μέρος 1d).ב. elative (s. Mayser II/1, 1926, 53) very great, very large (ὁ) πλεῖστος ὄχλος Mt 21:8 (ὁ πλεῖστος ὄχλος could also be the greatest part of the crowd, as Thu. 7, 78, 2; Pla., Rep. 3, 397d); Mk 4:1.β. subst. οἱ πλεῖστοι the majority, most Ac 19:32 D (Just., D. 1, 4; cp. D. 48, 4 πλεῖστοι).③ pert. to being high on a scale of extentⓐ positive πολύς, πολλή, πολύα. as simple adj., to denote degree much, great, strong, severe, hard, deep, profound (Diod S 13, 7, 4 πολὺς φόβος; schol. on Apollon. Rhod. 4, 57; 58 p. 265, 3 πολλὴ δικαιοσύνη; Eccl 5:16 θυμὸς π.; Sir 15:18 σοφία; TestAbr A 20 p. 103, 4 [Stone p. 54] ἀθυμία; Just., D. 3, 1 ἠρεμία) ἀγάπη Eph 2:4. ἀγών 1 Th 2:2. ἄθλησις Hb 10:32. ἁπλότης Hv 3, 9, 1. ἀσιτία Ac 27:21. βία 24:6 [7] v.l. γογγυσμός J 7:12. διακονία Lk 10:40. δοκιμή 2 Cor 8:2. δόξα Mt 24:30; Hv 1, 3, 4; 2, 2, 6. δύναμις Mk 13:26. ἐγκράτεια strict self-control Hv 2, 3, 2. εἰρήνη complete or undisturbed peace (Diod S 3, 64, 7; 11, 38, 1) Ac 24:2. ἔλεος 1 Pt 1:3. ἐπιθυμία 1 Th 2:17. ζημία Ac 27:10. ζήτησις 15:7. θλῖψις 2 Cor 2:4a; 1 Th 1:6. καύχησις 2 Cor 7:4b (pred.). μακροθυμία Ro 9:22. ὀδυρμός Mt 2:18. παράκλησις 2 Cor 8:4. παρρησία (Wsd 5:1) 3:12; 7:4a (pred.); 1 Ti 3:13; Phlm 8. πεποίθησις 2 Cor 8:22c. πλάνη 2 Cl 1:7. πληροφορία 1 Th 1:5. πόνος Col 4:13. σιγή a great or general hush (X., Cyr. 7, 1, 25; Arrian, Anab. 5, 28, 4) Ac 21:40. στάσις 23:10. τρόμος 1 Cor 2:3. φαντασία Ac 25:23. χαρά 8:8; Phlm 7. ὥρα πολλή late hour (Polyb. 5, 8, 3; Dionys. Hal. 2, 54; Jos., Ant. 8, 118) Mk 6:35ab.β. subst. πολλά in the acc. used as adv. greatly, earnestly, strictly, loudly, often etc. (X., Cyr. 1, 5, 14; Diod S 13, 41, 5; Lucian, Dial. Deor. 19, 2; Aelian, VH 1, 23; 4 Km 10:18; Is 23:16; TestSol 1:1; GrBar; ApcMos; Jos., Ant. 14, 348) ἀλαλάζειν πολλά Mk 5:38 (s. ἀλαλάζω). πολλὰ ἁμαρτάνειν Hs 4:5c (ApcMos 32). π. ἀνακρίνειν Ac 28:18 v.l. π. ἀπορεῖν Mk 6:20 (Field, Notes 29). π. ἀσπάζεσθαι 1 Cor 16:19 (s. ἀσπάζομαι 1a). δεηθῆναι π. (GrBar 4:14; Jos., Vi. 173; 343) Hs 5, 4, 1. διαστέλλεσθαι Mk 5:43 (s. διαστέλλω). π. ἐπιτιμᾶν 3:12. π. ἐρωτᾶν earnestly pray Hv 2, 2, 1. κατηγορεῖν π. Mk 15:3 (s. κατηγορέω 1a). κηρύσσειν π. talk freely 1:45. κλαίειν bitterly Ac 8:24 D (ApcMos 39). κοπιᾶν (ApcMos 24; CIG IV 9552, 5 … μοι πολλὰ ἐκοπίασεν, cp. Dssm., LO 266, 5 [LAE 317]) work hard Ro 16:6, 12; 2 Cl 7:1b. νηστεύειν π. fast often Mt 9:14a. ὀμνύναι π. Mk 6:23. παρακαλεῖν Mk 5:10, 23; Ac 20:1 D; 1 Cor 16:12. π. πταίειν make many mistakes Js 3:2. π. σπαράσσειν convulse violently Mk 9:26a.—W. the art. ἐνεκοπτόμην τὰ πολλά I have been hindered these many times (cp. Ro 1:13 πολλάκις) Ro 15:22 (v.l. πολλάκις here too).γ. subst. πολύ in the acc. used as adv. greatly, very much, strongly (Da 6:15, 24 Theod.) ἀγαπᾶν πολύ show much affection, love greatly Lk 7:47b. κλαίειν π. weep loudly Rv 5:4.—Mk 12:27; Ac 18:27.ⓑ superlative, the neut. acc. πλεῖστον, α as adv. (sing. Hom. et al.; pl. Pind. et al.)α. pl. πλεῖστα in the formula of greeting at the beginning of a letter πλεῖστα χαίρειν (POxy 742; 744; 1061 [all three I B.C.]; PTebt 314, 2 [II A.D.] and very oft. in pap.—Griech. pap ed. Ltzm.: Kl. Texte 142, 1910, p. 4, 5, 6, 7 al.; Preis. II s.v. πλεῖστος) heartiest greeting(s) IEph ins; IMg ins; ITr ins; IRo ins; ISm ins; IPol ins.β. sing. τὸ πλεῖστον at the most (Aristoph., Vesp. 260; Diod S 14, 71, 3 πεμπταῖοι ἢ τὸ πλ. ἑκταῖοι; POxy 58, 17; PGiss 65:9) κατὰ δύο ἢ τὸ πλ. τρεῖς (word for word like Περὶ ὕψους 32, 1) 1 Cor 14:27.—B. 922f. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. -
11 γίνομαι
γίνομαι (in the form γίγνομαι [s. below] Hom.+; as γίν. since Aristot.+; and s. Kühner-Bl. II p. 391; Schwyzer I 215; KBrugmann4-AThumb, Griech. Gramm. 1913, 126; Mayser p. 165 and lit. there). Impf. ἐγινόμην; fut. γενήσομαι; 2 aor. ἐγενόμην, 3 sg. opt. γένοιτο; very rare v.l. (B-D-F §81, 3) γενάμενος (GJs 6:1; 16;1; 25:1 [s. deStrycker 249]; also found in Ps.-Callisth. 1, 20, 1; 1, 41, 11; ApcEsdr 1:3 p. 24, 7 Tdf.; Mel., P. 49, 346 [Bodm.]). Pass.: fut. ptc. τῶν γενηθησομένων (Eccl 1:11 v.l.); 1 aor. ἐγενήθην (Doric, H. Gk.; Phryn. 108 Lob.; pap fr. III B.C., Mayser I/22 ’38, 157f [w. lit.]; ins [Schweizer 181; Nachmanson 168; Thieme 13]; LXX), impv. γενηθήτω; pf. γεγένημαι (Meisterhans3-Schw.: Att. ins since 376 B.C.; Mayser 391) uncontested use in NT only J 2:9; GJs 24:3 (γεγένν-pap); apolog. On pf. γέγονα s. Meisterhans3-Schw.: since 464 B.C.; Mayser 372; on the aoristic use of γέγονα s. Mlt. 145f; 238; 239; PChantraine, Histoire du parfait grec 1927, 233–45; 3 pl. γέγοναν Ro 16:7 (v.l. γεγόνασιν) and Rv 21:6; s. KBuresch, Γέγοναν: RhM 46, 1891, 193ff; Mlt. 52 n.; ptc. γεγονώς; plpf. 3 sg. ἐγεγόνει (1 Macc. 4:27; 2 Macc. 13:17; J 6:17; Just.), without augment γεγόνει (Ac 4:22; v.l. ἐγεγόνει), s. B-D-F §78; Mlt-H. 190. On the variation γίνομαι and γίγνομαι s. W-S. §5, 31; B-D-F §34, 4; Mlt-H. 108. A verb with numerous nuances relating to being and manner of being. Its contrast to the more static term εἰμί can be seen in Kaibel 595, 5 οὐκ ἤμην καὶ ἐγενόμην=I was not and then I came to be (cp. Ath. 4, 2 in 3 below).① to come into being through process of birth or natural production, be born, be produced (SIG 1168, 6; Epict. 2, 17, 8; Wsd 7:3; Sir 44:9; Just., A I, 13, 3; Tat. 26, 2) J 8:58; w. ἔκ τινος foll. (Diod S 3, 64, 1; Appian, Basil. 5 §1; Parthenius 1, 4; Athen. 13, 37 p. 576c ἐξ ἑταίρας; PPetr III, 2, 20; PFlor 382, 38 ὁ ἐξ ἐμοῦ γενόμενος υἱός; 1 Esdr 4:16; Tob 8:6; Jos., Ant. 2, 216) Ro 1:3; Gal 4:4 (cp. 1QS 11:21). Also of plants 1 Cor 15:37. Of fruits ἔκ τινος be produced by a tree Mt 21:19 (cp. X., Mem. 3, 6, 13 ὁ ἐκ τ. χώρας γιγνόμενος σῖτος). W. ἀπό τινος foll. Ox 1081 (SJCh), 11 γε̣[ινόμε]νον, 14 γέγ[ονος], 14f γε[ι]νομεν[ον], 19 γέγονος.② to come into existence, be made, be created, be manufactured, be performedⓐ gener. ὸ̔ γέγονεν J 1:3c (s. ref. to Vawter, below); w. διά τινος vs. 3a (MTeschendorf, D. Schöpfungsged. im NT: StKr 104, ’32, 337–72). W. χωρίς τινος vs. 3b (IAndrosIsis, Cyrene 15 [103 A.D.] Ἐμοῦ δὲ χωρὶς γείνετʼ οὐδὲν πώποτε; Cleanthes, Hymn to Zeus 15 [Stoic. I 537=Coll. Alex. no. 1 p. 227] οὐδέ τι γίγνεται ἔργον σοῦ δίχα; note the related style 1QH 1:20; on the syntax of J 1:3f see BVawter, CBQ 25, ’63, 401–6, who favors a full stop after οὐδὲ ἕν, s. εἷς 2b and lit. cited there on J 1:3). W. ἔκ τινος Hb 11:3. Of cult images διὰ χειρῶν γινόμενοι made w. hands Ac 19:26 (cp. PRyl 231, 3 [40 A.D.] τοὺς ἄρτους γενέσθαι). Of miracles: be done, take place (Tob 11:15; Wsd 19:13 v.l. Swete) Mt 11:20f, 23; Lk 10:13; Ac 8:13. ἐφʼ ὸ̔ν γεγόνει τὸ σημεῖον τοῦτο on whom this miracle had been performed 4:22. W. mention of the author διά τινος (cp. 4 Macc 17:11) 2:43; 4:16, 30; 12:9; 24:2. διὰ τῶν χειρῶν τινος Mk 6:2; Ac 14:3. ὑπό τινος (Herodian 8, 4, 2; OGI 168, 46 [115 B.C.] τὰ γεγονότα ὑπὸ τοῦ πατρὸς φιλάνθρωπα; UPZ III, 3, 7 [116 B.C.]; PTebt 786, 14 [II B.C.]; Wsd 9:2; Jos., Ant. 8, 111; 347; Just., D. 35, 8 τῶν ἀπὸ τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ [Jesus] καὶ νῦν γινομένων δυνάμεων) Lk 9:7 v.l.; 13:17; 23:8; Eph 5:12. Of commands, instructions be fulfilled, performed γενηθήτω τὸ θέλημά σου thy will be done (Appian, Liby. 90 §423 τὸ πρόσταγμα δεῖ γενέσθαι; Syntipas p. 25, 3 γενέσθω τὸ αἴτημα) Mt 6:10; 26:42; Lk 11:2; cp. 22:42. γέγονεν ὸ̔ ἐπέταξας your order has been carried out 14:22. γενέσθαι τὸ αἴτημα αὐτῶν that their demand should be granted 23:24. Of institutions: be established, the Sabbath for the sake of humans Mk 2:27 (Crates, Ep. 24 οὐ γεγόνασιν οἱ ἄνθρωποι τ. ἵππων χάριν, ἀλλʼ οἱ ἵπποι τ. ἀνθρώπων).ⓑ w. mention of the special nature of an undertaking: ἵνα οὕτως γένηται ἐν ἐμοί in order to have such action taken in my case 1 Cor 9:15. ἐν τῷ ξηρῷ τί γένηται; what will be done when it (the wood) is dry? Lk 23:31.③ come into being as an event or phenomenon from a point of origin, arise, come about, develop (Alcaeus 23 Diehl2 [320 L-P.] καί κʼ οὐδὲν ἐκ δένος γένοιτο=nothing could originate from nothing; Ath. 4:2 τὸ ὸ̓ν οὐ γίνεται ἀλλὰ τὸ μὴ ὸ̓ν)ⓐ of events or phenomena in nature (Sir 40:10; Ex 10:22; Job 40:23; Jos., Ant. 9, 36): lightning, thunder (X., An. 3, 1, 11) J 12:29; Rv 8:5; 11:19; calm (on the sea) Mt 8:26; Mk 4:39; Lk 8:24; storm Mk 4:37; a cloud (cp. Jos., Ant. 9, 36) 9:7; Lk 9:34; Hv 4, 3, 7; flood Lk 6:48; earthquake (Parian Marbles [III B.C.]=FGrH: 239B, 24) Mt 8:24; 28:2; Ac 16:26; Rv 6:12; 11:13; 16:18; darkness Mt 27:45; Mk 15:33; Lk 23:44; J 6:17; hail, fire Rv 8:7. Of a dawning day ὅτε δὲ ἡμέρα ἐγένετο (cp. περὶ ἀρχομένην ἡμέραν ‘about dawn’ Jos., Vi 15: in a related story of shipwreck) Ac 27:39.ⓑ of other occurrences (Arrian, Anab. 4, 4, 3 τὰ ἱερὰ οὐκ ἐγίγνετο=the sacrifice did not turn out [favorably]; 1 Macc 1:25; 4:58; 9:27; 13:44; Jdth 7:29; 14:19 al.): complaining Ac 6:1; persecution, oppression Mt 13:21; 24:21; Mk 4:17; 13:19; Ac 11:19; discussion J 3:25; Ac 15:7; tumult Mt 26:5; 27:24; GJs 21:1 and 25:1; a sound Ac 2:2, 6; weeping 20:37; clamor 23:9; Mt 25:6; AcPl Ha 4, 6; famine Lk 4:25; 15:14; Ac 11:28; ὁρμή (q.v.) 14:5; war Rv 12:7; sharp contention Ac 15:39; tear (in a garment) Mt 9:16; Mk 2:21; Lk 6:49; silence (s. σιγή) Ac 21:40; Rv 8:1; στάσις (q.v. 2) Lk 23:19; Ac 15:2; 23:7, 10; concourse 21:30; confusion 19:23; shout, loud voice 2:6; 19:34; Rv 11:15; dispute Lk 22:24; envy, strife 1 Ti 6:4; astonishment AcPl Ha 4, 25; joy 6, 3; prayer 6, 7; offering 6, 37.ⓒ of the various divisions of a day (Jdth 13:1; 1 Macc 5:30; 4 Macc 3:8 al.) γενομένης ἡμέρας when day came (Jos., Ant. 10, 202, Vi. 405) Lk 4:42; Ac 12:18; 16:35; 23:12; cp. Lk 6:13; 22:66; Ac 27:29, 33, 39. Difft. Mk 6:21 γενομένης ἡμέρας εὐκαίρου when a convenient/opportune day arrived. ὀψέ (cp. Gen 29:25; 1 Km 25:37) 11:19. ὀψίας γενομένης Mt 8:16; 14:15, 23; 16:2; 26:20; 27:57; Mk 1:32; 6:47; 14:17; 15:42; cp. J 6:16. πρωί̈ας Mt 27:1; J 21:4. νύξ Ac 27:27. ὥρας πολλῆς γενομένης when it had grown late Mk 6:35; cp. 15:33; Lk 22:14; Ac 26:4.④ to occur as process or result, happen, turn out, take place (Dicaearch., Fgm. 102 W.: a campaign ‘takes place’; Diod S 32 Fgm. 9c τὰς εἰς τ. πατέρα γεγενημένας ἁμαρτίας=the misdeeds ‘perpetrated’ against his father; 2 Macc 1:32; 13:17; 3 Macc 1:11; 4:12; 5:17 al.)ⓐ gener. τοῦτο ὅλον γέγονεν all this took place w. ἵνα foll. Mt 1:22; 26:56. ἕως ἂν πάντα γένηται until all has taken place (=is past) 5:18. πάντα τὰ γενόμενα everything that had happened (cp. Appian, Bell. Civ. 2, 121 §508 τὰ γενόμενα; 1 Esdr 1:10; Jdth 15:1; 1 Macc 4:20; 2 Macc 10:21; 3 Macc 1:17) 18:31; cp. 21:21; 24:6, 20, 34; 26:54; 27:54; 28:11; Mk 5:14. ἴδωμεν τὸ ῥῆμα τοῦτο τὸ γεγονός let us see this thing that has taken place Lk 2:15 (TestAbr A 15 p. 96, 15 [Stone p. 40]) θανάτου γενομένου since a death has occurred, i.e. since he has died Hb 9:15. τούτου γενομένου after this had happened (Jos., Ant. 9, 56; 129) Ac 28:9. τὸ γεγονός what had happened (Diod S 12, 49, 4; Appian, Bell. Civ. 2, 18 §496; Jos., Ant. 14, 292) Lk 8:34; 24:12. τὰ γεγονότα AcPl Ha 11, 1.—μὴ γένοιτο strong negation, in Paul only after rhet. questions (cp. TestJob 38:1; JosAs 25:8; Epict., index p. 540e; Lucian, Dial. Deor. 1, 2, Dial. Meretr. 13, 4; Achilles Tat. 5, 18, 4; Aristaen., Ep. 1, 27) by no means, far from it, God forbid (Goodsp., Probs., 88; AMalherbe, HTR 73, ’80, 231–41) Lk 20:16; Ro 3:4, 6, 31; 6:2, 15; 7:7, 13; 9:14; 11:1, 11; 1 Cor 6:15; Gal 2:17; 3:21. In more extensive phrasing (the LXX has exx. only of this usage: Gen 44:17; 3 Km 20:3 al.; cp. Josh 22:29; Demosth. 10, 27; Alciphron 2, 5, 3 al.; Ael. Aristid. 23, 80 K.=42 p. 795 D.; 30 p. 578 D.; 54 p. 679 ὸ̔ μὴ γένοιτο) Gal 6:14; w. ἵνα foll. AcPl Ha 7, 40. τί γέγονεν ὅτι (cp. Eccl 7:10) why is it that J 14:22.—Of festivals: be held, take place, come (X., Hell. 7, 4, 28 τὰ Ὀλύμπια; 4, 5, 1; 4 Km 23:22f; 2 Macc 6:7) feast of dedication J 10:22; passover Mt 26:2; sabbath Mk 6:2; wedding J 2:1.—Abs. impv. (put twice for emphasis as Lucian, Pisc. 1 βάλλε, βάλλε; Philostrat., Ep. 35, 1 λάβε λάβε; Procop. Soph., Ep. 45) γενηθήτω γενηθήτω so let it be as a closing formula 1 Cor 16:24 v.l. (cp. Herodas 4, 85, where the sacristan closes his prayer to Asclepius with the words: ὧδε ταῦτʼ εἴη=so may it be).—On γένοιτο ἀμήν GJs 6:2 s. ἀμήν 1a.ⓑ w. dat. of pers. affectedα. w. inf. foll. (UPZ 24, 29 al.; 1 Macc 13:5; Jos., Ant. 6, 232) ὅπως μὴ γένηται αὐτῷ χρονοτριβῆσαι so that he would not have to lose time Ac 20:16.β. w. adv. or adv. phrase added (1 Esdr 6:33) κατὰ τὴν πίστιν ὑμῶν γενηθήτω ὑμῖν according to your faith let it be done to you, i.e. you believe, and you won’t be disappointed Mt 9:29; cp. 8:13. γένοιτό μοι κατὰ τὸ ῥῆμά σου may that happen to me as you have said Lk 1:38. πῶς ἐγένετο τῷ δαιμονιζομένῳ what had happened to the possessed man Mk 5:16. ἵνα εὖ σοι γένηται that it may be well w. you Eph 6:3 (Dt 5:16; cp. Epict. 2, 5, 29 εὖ σοι γένοιτο; Aelian, VH 9, 36). γενηθήτω σοι ὡς θέλεις let it be done for you as you desire, i.e. your wish is granted Mt 15:28.γ. w. nom. of thing (1 Macc 4:25; Sir 51:17; Ar. 15:5) γίνεταί τινί τι someth. happens to or befalls a person Mk 9:21. ἵνα μὴ χεῖρόν σοί τι γένηται lest someth. worse come upon you J 5:14. τί ἐγένετο αὐτῷ what has happened to him Ac 7:40 (Ex 32:1, 23; AcPl Ha 5, 20). τὸ γεγενημένον αὐτῷ Ac 3:10 D. ἐγίνετο πάσῃ ψυχῄ φόβος fear came upon everyone (cp. Tob 11:18) 2:43. λύπη AcPl Ha 6, 16. Freq. γέγονε ἐμοί τι someth. has come to me= I have someth.: πώρωσις τῷ Ἰσραὴλ γέγονεν a hardening (of heart) has befallen Israel Ro 11:25; σωτηρία τῷ Ἰσραὴλ γεγένηται GJs 19:2; cp. Lk 19:9; διὰ τὴν ὀπτασίαν τὴν γενομένην Παύλῳ AcPl Ha 3, 15; ἐὰν γένηταί τινι ἀνθρώπῳ ἑκατὸν πρόβατα if a man has a hundred sheep Mt 18:12. τοῖς ἔξω ἐν παραβολαῖς τὰ πάντα γίνεται those outside receive everything in parables Mk 4:11. μήποτε γένηται ἀνταπόδομά σοι that you may receive no repayment Lk 14:12; cp. 19:9; J 15:7; 1 Cor 4:5.ⓒ w. gen. of pers. (Diod S 16, 64, 2 τὸν τῆς Ἑλένης γεγενημένον ὅρμον=the necklace that had belonged to Helen): ἐγένετο ἡ βασιλεία τοῦ κόσμου τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν the kingdom of the world has come into the possession of our Lord Rv 11:15.ⓓ γίνεταί τι ἐπί τινι someth. happens in the case of or to a person Mk 5:33 v.l.; ἐν v.l. This can also be expressed w. εἴς τινα Ac 28:6 or the double nom. τί ἄρα ὁ Πέτρος ἐγένετο what had become of Peter 12:18 (cp. Jos., Vi. 296 οἱ εἴκοσι χρυσοῖ τὶ γεγόνασιν).ⓔ w. inf. foll., to emphasize the actual occurrence of the action denoted by the verb: ἐὰν γένηται εὑρεῖν αὐτό if it comes about that he finds it= if he actually finds it Mt 18:13 (s. PCatt V, 19f [=Mitt-Wilck. II/2, 372 V] ἐὰν γένηταί με ἀποδημεῖν; PAmh 135, 10; BGU 970, 5). ἐγένετο αὐτὸν παραπορεύεσθαι he happened to be passing Mk 2:23; cp. Lk 6:1, 6. ἐγένετο ἀνεῳχθῆναι τὸν οὐρανόν just then the heaven opened Lk 3:21; cp. 16:22 (ἐν τῷ ἀποθανεῖν P75); Ac 4:5; 9:3, 32, 37, 43; 11:26; 14:1; 16:16; 19:1; 21:1, 5; 22:6, 17; 27:44; 28:8 (UPZ 62, 29 [161 B.C.] γίνεται γὰρ ἐντραπῆναι).ⓕ καὶ ἐγένετο (ἐγένετο δέ) periphrastic like וַיְהִי with וַ foll. to indicate the progress of the narrative; it is followed either by a conjunction like ὅτε, ὡς etc., or a gen. abs., or a prepositional constr., and joined to it is a finite verb w. καί (Jdth 5:22; 10:1; Sus 19 Theod.; 1 Macc 1:1; 5:1; Gen 39:7, 13, 19; 42:35; JosAs 11:1; 22:1; AscIs 3:2) Mt 9:10; Mk 2:15 v.l.; Lk 2:15; 5:1, 12, 17; 8:1, 22; 14:1.—Without the second καί (Jdth 2:4; 12:10; 13:12; 1 Macc 6:8; 7:2 v.l.; 9:23; Sus 28 Theod.; Bel 18 Theod.; TestAbr B 1 p. 105, 1 [Stone p. 58] and 6 p. 109, 27 [Stone p. 66]; TestJob 31:1; JosAs 1:1; 3:1) Mt 7:28; 11:1; 13:53; 19:1; 26:1; Mk 1:9; 4:4; Lk 1:8, 23, 41, 59; 2:1, 6, 46; 6:12 al. At times it is followed by an inf. The phrase is usually omitted in translation; older versions transl. it came to pass.—Mlt. 16f; MJohannessohn, Das bibl. καὶ ἐγένετο u. s. Geschichte: ZVS 53, 1926, 161–212 (LXX); s. MDibelius, Gnomon 3, 1927, 446–50; HPernot, Études sur la langue des Évangiles 1927, 189–99; KBeyer, Semitische Syntax im NT, ’62, 29–62; JReiling, BT 16, ’65, 153–63; EDelebecque, Études grecques sur l’Évangile de Luc ’76, 123–65.⑤ to experience a change in nature and so indicate entry into a new condition, become someth.ⓐ w. nouns (Lamellae Aur. Orphicae ed. AOlivieri 1915, p. 16, 5 θεὸς ἐγένου ἐξ ἀνθρώπου [IV/III]; Arrian, Anab. 5, 26, 5; Sir 51:2; 1 Esdr 4:26; Wsd 8:2; 4 Macc 16:6; En 103:11; Tat. 19, 2 τοῦ θανάτου καταφρονηταὶ γίνεσθε): ὅπως γένησθε υἱοὶ τοῦ πατρὸς ὑμῶν that you may become sons of your father Mt 5:45; ποιήσω ὑμᾶς γενέσθαι ἁλιεῖς ἀνθρώπων I will turn you into fishers of people Mk 1:17; a traitor Lk 6:16; friends 23:12 (cp. Jos., Ant. 11, 121); children of God J 1:12; children of light 12:36; a Christian Ac 26:29; apostle AcPlCor 2:4; a father Ro 4:18; a fool 1 Cor 3:18; a spectacle 4:9; a man, an adult 13:11 (Tob 1:9); a curse Gal 3:13. οὐχ ἑαυτὸν ἐδόξασεν γενηθῆναι ἀρχιερέα he did not exalt himself to be made high priest Hb 5:5; ἐγένετο ἀντὶ αὐτοῦ Σαμουήλ Samuel became (high priest) in his place GJs 10:2. W. double nom. (Ps.-Apollod., Epit. 3, 15 δράκων λίθος ἐγένετο; Quint. Smyrn. 12, 507; Bel 28; 4 Macc 18:7) οἱ λίθοι ἄρτοι γίνονται the stones turn into loaves Mt 4:3. τὸ αἵμα αὐτοῦ λίθον γεγενημένον GJs 24:3. ὁ λόγος σὰρξ ἐγένετο J 1:14 (the reverse PBerl 13044, col. III, 28ff [UWilcken, SBBerlAk 1923, 161f] τί ποιῶν ἄν τις γένοιτο θεός;). τὸ ὕδωρ γενήσεται πηγή 4:14. ἡ περιτομὴ ἀκροβυστία γέγονεν Ro 2:25. ἐγενόμην ἐγὼ διάκονος I became a courier Col 1:23 (cp. Herodian 2, 6, 8 ἀνὴρ ἔπαρχος γενόμενος).—Also γ. εἴς τι (Menand., Peric. 49f Kö. [169f S.] τὸ κακὸν εἰς ἀγαθὸν ῥέπει γινόμενον; 1 Km 4:9; Jdth 5:18; 1 Macc 2:11, 43; 3:58; En 19:2 al.; B-D-F §145, 1): ἐγένετο εἰς δένδρον it became a tree Lk 13:19; εἰς κεφαλὴν γωνίας Mt 21:42; Mk 12:10; Lk 20:17; Ac 4:11; 1 Pt 2:7 (all in ref. to Ps 117:22); εἰς χαρὰν γ. change (or, turn) into joy J 16:20. εἰς οὐδέν come to nothing Ac 5:36. εἰς παγίδα Ro 11:9 (Ps 68:23); εἰς κενὸν γ. be done in vain 1 Th 3:5. εἰς ἄψινθον Rv 8:11. Cp. AcPl Ha 6, 6. Also w. γίνεσθαι omitted: εἰς κατάκριμα (sc. ἐγένετο τὸ κρίμα) Ro 5:18.ⓑ used w. an adj. to paraphrase the passive (Jdth 11:11; 1 Esdr 7:3; 2 Macc 3:34; Sus 64 Theod.; En 103:9; Ath. 37, 1 πάντων ὑποχειρίων γιγνομένων): ἁπαλὸν γ. become tender Mt 24:32; Mk 13:28; ἀπειθῆ γ. Ac 26:19; ἀποσυνάγωγον γ. be expelled fr. the synagogue J 12:42; ἄφαντον γ. disappear Lk 24:31; σκωληκόβρωτον γ. be eaten by worms Ac 12:23; γνωστόν, φανερὸν γ. become known (Just., A I, 63, 6) Mk 6:14; Ac 1:19; 9:42; 19:17; 1 Cor 3:13; 14:25; Phil 1:13; δόκιμον γ. pass the test Js 1:12; ἑδραῖον γ. 1 Cor 15:58; ἔκδηλον γ. 2 Ti 3:9; AcPlCor 1:16; ἔξυπνον γ. Ac 16:27 (1 Esdr 3:3=Jos., Ant. 11:34); s. ἀπόπληκτος, ἐλεύθερος, ἐμφανής, ἔμφοβος, ἐνεργής, ἔντρομος, καθαρός, μέγας, περιδάκρυτος, περικρατής, πλήρης, πρηνής, τυφλός, ὑγιής, ὑπήκοος, ὑπόδικος, φανερός 1.ⓒ w. ἐν of a state of being (Stoic. III 221, 16; Diod S 20, 62, 4 ἐν ἀνέσει γ.; Plut., Tit. Flam. 378 [16, 1] ἐν ὀργῇ γ.; Lucian, Tim. 28; PPetr II, 20; III, 12 [252 B.C.] ἐν ἐπισχέσει γ.; BGU 5 II, 19 ἐν νόσῳ; POxy 471 IV, 77f; 4 Km 9:20; 1 Macc 1:27 v.l.; Sus 8 Theod.; Jos., Bell. 1, 320, Ant. 16, 372; Mel., P. 18 ἐν πόνοις … ἐν πληγαῖς etc.) ἐν ἀγωνίᾳ Lk 22:44. ἐν ἐκστάσει Ac 22:17. ἐν πνεύματι under the Spirit’s influence Rv 1:10; 4:2; AcPl Ha 6, 28. ἐν ὁμοιώματι ἀνθρώπων be like human beings Phil 2:7. ἐν ἀσθενείᾳ, φόβῳ, τρόμῳ 1 Cor 2:3. ἐν δόξῃ 2 Cor 3:7. ἐν ἑαυτῷ γ. come to one’s senses (Soph., Phil. 950; X., An. 1, 5, 17; Polyb. 1, 49, 8; Chariton 3, 9, 11) Ac 12:11; γ. ἐν Χριστῷ be a Christian Ro 16:7. Cp. 7 below.⑥ to make a change of location in space, moveⓐ εἴς τι (Hdt. 5, 87 al.; Philo, Op. M. 86; 2 Macc 1:13; also ἐν: Just., A II, 9, 3 ἐγενόμεθα ἐν ἐκείνῳ τῷ τόπω): εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα γ. (Jos., Ant. 10, 42) Ac 20:16; 21:17; 25:15. εἰς τὸν ἀγρόν Hv 3, 1, 4. Of a voice: ἐγένετο εἰς τὰ ὦτά μου reached my ear Lk 1:44. Fig. (cp. Bar 4:28) of Abraham’s blessing εἰς τὰ ἔθνη come to the Gentiles Gal 3:14; cp. 2 Cor 8:14 (s. περίσσευμα 1, ὑστέρημα 1).ⓑ ἔκ τινος (Job 28:2): γ. ἐκ μέσου be removed, Lat. e medio tolli (cp. Ps.-Aeschin., Ep. 12, 6 ἐκ μέσου γενομένων ἐκείνων; Plut., Timol. 238 [5, 3]; Achilles Tat. 2, 27, 2) 2 Th 2:7 (HFulford, ET 23, 1912, 40f: ‘leave the scene’). Of a voice fr. heaven: ἐκ τ. οὐρανῶν γ. sound forth fr. heaven (2 Macc 2:21; cp. Da 4:31 Theod.) Mk 1:11; Lk 3:22; 9:35; cp. vs. 36.ⓒ ἐπί τι: ἐπὶ τὸ μνημεῖον go to the tomb Lk 24:22; ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀναβαθμούς when he was at the steps Ac 21:35. Of fear that befalls someone (2 Macc 12:22) Lk 1:65; 4:36; Ac 5:5. Of ulcers: break out on someone Rv 16:2 (Ex 9:10f). Of divine commands: go out to someone Lk 3:2. ἐπί is somet. used w. the gen. (Appian, Liby. 93 §440; Alex. Aphr., Mixt. II 2 p. 213, 21) instead of the acc.: γενόμενος ἐπὶ τοῦ τόπου when he had arrived at the place 22:40 (Mitt-Wilck. I/2, 327, 18 ἐπὶ τ. τόπων γινόμενος).—J 6:21.ⓓ w. κατά and gen. of place: τὸ γενόμενον ῥῆμα καθʼ ὅλης τῆς Ἰουδαίας the message that has spread throughout all Judea Ac 10:37. W. acc. of place (X., Cyr. 7, 1, 15; Apollon. Paradox. 3 κατὰ τόπους γ.; Jos., Ant. I, 174; cp. 2 Macc 9:8): γενόμενος κατὰ τὸν τόπον Lk 10:32; γενόμενοι κατὰ τὴν Κνίδον Ac 27:7.ⓔ w. πρός and acc. of the direction and goal (PLond III, 962, 1 p. 210 [III A.D.] γενοῦ πρὸς Ἄταϊν τὸν ποιμένα; PFlor 180, 45) 1 Cor 2:3; 2J 12. Of divine instructions be given to someone (Gen 15:1, 4; Jer 1:2, 11; 13:8; Ezk 6:1; Hos 1:1; cp. ἐπί w. acc.) J 10:35; Ac 7:31 v.l.; 10:13; 13:32.ⓕ w. σύν and the dat. join someone (X., Cyr. 5, 3, 8; 2 Macc 13:13) Lk 2:13.ⓖ w. ἐγγύς (X., An. 1, 8, 8, Cyr. 7, 1, 7; cp. γίν. πλησίον Philo, Mos. 1, 228; Jos., Ant. 4, 40): ἐγγὺς τοῦ πλοίου γίνεσθαι come close to the boat J 6:19. Fig. of the relation of believers to Christ: come near Eph 2:13.ⓗ w. ὧδε come here J 6:25;ⓘ ἔμπροσθέν τινος γ. J 1:15, 30 s. on ἔμπροσθεν 1bζ and ὀπίσω 2b.⑦ to come into a certain state or possess certain characteristics, to be, prove to be, turn out to be (on relation to the forms of εἰμί [here and in 8–10] s. ALink, StKr 69, 1896, 420ff). Used w. the nom. (Wsd 16:3; Jdth 16:21; Sir 31:22; 1 Macc 3:58) γίνεσθε φρόνιμοι be prudent Mt 10:16. ἄκαρπος γίνεται 13:22; Mk 4:19.—W. other words: vs. 22; 9:50; Lk 1:2; 2:2; 6:36 and very oft. Freq. the dat. of advantage (dat. commodi) is added (1 Macc 10:47; 2 Macc 7:37; 4 Macc 6:28; 12:17): ἀγαπητόν τινι γ. be dear to someone 1 Th 2:8. ἀπρόσκοπον γ. τινι be inoffensive to someone 1 Cor 10:32; γ. τινι μαθητήν J 15:8; μισθαποδότην γ. τινι be a rewarder of someone Hb 11:6; γ. ὁδηγόν τινι Ac 1:16. Cp. παρηγορία, σημεῖον, τύπος.—γ. ὁμοθυμαδόν come together in unanimity or reach unanimity Ac 15:25.—τὶ γίνεταί τινί τι a thing results in someth. for someone τὸ ἀγαθὸν ἐμοὶ ἐγ. θάνατος; Ro 7:13. ἡ ἐξουσία πρόσκομμα τοῖς ἀσθενέσιν 1 Cor 8:9.—γίνομαι ὡς, ὥσπερ, ὡσεί τις (Ps 21:15; 31:9; 37:15; 82:11; 87:5 al.) be, become, show oneself like Mt 6:16; 10:25; 18:3; 28:4; Lk 22:26, 44; 1 Cor 4:13; 9:20f; Gal 4:12. καθὼς ἐγένετο … οὕτως ἔσται as it was … so it will be Lk 17:26, 28. οὐ χρὴ ταῦτα οὕτως γίνεσθαι this should not be so Js 3:10. ὁσίως καὶ δικαίως καὶ ἀμέμπτως ὑμῖν ἐγενήθημεν we proved/showed ourselves … toward you 1 Th 2:10.—In statements pert. to age (Aristoxenus, Fgm. 16 γεγονότα [sc. τὸν Πυθαγόραν] ἐτῶν τεσσαράκοντα; Demetr. of Phaleron [IV–III B.C.], Fgm. 153 Wehrli [’49]; Demetr: 722 Fgm. 1, 1 Jac.; Jos., Ant. 10, 50) ἐτῶν δώδεκα Lk 2:42; cp. 1 Ti 5:9.—Here prob. also belongs ἐγένετο γνώμης he decided Ac 20:3 (cp. Plut., Phoc. 752 [23, 4] ἐλπίδος μεγάλης γ.; Cass. Dio 61, 14 τ. ἐπιθυμίας γ.; Jos., Bell. 6, 287).⑧ to be present at a given time, be there ([Ps.-]Jos., Ant. 18, 63) Mk 1:4; J 1:6, hence exist (Diod S 3, 52, 4 γέγονε γένη γυναικῶν=there have been nations of women; Appian, Maced. 18 §3 τὸ χρυσίον τὸ γιγνόμενον=the gold that was at hand; Bar 3:26; 2 Macc 10:24) Ro 11:5; 1J 2:18. ἐγένετο there lived Lk 1:5. ἔν τινι 2 Pt 2:1. ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς Rv 16:18 (Da 12:1 Theod.).⑨ to be closely related to someone or someth., belong toⓐ gen. of the possessor (Appian, Bell. Civ. 5, 79 §336 a slave γεγένητο Πομπηίου=had belonged to Pompey: B-D-F §162, 7) belong to someone Lk 20:14, 33 (Appian, Bell. Civ. 2, 83 §350 γυνὴ Κράσσου γεγενημένη=who had been the wife of [the younger] Crassus).ⓑ w. dat. of pers. belong to someone (PPetr II, 40b, 7 [277 B.C.]; O. Wilck II, 1530, 2f [120 B.C.] τὸ γινόμενόν μοι=what belongs to me) of a woman ἀνδρὶ ἑτέρῳ Ro 7:3f (cp. Ruth 1:12f; Dt 24:2).ⓒ w. prep. μετά τινος (Josh 2:19) Ac 9:19; 20:18. οἱ μετʼ αὐτοῦ γενόμενοι his intimate friends Mk 16:10. πρός τινα be w. someone 1 Cor 16:10 ( make him [Timothy] feel quite at home with you Mft.) ὑπό τινα be under the authority of someone or someth. (1 Macc 10:38) Gal 4:4.ⓓ Here perh. belongs ἰδίας ἐπιλύσεως οὐ γίνεται it is not a matter of private interpretation 2 Pt 1:20.⑩ to be in or at a place, be in, be thereⓐ ἔν τινι to designate one’s present or future place of residence (X., An. 4, 3, 29; Appian, Bell. Civ. 5, 4 §15 Ἀντώνιος ἐν Ἐφέσῳ γενόμενος; Aelian, VH 4, 15; Herodian 2, 2, 5; POxy 283, 11; 709, 6 ἐν Μένφει γενόμενος; PTebt 416, 3; BGU 731 II, 6 ἐν οἰκίᾳ μου; Num 11:35; Judg 17:4; 1 Ch 14:17; Jdth 5:7 al. Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 1, 18 Jac.) Mt 26:6; Mk 9:33; Ac 7:38; 13:5; 2 Ti 1:17; Rv 1:9; AcPl Ha 7, 23.ⓑ w. adv.: ἐκεῖ (X., An. 6, 5, 20; 3 Km 8:8 v.l.; Jos., Ant. 10, 180) Ac 19:21. κατὰ μόνας Mk 4:10.—B. 637. DELG s.v. γίγνομαι. M-M. TW. -
12 ἀπό
ἀπό (Hom.+) prep. w. gen. (see the lit. on ἀνά, beg., also for ἀπό: KDieterich, IndogF 24, 1909, 93–158; LfgrE s.v.). Basic sense ‘separation from’ someone or someth., fr. which the other uses have developed. In the NT it has encroached on the domain of Att. ἐκ, ὑπό, παρά, and the gen. of separation; s. Mlt. 102; 246; Mlt-Turner 258f.① a marker to indicate separation from a place, whether person or thing, from, away fromⓐ w. all verbs denoting motion, esp. those compounded w. ἀπό: ἀπάγεσθαι, ἀπαλλάσσεσθαι, ἀπελαύνειν, ἀπέρχεσθαι, ἀπολύεσθαι, ἀποπλανᾶσθαι, ἀποστέλλειν, ἀποφεύγειν, ἀποχωρεῖν, ἀποχωρίζεσθαι; but also w. ἀνίστασθαι, διαστῆναι, διέρχεσθαι, ἐκδημεῖν, ἐκκινεῖν, ἐκπλεῖν, ἐκπορεύεσθαι, ἐξέρχεσθαι, ἐξωθεῖν, ἐπιδιδόναι, μεταβαίνειν, μετατίθεσθαι, νοσφίζειν, παραγίνεσθαι, πλανᾶσθαι, πορεύεσθαι, ὑπάγειν, ὑποστρέφειν, φεύγειν; s. the entries in question.ⓑ w. all verbs expressing the idea of separation ἐκβάλλειν τὸ κάρφος ἀ. τοῦ ὀφθαλμοῦ remove the splinter fr. the eye Mt 7:4 v.l. (for ἐκ). ἐξέβαλον ἀπὸ τῆς πήρας αὐτῶν δῶρα they set forth gifts out of their travel bags GJs 21:3. ἀπολύεσθαι ἀ. ἀνδρός be divorced fr. her husband Lk 16:18, cp. Ac 15:33. ἀποκυλίειν, ἀπολαμβάνεσθαι, ἀποστρέφειν, ἐπιστρέφεσθαι, ἐπανάγειν, αἴρειν, ἀφαιρεῖν, ἀπολέσθαι, μερίζειν et al., s. the pertinent entries. So also κενὸς ἀ. τινος Hs 9, 19, 2. ἔρημος ἀ. τινος (Jer 51:2) 2 Cl 2:3. W. verbs which express the concept of separation in the wider sense, like loose, free, acquit et al. ἀπορφανίζειν, ἀποσπᾶν, διεγείρεσθαι, δικαιοῦν, ἐκδικοῦν, ἐλευθεροῦν, λούειν, λύειν, λυτροῦν, ῥαντίζειν, σαλεύειν, στέλλειν, σῴζειν, φθείρειν, s. the entries; hence also ἀθῷος (Sus 46 Theod. v.l.) Mt 27:24. καθαρὸς ἀ. τινος (Tob 3:14; but s. Dssm. NB 24 [BS 196; 216]) Ac 20:26; cp. Kuhring 54.ⓒ verbs meaning be on guard, be ashamed, etc., take ἀπό to express the occasion or object of their caution, shame, or fear; so αἰσχύνεσθαι, βλέπειν, μετανοεῖν, προσέχειν, φοβεῖσθαι, φυλάσσειν, φυλάσσεσθαι; s. 5 below.ⓓ w. verbs of concealing, hiding, hindering, the pers. from whom someth. is concealed is found w. ἀπό; so κρύπτειν τι ἀπό τινος, παρακαλύπτειν τι ἀπό τινος, κωλύειν τι ἀπό τινος; s. the entries.ⓔ in pregnant constr. like ἀνάθεμα εἶναι ἀ. τοῦ Χριστοῦ be separated fr. Christ by a curse Ro 9:3. μετανοεῖν ἀ. τ. κακίας (Jer 8:6) Ac 8:22. ἀποθνῄσκειν ἀ. τινος through death become free from Col 2:20. φθείρεσθαι ἀ. τ. ἁπλότητος be ruinously diverted from wholehearted commitment 2 Cor 11:3. Cp. Hs 6, 2, 4.ⓕ as a substitute for the partitive gen. (Hdt. 6, 27, 2; Thu. 7, 87, 6; PPetr III, 11, 20; PIand 8, 6; Kuhring 20; Rossberg 22; Johannessohn, Präp. 17) τίνα ἀ. τῶν δύο; Mt 27:21, cp. Lk 9:38; 19:39 (like PTebt 299, 13; 1 Macc 1:13; 3:24; Sir 6:6; 46:8). τὰ ἀ. τοῦ πλοίου pieces of the ship Ac 27:44. ἐκχεῶ ἀ. τοῦ πνεύματός μου Ac 2:17f (Jo 3:1f). λαμβάνειν ἀ. τ. καρπῶν get a share of the vintage Mk 12:2 (cp. Just., A I, 65, 5 μεταλαβεῖν ἀπὸ τοῦ … ἄρτου).—Of foods (as in Da 1:13, 4:33a; 2 Macc 7:1) ἐσθίειν ἀ. τ. ψιχίων eat some of the crumbs Mt 15:27; Mk 7:28. χορτάζεσθαι ἀ. τινος eat one’s fill of someth. Lk 16:21. αἴρειν ἀ. τῶν ἰχθύων pick up the remnants of the fish Mk 6:43. ἐνέγκατε ἀ. τ. ὀψαρίων bring some of the fish J 21:10 (the only instance of this usage in J; s. M-EBoismard, Le chapitre 21 de Saint Jean: RB 54 [’47] 492).—Of drink (cp. Sir 26:12) πίνειν ἀπὸ τ. γενήματος τῆς ἀμπέλου drink the product of the vine Lk 22:18.② to indicate the point from which someth. begins, whether lit. or fig.ⓐ of place from, out from (Just., D. 86, 1 ἀπὸ τῆς πέτρας ὕδωρ ἀναβλύσαν ‘gushing out of the rock’) σημεῖον ἀ. τ. οὐρανοῦ a sign fr. heaven Mk 8:11. ἀ. πόλεως εἰς πόλιν from one city to another Mt 23:34. ἀπʼ ἄκρων οὐρανῶν ἕως ἄκρων αὐτῶν (Dt 30:4; Ps 18:7) from one end of heaven to the other 24:31, cp. Mk 13:27. ἀπʼ ἄνωθεν ἕως κάτω from top to bottom Mt 27:51. ἀρξάμενοι ἀ. Ἰερουσαλήμ beginning in Jerusalem Lk 24:47 (s. also Lk 23:5; Ac 1:22; 10:37). ἀφʼ ὑμῶν ἐξήχηται ὁ λόγος τ. κυρίου the word of the Lord has gone out from you and sounded forth 1 Th 1:8. ἀπὸ βορρᾶ, ἀπὸ νότου in the north, in the south (PCairGoodsp 6, 5 [129 B.C.] ἐν τῷ ἀπὸ νότου πεδίῳ; Mitt-Wilck. I/2, 11A col. 1, 12f [123 B.C.] τὸ ἀπὸ νότου τῆς πόλεως χῶμα; ln. 7 ἀπὸ βορρᾶ τῆς πόλεως; 70, 16 al.; Josh 18:5; 19:34; 1 Km 14:5) Rv 21:13.ⓑ of time from … (on), since (POxy 523, 4; Mel., HE 4, 26, 8; s. Kuhring 54ff).α. ἀ. τῶν ἡμερῶν Ἰωάννου from the days of John Mt 11:12. ἀ. τῆς ὥρας ἐκείνης 9:22. ἀπʼ ἐκείνης τ. ἡμέρας (Jos., Bell. 4, 318, Ant. 7, 382) Mt 22:46; J 11:53. ἔτη ἑπτὰ ἀ. τῆς παρθενίας αὐτῆς for seven years fr. the time she was a virgin Lk 2:36. ἀ. ἐτῶν δώδεκα for 12 years 8:43. ἀ. τρίτης ὥρας τῆς νυκτός Ac 23:23. ἀ. κτίσεως κόσμου Ro 1:20. ἀ. πέρυσι since last year, a year ago 2 Cor 8:10; 9:2.—ἀπʼ αἰῶνος, ἀπʼ ἀρχῆς, ἀπʼ ἄρτι (also ἀπαρτί and ἄρτι), ἀπὸ καταβολῆς κόσμου, ἀπὸ τότε, ἀπὸ τοῦ νῦν; s. the pertinent entries.β. w. the limits defined, forward and backward: ἀπὸ … ἕως (Jos., Ant. 6, 364) Mt 27:45. ἀπὸ … ἄχρι Phil 1:5. ἀπὸ … μέχρι Ac 10:30; Ro 5:14; 15:19.γ. ἀφʼ ἧς (sc. ὥρας or ἡμέρας, which is found Col 1:6, 9; but ἀφʼ ἧς became a fixed formula: ParJer 7:28; Plut., Pelop. [285] 15, 5; s. B-D-F §241, 2) since Lk 7:45 (Renehan ’75, 36f); Ac 24:11; 2 Pt 3:4 (cp. X., Hell. 4, 6, 6; 1 Macc 1:11). ἀφʼ οὗ (sc.—as in X., Cyr. 1, 2, 13—χρόνου; Att. ins in Meisterhans.3-Schw. and s. Witkowski, index 163; ἀφʼ οὗ is also a formula) since, when once (X., Symp. 4, 62; Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 1, 16 Jac.; Lucian, Dial. Mar. 15, 1; Ex 5:23 GrBar 3:6) Lk 13:25; 24:21; Rv 16:18 (cp. Da 12:1; 1 Macc 9:29; 16:24; 2 Macc 1:7; TestAbr B 13 p. 117, 23; GrBar; Jos., Ant. 4, 78). τρία ἔτη ἀφʼ οὗ (cp. Tob 5:35 S) Lk 13:7. ἀφότε s. ὅτε 1aγ end.ⓒ the beg. of a series from … (on).α. ἀρξάμενος ἀ. Μωϋσέως καὶ ἀ. πάντων τ. προφητῶν beginning w. Moses and all the prophets Lk 24:27. ἕβδομος ἀ. Ἀδάμ Jd 14 (Diod S 1, 50, 3 ὄγδοος ὁ ἀπὸ τοῦ πατρός [ancestor]; Appian, Mithrid. 9 §29 τὸν ἕκτον ἀπὸ τοῦ πρώτου Μιθριδάτην; Arrian, Anab. 7, 12, 4; Diog. L. 3, 1: Plato in the line of descent was ἕκτος ἀπὸ Σόλωνος; Biogr. p. 31: Homer δέκατος ἀπὸ Μουσαίου). ἀ. διετοῦς καὶ κατωτέρω Mt 2:16 (cp. Num 1:20; 2 Esdr 3:8).β. w. both beg. and end given ἀπὸ … ἕως (Sir 18:26; 1 Macc 9:13) Mt 1:17; 23:35; Ac 8:10. Sim., ἀ. δόξης εἰς δόξαν fr. glory to glory 2 Cor 3:18.③ to indicate origin or source, fromⓐ lit., with verbs of motionα. down from πίπτειν ἀ. τραπέζης Mt 15:27. καθεῖλεν δυνάστας ἀ. θρόνων God has dethroned rulers Lk 1:52.β. from ἔρχεσθαι ἀ. θεοῦ J 3:2; cp. 13:3; 16:30. παραγίνεται ἀ. τῆς Γαλιλαίας Mt 3:13; ἀ. ἀνατολῶν ἥξουσιν 8:11 (Is 49:12; 59:19); ἀ. τοῦ ἱεροῦ ἐπορεύετο 24:1; ἀ. Παμφυλίας Ac 15:38. ἐγείρεσθαι ἀ. τ. νεκρῶν be raised from the dead Mt 14:2.ⓑ lit., to indicate someone’s local origin from (Hom. et al.; Soph., El. 701; Hdt. 8, 114; ins [RevArch 4 sér. IV 1904 p. 9 ἀπὸ Θεσσαλονίκης]; pap [HBraunert, Binnenwanderung ’64, 384, s.v.; PFlor 14, 2; 15, 5; 17, 4; 22, 13 al.]; Judg 12:8; 13:2; 17:1 [all three acc. to B]; 2 Km 23:20 al.; Jos., Bell. 3, 422, Vi. 217; Just., A I, 1 τῶν ἀπὸ Φλαουί̈ας Νέας πόλεως; s. B-D-F §209, 3; Rob. 578) ἦν ἀ. Βηθσαϊδά he was from B. J 1:44; cp. 12:21. ὄχλοι ἀ. τῆς Γαλιλαίας crowds fr. Galilee Mt 4:25. ἄνδρες ἀ. παντὸς ἔθνους Ac 2:5. ἀνὴρ ἀ. τοῦ ὄχλου a man fr. the crowd Lk 9:38. ὁ προφήτης ὁ ἀ. Ναζαρέθ Mt 21:11. οἱ ἀ. Κιλικίας the Cilicians Ac 6:9. οἱ ἀδελφοὶ οἱ ἀ. Ἰόππης 10:23 (Musaeus 153 παρθένος ἀπʼ Ἀρκαδίας; Just., A I, 58, 1 Μακρίωνα … τὸν ἀπὸ Πόντου). οἱ ἀ. Θεσσαλονίκης Ἰουδαῖοι 17:13. οἱ ἀ. τῆς Ἰταλίας the Italians Hb 13:24, who could be inside as well as outside Italy (cp. Dssm., Her. 33, 1898, 344, LO 167, 1 [LAE 200, 3]; Mlt. 237; B-D-F §437).—Rather denoting close association οἱ ἀ. τῆς ἐκκλησίας members of the church Ac 12:1; likew. 15:5 (cp. Plut., Cato Min. 4, 2 οἱ ἀπὸ τ. στοᾶς φιλόσοφοι; Ps.-Demetr. c. 68 οἱ ἀπʼ αὐτοῦ=his [Isocrates’] pupils; Synes., Ep. 4 p. 162b; 66 p. 206c; PTebt 33, 3 [112 B.C.], Ῥωμαῖος τῶν ἀπὸ συγκλήτου; Ar. 15, 1 Χριστιανοὶ γενεαλογοῦνται ἀπὸ … Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ; Ath.).—To indicate origin in the sense of material fr. which someth. is made (Hdt. 7, 65; Theocr. 15, 117; IPriene 117, 72 ἀπὸ χρυσοῦ; 1 Esdr 8:56; Sir 43:20 v.l.) ἔνδυμα ἀ. τριχῶν καμήλου clothing made of camel’s hair Mt 3:4.ⓒ fig., w. verbs of asking, desiring, to denote the pers. of or from whom a thing is asked (Ar. 11, 3): δανίσασθαι ἀπό τινος borrow fr. someone Mt 5:42. ἐκζητεῖν ἀ. τῆς γενεᾶς ταύτης Lk 11:51. ἀπαιτεῖν τι ἀπό τινος Lk 12:20. ζητεῖν τι ἀπό τινος 1 Th 2:6. λαμβάνειν τι ἀπό τινος Mt 17:25f; 3J 7.ⓓ fig., w. verbs of perceiving, to indicate source of the perception (Lysias, Andoc. 6; Ps.-Aristot., De Mundo 6, 399b ἀπʼ αὐτῶν τῶν ἔργων θεωρεῖται ὁ θεός; Appian, Liby. 104 §493 ἀπὸ τῆς σφραγῖδος=[recognize a corpse] by the seal-ring; Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 2, 1 στοχάζεσθαι ἀπὸ τῶν ὀνομάτων; Just., D. 60, 1 τοῦτο νοοῦμεν ἀπὸ τῶν λόγων τῶν προλελεγμένων; 100, 2 ἀπὸ τῶν γραφῶν): ἀ. τῶν καρπῶν αὐτῶν ἐπιγνώσεσθε αὐτούς by their fruits you will know them Mt 7:16, 20. μανθάνειν παραβολὴν ἀ. τῆς συκῆς learn a lesson from the fig tree 24:32; Mk 13:28. ἀπὸ τῶν σπερμάτων μὴ ποιεῖσθαι τὴν παραβολήν if we are not to derive our parable solely from reference to seeds (cp. 1 Cor 15:37) AcPlCor 2:28.—Also μανθάνειν τι ἀπό τινος learn someth. fr. someone Gal 3:2; Col 1:7.ⓔ γράψαι ἀφʼ ὧν ἠδυνήθην, lit., write from what I was able, i.e. as well as I could B 21:9 (cp. Tat. 12, 5 οὐκ ἀπὸ γλώττης οὐδὲ ἀπὸ τῶν εἰκότων οὐδὲ ἀπʼ ἐννοιῶν etc.).④ to indicate distance fr. a point, away from, for μακρὰν ἀ. τινος far fr. someone, ἀπὸ μακρόθεν fr. a great distance s. μακράν, μακρόθεν. ἀπέχειν ἀπό τινος s. ἀπέχω 4. W. detailed measurements (corresp. to Lat. ‘a’, s. B-D-F §161, 1; Rob. 575; WSchulze, Graeca Latina 1901, 15ff; Hdb. on J 11:18; Appian, Bell. Civ. 3, 12 §42; CB I/2, 390 no. 248) ἦν Βηθανία ἐγγὺς τῶν Ἱεροσολύμων ὡς ἀπὸ σταδίων δεκατέντε Bethany was near Jerusalem, about 15 stades (less than 3 km.) away J 11:18. ὡς ἀπὸ πηχῶν διακοσίων about 200 cubits (c. 90 meters) 21:8. ἀπὸ σταδίων χιλίων ἑξακοσίων about 1600 stades (c. 320 km.) Rv 14:20; cp. Hv 4, 1, 5 (for other examples of this usage, s. Rydbeck 68).—Hebraistically ἀπὸ προσώπου τινός (Gen 16:6; Jer 4:26; Jdth 2:14; Sir 21:2; 1 Macc 5:34; En 103:4; Just., A I, 37, 1 ἀπὸ προσώπου τοῦ πατρὸς ἐλέχθησαν διὰ Ἠσαίου … οἵδε οἱ λόγοι ‘in the name of the father … through Isaiah’; 38, 1 al.)=מִפְּנֵי פ׳ ( away) from the presence of someone 2 Th 1:9 (Is 2:10, 19, 21); Rv 12:14 (B-D-F §140; 217, 1; Mlt-H. 466).⑤ to indicate cause, means, or outcomeⓐ gener., to show the reason for someth. because of, as a result of, for (numerous ref. in FBleek on Hb 5:7; PFay 111, 4; POxy 3314, 7 [from falling off a horse]; Jdth 2:20; 4 [6] Esdr [POxy 1010]; AscIs 3:13; Jos., Ant. 9, 56) οὐκ ἠδύνατο ἀ. τοῦ ὄχλου he could not because of the crowd Lk 19:3; cp. Mk 2:4 D. οὐκ ἐνέβλεπον ἀπὸ τῆς δόξης τοῦ φωτός I could not see because of the brilliance of the light Ac 22:11. ἀ. τοῦ πλήθους τ. ἰχθύων J 21:6 (M-EBoismard, ad loc.: s. 1f end). ἀ. τοῦ ὕδατος for the water Hs 8, 2, 8. ἀ. τῆς θλίψεως because of the persecution Ac 11:19. οὐαὶ τῷ κόσμῳ ἀ. τ. σκανδάλων Mt 18:7 (s. B-D-F §176, 1; Mlt. 246). εἰσακουσθεὶς ἀ. τῆς εὐλαβείας heard because of his piety Hb 5:7 (but the text may be corrupt; at any rate it is obscure and variously interpr.; besides the comm. s. KRomaniuk, Die Gottesfürchtigen im NT: Aegyptus 44, ’64, 84; B-D-F §211; Rob. 580; s. on εὐλάβεια).ⓑ to indicate means with the help of, with (Hdt. et al.; Ael. Aristid. 37, 23 K.=2 p. 25 D.; PGM 4, 2128f σφράγιζε ἀπὸ ῥύπου=seal with dirt; En 97:8) γεμίσαι τὴν κοιλίαν ἀ. τ. κερατίων fill one’s stomach w. the husks Lk 15:16 v.l. (s. ἐκ 4aζ; cp. Pr 18:20). οἱ πλουτήσαντες ἀπʼ αὐτῆς Rv 18:15 (cp. Sir 11:18).ⓒ to indicate motive or reason for, from, with (Appian, Bell. Civ. 5, 13 §52 ἀπʼ εὐνοίας=with goodwill; 1 Macc 6:10; pap exx. in Kuhring 35) κοιμᾶσθαι ἀ. τῆς λύπης sleep from sorrow Lk 22:45. ἀ. τῆς χαρᾶς αὐτοῦ Mt 13:44; cp. Lk 24:41; Ac 12:14. ἀ. τοῦ φόβου κράζειν Mt 14:26, ἀ. φόβου καὶ προσδοκίας with fear and expectation Lk 21:26. Hence verbs of fearing, etc., take ἀ. to show the cause of the fear (s. above 1c) μὴ φοβεῖσθαι ἀ. τ. ἀποκτεννόντων τὸ σῶμα not be afraid of those who kill only the body Mt 10:28; Lk 12:4 (cp. Jdth 5:23; 1 Macc 2:62; 3:22; 8:12; En 106:4).ⓓ to indicate the originator of the action denoted by the verb from (Trag., Hdt. et al.) ἀ. σοῦ σημεῖον ἰδεῖν Mt 12:38. γινώσκειν ἀπό τινος learn fr. someone Mk 15:45. ἀκούειν ἀ. τοῦ στόματός τινος hear fr. someone’s mouth, i.e. fr. him personally Lk 22:71 (Dionys. Hal. 3, 8 ἀ. στόματος ἤκουσεν); cp. Ac 9:13; 1J 1:5. τὴν ἀ. σοῦ ἐπαγγελίαν a promise given by you Ac 23:21 (cp. Ath. 2, 3 ταῖς ἀπὸ τῶν κατηγόρων αἰτίαις ‘the charges made by the accusers’). ἀφʼ ἑνὸς ἐγενήθησαν Hb 11:12. Prob. παραλαμβάνειν ἀ. τοῦ κυρίου 1 Cor 11:23 is to be understood in the same way: Paul is convinced that he is taught by the Lord himself (for direct teaching s. EBröse, Die Präp. ἀπό 1 Cor 11:23: StKr 71, 1898, 351–60; Dssm.; BWeiss; Ltzm.; H-DWendland. But for indirect communication: Zahn et al.). παραλαβὼν ἀπὸ τῶν θυγατέρων Φιλίππου, ὅτι Papias (11:2); opp. παρειληφέναι ὑπὸ τῶν θ. Φ. (2:9).—Of the more remote cause ἀπʼ ἀνθρώπων from human beings (as opposed to transcendent revelation; w. διʼ ἀνθρώπου; cp. Artem. 1, 73 p. 66, 11 ἀπὸ γυναικῶν ἢ διὰ γυναικῶν; 2, 36 p. 135, 26) Gal 1:1. ἀ. κυρίου πνεύματος fr. the Lord, who is the Spirit 2 Cor 3:18. ἔχειν τι ἀπό τινος have (received) someth. fr. someone 1 Cor 6:19; 1 Ti 3:7; 1J 2:20; 4:21.—In salutation formulas εἰρήνη ἀ. θεοῦ πατρός ἡμῶν peace that comes from God, our father Ro 1:7; 1 Cor 1:3; 2 Cor 1:2; Gal 1:3; Eph 1:2; cp. 6:23; Phil 1:2; Col 1:2; 1 Th 1:1 v.l.; 2 Th 1:2; 1 Ti 1:2; 2 Ti 1:2; Tit 1:4; Phlm 3. σοφία ἀ. θεοῦ wisdom that comes fr. God 1 Cor 1:30. ἔπαινος ἀ. θεοῦ praise fr. God 4:5. καὶ τοῦτο ἀ. θεοῦ and that brought about by God Phil 1:28. The expr. εἰρήνη ἀπὸ ‘ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν καὶ ὁ ἐρχόμενος’ Rv 1:4 is quite extraordinary. It may be an interpretation of the name Yahweh already current, or an attempt to show reverence for the divine name by preserving it unchanged, or simply one more of the grammatical peculiarities so frequent in Rv (Meyer6-Bousset 1906, 159ff; Mlt. 9, note 1; cp. PParis 51, 33 ἀπὸ ἀπηλιότης; Mussies 93f, 328).ⓔ to indicate responsible agents for someth., from, ofα. the self, st. Gk. usage (Thu. 5, 60, 1; X., Mem. 2, 10, 3; Andoc., Orat. 2, 4 οὗτοι οὐκ ἀφʼ αὑτῶν ταῦτα πράττουσιν; Diod S 17, 56; Num 16:28; 4 Macc 11:3; En 98:4; TestAbr A 15 p. 95, 26 [Stone p. 38]; 18 p. 101, 6 [Stone p. 50]; Just., A I, 43, 8) the expr. ἀφʼ ἑαυτοῦ (pl. ἀφʼ ἑαυτῶν) of himself and ἀπʼ ἐμαυτοῦ of myself are common Lk 12:57; 21:30; 2 Cor 3:5, esp. so in J: 5:19, 30; 8:28; 10:18; 15:4.—7:17f; 11:51; 14:10; 16:13; 18:34. So also ἀπʼ ἐμαυτοῦ οὐκ ἐλήλυθα I did not come of myself (opp. the Father sent me) 7:28; 8:42.β. fr. others. W. verbs in the pass. voice or pass. mng. ὑπό is somet. replaced by ἀπό (in isolated cases in older Gk. e.g. Thu. 1, 17 et al. [Kühner-G. II/1 p. 457f]; freq. in later Gk.: Polyb. 1, 79, 14; Hero I 152, 6; 388, 11; Nicol. Dam.: 90 Fgm. 130, 130 Jac.; IG XII/5, 29, 1; SIG 820, 9; PLond III, 1173, 12 p. 208; BGU 1185, 26; PFlor 150, 6 ἀ. τῶν μυῶν κατεσθιόμενα; PGM 4, 256; Kuhring 36f; 1 Macc 15:17; Sir 16:4; ParJer 1:1 ᾐχμαλωτεύθησαν … ἀπὸ τοῦ βασιλέως; Philo, Leg. All. 3, 62; Just., A I, 68, 6 ἐπιστολὴν … γραφεῖσάν μοι ἀπὸ Σερήνου, D. 121, 3 ἀπὸ παντὸς [γένους] μετάνοιαν πεποιῆσθαι. See B-D-F §210; Rob. 820; GHatzidakis, Einl. in d. neugriech. Gramm. 1892, 211; AJannaris, An Histor. Gk. Grammar 1897, §1507). Yet just at this point the textual tradition varies considerably, and the choice of prep. is prob. at times influenced by the wish to express special nuances of mng. Lk 8:29b v.l. (ὑπό text); 43b (ὑπό v.l.); 10:22 D; ἀποδεδειγμένος ἀ. τ. θεοῦ attested by God Ac 2:22. ἐπικληθεὶς Βαρναβᾶς ἀ. (ὑπό v.l.) τ. ἀποστόλων named B. by the apostles 4:36. κατενεχθεὶς ἀ. τοῦ ὕπνου overcome by sleep 20:9. ἀθετούμενος ἀπὸ τῶν παραχαρασσόντων τὰ λόγια αὐτοῦ inasmuch as (Jesus) is being rejected by those who falsify his words AcPlCor 2:3. νεκροῦ βληθέντος ἀπὸ τῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραὴλ ἐπʼ αὐτά when a corpse was cast upon them (the bones of Elisha) 2:32. In such cases ἀπό freq. denotes the one who indirectly originates an action, and can be transl. at the hands of, by command of: πολλὰ παθεῖν ἀ. τ. πρεσβυτέρων suffer much at the hands of the elders Mt 16:21; cp. Lk 9:22; 17:25, where the emphasis is to be placed on παθεῖν, not on ἀποδοκιμασθῆναι. In ἀ. θεοῦ πειράζομαι the thought is that the temptation is caused by God, though not actually carried out by God Js 1:13. ἡτοιμασμένος ἀ. τοῦ θεοῦ prepared by God’s command, not by God in person Rv 12:6.⑥ In a few expr. ἀπό helps to take the place of an adverb. ἀπὸ μέρους, s. μέρος 1c.—ἡμέρᾳ ἀφʼ ἡμέρας day by day GJs 12:3.—ἀπὸ μιᾶς (acc. to Wlh., Einl.2 26, an Aramaism, min ḥădā˒=at once [s. MBlack, An Aramaic Approach3, ’67, 113]; but this does not explain the fem. gender, found also in the formulaic ἐπὶ μιᾶς Maxim. Tyr. 6, 3f En 99:9 [s. SAalen, NTS 13, ’67, 3] and in Mod. Gk. μὲ μιᾶς at once [Thumb §162 note 2]. PSI 286, 22 uses ἀπὸ μιᾶς of a payment made ‘at once’; on the phrase s. New Docs 2, 189. Orig. γνώμης might have been a part of the expr. [Philo, Spec. Leg. 3, 73], or ὁρμῆς [Thu. 7, 71, 6], or γλώσσης [Cass. Dio 44, 36, 2], or φωνῆς [Herodian 1, 4, 8]; cp. ἀπὸ μιᾶς φωνῆς Plut., Mor. 502d of an echo; s. B-D-F §241, 6) unanimously, alike, in concert Lk 14:18. Sim. ἀπὸ τ. καρδιῶν fr. (your) hearts, sincerely Mt 18:35.—Himerius, Or. 39 [=Or. 5], 6 has as a formula διὰ μιᾶς, probably = continuously, uninterruptedly, Or. 44 [=Or. 8], 2 fuller διὰ μιᾶς τῆς σπουδῆς=with one and the same, or with quite similar zeal.—M-M. -
13 φθάνω
Aἔφθανον X.HG6.2.30
, AP9.272 ([place name] Bianor): [tense] fut.φθήσομαι Il.23.444
, Th.5.10, Pl.R. 375c, etc.; but φθάσω [ᾰ] Hp. Morb.3.13 (s. v. l.), X.Cyr.5.4.38: [tense] aor.ἔφθᾰσα Hdt.7.161
, A.Pers. 752 (troch.), Th.3.49, X.Cyr.7.1.19, etc.; imper.φθάσον J.AJ6.11.7
; opt. [ per.] 3sg.φθάσειε Isoc.8.120
, pl.φθάσειαν X.HG7.2.14
(this tense prevails in later Gk., Plb.3.66.1, etc.); [dialect] Dor.ἔφθασσα Theoc.2.115
: but the only [dialect] Ep. [tense] aor. is ἔφθην, not found in A. or S., but the more usual form in E. and Ar., less freq. in Th., X., D.; pl. ἔφθημεν, -ητε, -ησαν, E.Ph. 1468, Isoc.5.7, Antipho 2.2.5, [dialect] Ep.pl.3φθάν Il.11.51
; subj. φθῶ, [dialect] Ep. [ per.] 3sg. φθήῃ, φθῇσιν, 16.861, 23.805; [dialect] Ep. [ per.] 1pl.φθέωμεν Od.16.383
; [ per.] 3pl.φθέωσι 24.437
; opt. φθαίην, [dialect] Ep. [ per.] 3sg. φθαίησι ([etym.] παρα-) Il.10.346; inf.φθῆναι Hdt.6.115
, Th.4.4; part.φθάς Hdt.3.71
; [dialect] Ep. part. [voice] Med.φθάμενος Il.5.119
, al., Hes.Op. 554: [tense] pf. ἔφθᾰκα Philipp. ap. D.18.39, LXX 2 Ch.28.9, IG12 9).906.26 (Chalcis, iii A. D.);πέφθακα Ps.-Callisth. 2.10
(v. l): [tense] plpf.ἐφθάκει Plu.Galb. 17
, Luc.Philops.6:—[voice] Pass., Arist.Mu. 395a18: [tense] impf.ἐφθάνετο AP9.278
([place name] Bianor);ἐφθάνοντο J.BJ5.2.4
(v.l. ἐφονεύοντο): [tense] aor.ἐφθάσθην D.H. 6.25
, Epigr.Gr. 315 ([place name] Smyrna), IPE2.197 (Panticapaeum, ii A. D.), J.AJ8.12.4. Gal.4.560. [[pron. full] φθᾰνω always in [dialect] Att. (so also in AP9.272 ([place name] Bianor), APl.4.382, 384); φθᾱνω in Il.9.506, 21.262 (where Zenod. read φθανέει for φθάνει) ]:— come or do first or before others:I c. acc. pers., to be beforehand with, overtake, outstrip, in running or otherwise,φθάνει δέ τε καὶ τὸν ἄγοντα Il.21.262
;φθῆ σε τελος θανάτοιο 11.451
, cf. Hes.Op. 554, 570, Hdt.7.161, E.Heracl. 120, IT 669, Isoc.9.42, etc.;οὐ μὴ φθάσωμεν τοὺς κοιμηθέντας 1 Ep.Thess.4.15
; so ἔφθησαν τὸν χειμῶνα they anticipated the storm, Hdt.7.188;φθάσας τὸν λογισμόν D.21.38
:—[voice] Pass., to be overtaken, , AP9.278 ([place name] Bianor); ἐφθάσθην (v. supr.).II abs., come or act first, opp. ὑστερέω or ὑστερίζω, E.Ph. 975, X.An.6.1.18, cf. Th.4.121; τοῦ φθάσαντος ἁρπαγή the prey of the first comer, A.Pers. 752 (troch.), cf. Fr.23 (lyr.); ; , 100;φθάσαι πρὶν ἀδικηθῆναι Arist.Pol. 1302b23
, cf. Rh. 1373a23; in later writers, τὰ φθάσαντα the things before mentioned, Ael.VH 1.34, Arg.D.46; part. φθάνων, φθάσας previous,τῶν φθασάντων δυεῖν βιβλίων Porph.Abst.3.1
; ἐν τοῖς φθάνουσιν ἔργοις Dex.Hist.Fr. 26 J.;τοῖς φθάνουσι κατορθώμασι Id.Fr.6
J.;οἱ φθάσαντες πόνοι Agath.5.16
; previous time,Ael.
VH14.6; τὸ φθάσαν, τὰ φθάσαντα, the past, Agath.3.2, al., Procop.Gaz.Ep.32;ὁ φθάσας χρόνος Men.
Prot.p.127 D.2 with Preps., come or arrive first,ἕως τῶν οὐρανῶν LXX 2 Ch.28.9
;ἔφθασεν ἐφ' ὑμᾶς Ev.Matt.12.28
, Ev.Luc.11.20, cf. 1 Ep.Thess.2.16: φ. εἰς .., simply, arriveat, attain to, Ep.Rom.9.31, Ep.Phil.3.16, Plu.2.338a;φθάσομεν εἰς Πηλούσι<ον> PPar.18.14
(ii A. D.): abs., of Time, arrive, καιρὸς τῆς τομῆς ἔφθακε (v.l. ἔφθασεν) LXXCa. 2.12; ἔφθασεν ὁ μὴν ὁ ἕβδομος ib.2 Es.3.1.d Gramm., to be applied or applicable,ἐπ' ἀμφοτέρας τὰς διαθέσεις A.D.Synt.211.22
, cf. 217.23, al.III the action in which one is beforehand is expressed by the part. agreeing with the subject, [Ἄτη] πολλὸν ὑπεκπροθέει, φθάνει δέ τε πᾶσαν ἐπ' αἶαν βλάπτουσ' ἀνθρώπους and is beforehand in doing men mischief, Il.9.506; ἀλλ' ἄρα μιν φθῆ Τηλέμαχος κατόπισθε βαλών Telemachus was beforehand with him in striking, i.e. struck first, Od.22.91, cf. 16.383, Il.10.368;ἔφθασέν με προαπελθὼν Χάρμος PCair.Zen.16.3
(iii B. C.); ἔφθησαν ἀπικόμενοι arrived first, Hdt.4.136, cf. 6.115; so φ. εὐεργετῶν to be the first to show a kindness, X.Mem.2.3.14;ὅπως φθάσειαν βοηθήσαντες Id.HG7.2.14
;ἔφθασαν προκαταλαβόντες Th.3.112
;φθάνουσιν αὐτοὺς προκαταφυγοῦσαι Id.2.91
; ;φ. γόνασι προσπεσὼν πατρός E.HF 986
, etc: part. [voice] Pass. is also used, ἦ κε πολὺ φθαίη πόλις ἁλοῦσα, i.e. it would be taken first, Il.13.815; εἴ κε φθήῃ τυπείς shall be wounded first, 16.861; φθαίητε γὰρ ἂν.. ἐξανδραποδισθέντες ἣ .. Hdt.6.108;μὴ φθάσωσι προεπιβουλευόμενοι Th.3.83
;ἔφθη κατακωλυθείς X.HG1.6.17
; φθάνειν δεῖ πεφραγμένους τοὶς πόρους they must first be blocked up, Id.Cyr.2.4.25: these clauses, being compar. in sense, are folld. by a gen., φθὰν δὲ μέγ' ἱππήων.. κοσμηθέντες were drawn up before the drivers, Il.11.51; more freq. by πρὶν .. orἢ.., ἔφθη ὀρεξάμενος, πρὶν οὐτάσαι 16.322
, cf. Antipho1.29, X. Cyr.3.2.4; ;ἔφθης πεζὸς ἰὼν ἢ ἐγὼ σὺν νηΐ Od.11.58
; ἔφθησαν ἀναβάντες πρὶν ἢ .. Hdt.9.70; ἔφθησαν ἐκπεσόντες πρότερον ἢ .. Id.6.91.b in later Gr., c. part. to express previous action or happening, φθάνω ὑμῖν πρότερον γεγραφηκώς I have already written to you, POxy.1666.3 (iii A. D.), cf. 237 vi30 (ii A. D.), etc.;ἔφθασα εἰρηκώς Luc.Pisc.29
;ὡς ἔφθην εἰπών Id.Par.3
; cf. 111.2b.2 in the same sense, part. φθάς or φθάσας, [dialect] Ep. φθάμενος, is used like an Adv. with a principal Verb, ὅς μ' ἔβαλε φθάμενος, for ὅς μ' ἔφθη βαλών, Il.5.119, cf. 13.387, Od. 19.449; οὐκ ἄλλος φθὰς ἐμεῦ κατήγορος ἔσται no other shall be an accuser before me, Hdt.3.71; ἀνέῳξάς με φθάσας you opened the door before me, Ar.Pl. 1102;φθάσας προσπεσοῦμαι Th.5.9
, cf. 2.91, X.Cyr. 1.5.3, etc.; even with a part.,φθάσας.. ἁρπάσας Hdt.6.65
; rarely part. [tense] pres.,φθάνοντες δῃοῦμεν X.Cyr.3.3.18
.b in signf. 111.1b, φθάσαντες ἐπληρώσαμεν αὐτούς we had already paid them, POxy.1103.6 (iv A. D.); but ὡσεὶ καὶ ὁμογενῆ φθάσας εἶπον as if I had said (not had already said) ὁ., Gal.16.502.3 rarely c. inf., ὁ φθάσας θαρσῆσαι he that first gains confidence, Th.3.82; σπεύδειν ὅπως.. φθαίης ἔτ' εἰς ἐκκλησίαν ἐλθεῖν (v.l. ἐλθών ) hurry to be in time to get to.., Ar.Eq. 935 (lyr.), cf. Nu. 1384 (v. infr. IV. 1); μόλις φθάνει θρόνοισιν ἐμπεσοῦσα μὴ χαμαὶ πεσεῖν hardly manages by falling first on the seat not to fall on the ground, E.Med. 1169; more freq. in later writers, of actions which one manages to do, does before or has done first or already, A.R.1.1189, D.H.4.59,61, Sor.1.111, Gal.15.2,93, Luc. DMort.13.2, Harm.2;ἐὰν φθάσω πρὸ τῆς τρύγης ἀνελθεῖν PSI8.971.10
(iii/iv A. D.);ἐὰν ὁ ἰατρὸς αὐτὸ φθάσῃ κενῶσαι Gal.16.499
; φθάνοντος ἤδη πυρέττειν ἐκ τεττάρων ἡμερῶν τοῦ νοσοῦντος having already begun, ib.498; μὴ φθάνων προσηκόντως τρέφεσθαι if he is not first suitably nourished, Id.18(2).36, cf. 84,103; συμβαίνει φθάνειν ἀποθνῄσκειν τοὺς νεωτέρους the young die first, ib.222; εἰ φθάσαιμεν παλαιοὺς πίθους ἔχειν μεγάλους if we already have.., Gp.6.3.11, cf. 10.22.2, al., A.D.Pron.90.1;ἔφθακεν οὖν ταῦτα ἐψηφίσθαι καὶ τῇ βουλῇ IG12(9).906.26
(Chalcis, iii A. D.).IV with negatives,1 with οὐ and part. (inf. is v. l. in Ar.Nu. 1384), folld. by καί or καὶ εὐθύς, of two actions following close on each other, οὐ φθάνειν χρὴ συσκιάζοντας γένυν καὶ.. ὁρμᾶν you must no sooner get your beard than you march, E.Supp. 1219; οὐ φθάνει ἐξαγόμενος καὶ εὐθὺς ὅμοιός ἐστι τοῖς ἀκαθάρτοις no sooner is he brought out than he becomes unclean, X.Eq.5.10, cf. Ar.Nu. 1384; οὐκ ἔφθημεν εἰς Τροιζῆν' ἐλθόντες καὶ τοιαύταις νόσοις ἐλήφθημεν ἐξ ὧν .. no sooner had we come to Troezen than.., Isoc.19.22, cf. 5.53, 8.98, 9.53; οὐκ ἔφθη μοι συμβᾶσα ἡ ἀτυχία καὶ εὐθὺς ἐπεχείρησαν διαφορῆσαι τἄνδοθεν scarcely or no sooner had misfortune befallen me when.., D.57.65, cf. 43.69, Isoc.4.86.2 οὐκ ἂν φθάνοις, οὐκ ἂν φθάνοιτε, with part. [tense] pres., express a strong exhortation or urgent command, οὐκ ἂν φθάνοιτε τὴν ταχίστην ὀπίσω ἀπαλλασσόμενοι you could not be too quick in departing, i.e. make haste and be off, Hdt.7.162; οὐ φθάνοιτ' ἔτ' ἄν θνῄσκοντες make haste and die, E.Or. 936, cf. 941, Alc. 662, Heracl. 721, Tr. 456 (troch.), IT 245; ; ἀποτρέχων οὐκ ἂν φθάνοις ib. 1133; εἰς ἀγορὰν ἰὼν ταχέως οὐκ ἂν φθάνοις ib. 874, cf. Ec. 118;οὐκ ἂν φθάνοις λέγων Pl. Smp. 185e
, X.Mem.2.3.11; these phrases are not to be treated as questions, cf. οὐκ ἂν φθάνοιμι (sc. λέγων) Pl.Smp. 214e, cf. Phd. 100c, D.25.40, Luc.Fug.26, Symp.2, Anach.14: c. part. [tense] aor., once in Luc., Vit.Auct.26.b in 1, 2, or 3 pers., to express immediate futurity, οὐκ ἂν φθάνοις ἀκούων you shall hear in a moment, Pl.Euthd. 272d; οὐκ ἂν φθάνοι τὸ πλῆθος τούτοις τοῖς θηρίοις δουλεῦον will soon (or inevitably) be enslaved to.., D.24.143; also to express what is logically inevitable, οὐκ ἂν φθάνοιεν αὐτοὺς προσκυνοῦντες they will soon be (or cannot logically help) worshipping them, Aristeas 137;τοῦτο μὲν οὐκ ἂν φθάνοις καὶ Ἐμπεδοκλεῖ πρὸ αὐτοῦ ἐγκαλῶν Luc.Fug.2
;οὐκ ἂν φθάνοι κἀμὲ μάντιν λέγων Id.Hes.8
;οὐκ ἂν φθάνοι τις ἁπάσας ἀναιρῶν τὰς τοιαύτας προστασίας Id.Apol.11
: c. part. [tense] aor., Id.Tox.2. -
14 λαμβάνω
+ V 408-428-225-72-202=1335 Gn 2,15.21.22.23; 3,6to take [τι] Gn 2,21; id. [τινα] Gn 2,15; to take [τινος] Gn 3,6; id. [ἀπό τινος] Ex 12,7; to take away, to remove [τι] 2 Chr 16,2; to take away [τινα] 2 Kgs 2,5to take by violence, to carry off as booty [τι] Jos 11,19; to take by violence, to take captive [τινα] Jgs 8,16; to capture (a city) [τι] 1 Chr 11,8; to take up, to carry away [τινα] (of storm) Is 41,16to take hold of, to seize [τινα] (of pains) Ex 15,14; to attack [τινα] (of sudden pain) 2 Mc 9,5; to catch, to overtake [τινα] (of sleep) DnLXX 4,33bto get, to receive [τι] Lv 25,36; id. [abs.] Hab 1,3; id. [τινα] Ps 48(49),16; to take from, to accept from [τι παρά τινος] Gn 23,13; to gain, to win (virtue)[τι] Zech 6,13; to receive (for money), to buy [τι] Dt 2,6, cpr. Ez 29,14, Jos 11,19; to take up, to pronounce [τι] Mi 2,4to take up, to pronounce [τι] Mi 2,4; to incur [τι] Lv 5,1; to levy, to impose [τι] 1 Mc 3,31; to choose, to select [τινα] Nm 8,6; to take, to choose 2 Mc 8,7; to fetch, to find [τινα] 2 Kgs 3,15; to take as [τινα+pred.] Lv 18,18; to take sb for [τινα εἴς τινα] Gn 43,18; id. [τινα εἴς τι] 1 Mc 14,5οὐ λήμψεται μάχαιραν he shall not draw the sword Is 2,4; ἔλαβεν Ααρων τὴν Ελισαβεθ αὐτῷ γυναῖκα Aaron took Elisabeth as his wife Ex 6,23; ἔλαβον αὐτὴν ἐμαυτῷ εἰς γυναῖκα I took her as my wife Gn 12,19; ἧς οὐχὶ πεῖραν ἔλαβεν ὁ ποὺς αὐτῆς βαίνειν ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς whose foot has not yet attempted or tried to go upon the earth Dt 28,56; ἐὰν λάβῃς τὸν συλλογισμὸν τῶν υἱῶν Ισραηλ if you should take account of the children of Israel, if you should count the children of Israel Ex 30,12; πρὸ ὀφθαλμῶν λαβόντας keeping or bearing in mind 2 Mc 8,17; οὐκ ἔλαβεν συντέλειαν it is not finished 1 Ezr 6,19; λημψόμεθα τὴν ἐκδίκησιν ἡμῶν ἐξ αὐτοῦ we shall take our vengeance on him, we shall avenge ourselves on him Jer 20,10; λήμψονται τὴν κόλασιν αὐτῶν περὶ πάντων, ὧν ἐποίησαν they shall receive or bear their punishment for all the things they have done, they shall be punished for all the things they have done Ez 43,11; οὐ λήμψῃ πρόσωπον πτωχοῦ you shall not take the poor into consideration, you shall not show partiality towards the poor, you shall not favour the person of the poor Lv 19,15; ὅταν λάβω καιρόν whenever I seize the opportunity, whenever I take a set time Ps 74(75),3; πᾶς, ὂς ἂν λάψῃ τῇ γλώσσῃ αὐτοῦ ἐκ τοῦ ὕδατος whosoever shall lap of the water with his tongue Jgs 7,5; δεξιὰς λαβεῖν to take the right hand, to shake hands, to pledge friendship 1 Mc 13,50; ἔλαβεν ἐν γαστρὶ Ρεβεκκα Rebecca became pregnant, Rebecca conceived Gn 25,21; τὰ πρόβατα ἐ̓ν γαστρὶ λαμβάνοντα the sheep carrying their young, the sheep that had conceived in the belly, the pregnant sheep Gn 30,41; ἔλαβεν ἐπὶ ματαίῳ τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ he lifted up his soul to vanity, he desired vanity Ps 23(24),4; ἑώρα ἀδύνατον εἶναι τὸν Σιμωνα παῦλαν οὐ λημψόμενον τῆς ἀνοίας he saw that it was impossible that Simon would leave or abandon his folly 2 Mc 4,6; τὸν δὲ ἀγορασμὸν τῆς σιτοδοσίας τοῦ οἴκου ὑμῶν λαβόντες ἀπέλθατε go away with the sale of your house’s grain Gn 42,33; λαβόντες χρόνον at the appointed time 1 Ezr 9,12*1 Chr 24,31 ἔλαβον they received corr. ἔβαλον for MT ויפילו they cast (lots), cpr. 1 Sm 14,42, Est 3,7, Neh 11,1; *Jer 23,39 ἐγὼ λαμβάνω I (will) take, seize-אתישׂנ for MT יתישׁנ I will forget, cpr. Ez 39,26;*Zph 3,18 τίς ἔλαβεν who took-אשׂנ מי? ⋄אשׂנ for MT אתשׂמ the burden (of)?; *Jb 38,14 ἦ σὺ λαβών did you take-שׂהתתפ ⋄שׂתפ? for MT תתהפך ⋄הפך did it changeCf. HARL 1991=1992a 152-153; HARLÉ 1988 99.166-167; HELBING 1928, 53; LE BOULLUEC 1989, 245;MARGOLIS, M. 1906a=1972 71-74; →TWNT(→ἀναλαμβάνω, ἀντιλαμβάνω, ἀπολαμβάνω, διαλαμβάνω, ἐκλαμβάνω, ἐπιλαμβάνω, ἐπικαταλαμβάνω, καταλαμβάνω, μεταλαμβάνω, παραλαμβάνω, περιλαμβάνω, προλαμβάνω, προκαταλαμβάνω, προσλαμβάνω, συλλαμβάνω, συμπαραλαμβάνω, συμπεριλαμβάνω, συναντι-, ὑπολαμβάνω,,) -
15 υἱός
υἱός, οῦ, ὁ (Hom.+; loanw. in rabb.) prim. ‘son’① a male who is in a kinship relationship either biologically or by legal action, son, offspring, descendantⓐ the direct male issue of a person, son τέξεται υἱόν Mt 1:21; GJs 14:2 (cp. Mel., P. 8, 53 ὡς γὰρ υἱὸς τεχθείς). Cp. Mt 1:23 (Is 7:14) and 25; 10:37 (w. θυγάτηρ); Mk 12:6a; Lk 1:13, 31, 57; 11:11; 15:11 (on this JEngel, Die Parabel v. Verlorenen Sohn: ThGl 18, 1926, 54–64; MFrost, The Prodigal Son: Exp. 9th ser., 2, 1924, 56–60; EBuonaiuti, Religio 11, ’35, 398–402); Ac 7:29; Ro 9:9 (cp. Gen 18:10); Gal 4:22 al. W. gen. Mt 7:9; 20:20f; 21:37ab; Mk 6:3; 9:17; Lk 3:2; 4:22; 15:19; J 9:19f; Ac 13:21; 16:1; 23:16; Gal 4:30abc (Gen 21:10abc); Js 2:21; AcPlCor 2:29. Also ἐγὼ Φαρισαῖός εἰμι υἱὸς Φαρισαίων Ac 23:6 is prob. a ref. to direct descent. μονογενὴς υἱός (s. μονογενής 1) Lk 7:12. ὁ υἱὸς ὁ πρωτότοκος (πρωτότοκος 1) 2:7.ⓑ the immediate male offspring of an animal (Ps 28:1 υἱοὺς κριῶν; Sir 38:25. So Lat. filius: Columella 6, 37, 4) in our lit. only as foal ἐπὶ πῶλον υἱὸν ὑποζυγίου Mt 21:5 (cp. Zech 9:9 πῶλον νέον).ⓒ human offspring in an extended line of descent, descendant, son Ἰωσὴφ υἱὸς Δαυίδ Mt 1:20 (cp. Jos., Ant. 11, 73); s. 2dα below. υἱοὶ Ἰσραήλ (Ἰσραήλ 1) Mt 27:9; Lk 1:16; Ac 5:21; 7:23, 37; 9:15; 10:36; Ro 9:27; 2 Cor 3:7, 13; Hb 11:22 al.; AcPlCor 2:32. οἱ υἱοὶ Λευί (Num 26:57) Hb 7:5. υἱὸς Ἀβραάμ Lk 19:9. υἱοὶ Ἀδάμ 1 Cl 29:2 (Dt 32:8). υἱοι Ῥουβήλ GJs 6:3.ⓓ one who is accepted or legally adopted as a son (Herodian 5, 7, 1; 4; 5; Jos, Ant. 2, 263; 20, 150) Ac 7:21 (cp. Ex 2:10).—J 19:26.② a pers. related or closely associated as if by ties of sonship, son, transf. sense of 1ⓐ of a pupil, follower, or one who is otherw. a spiritual son (SIG 1169, 12 οἱ υἱοὶ τοῦ θεοῦ=the pupils and helpers [40] of Asclepius; sim. Maximus Tyr. 4, 2c; Just., D. 86, 6 οἱ υἱοὶ τῶν προφητῶν.—Some combination w. παῖδες is the favorite designation for those who are heirs of guild-secrets or who are to perpetuate a skill of some kind: Pla., Rep. 3, 407e, Leg. 6, 769b; Dionys. Hal., Comp. Verbi 22 p. 102, 4 Us./Rdm. ῥητόρων παῖδες; Lucian, Anach. 19, Dial. Mort. 11, 1 Χαλδαίων π.=dream-interpreters, Dips. 5 ἱατρῶν π., Amor. 49; Himerius, Or. 48 [=Or. 14], 13 σοφῶν π.): the ‘sons’ of the Pharisees Mt 12:27; Lk 11:19. Peter says Μᾶρκος ὁ υἱός μου 1 Pt 5:13 (perh. w. a component of endearment; s. Μᾶρκος). As a familiar form of address by a cherished mentor Hb 12:5 (Pr 3:11; ParJer 5:28; 7:24). υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες B 1:1.ⓑ of the individual members of a large and coherent group (cp. the υἷες Ἀχαιῶν in Homer; also PsSol 2:3 οἱ υἱοὶ Ἰερουσαλήμ; Dio Chrys. 71 [21], 15; LXX) οἱ υἱοὶ τοῦ λαοῦ μου 1 Cl 8:3 (scripture quot. of unknown origin). υἱοὶ γένους Ἀβραάμ Ac 13:26. οἱ υἱοὶ τῶν ἀνθρώπων (Gen 11:5; Ps 11:2, 9; 44:3; TestLevi 3:10; TestZeb 9:7; GrBar 2:4) the sons of men=humans (cp. dγ below) Mk 3:28; Eph 3:5; 1 Cl 61:2 (of the earthly rulers in contrast to the heavenly king).ⓒ of one whose identity is defined in terms of a relationship with a person or thingα. of those who are bound to a personality by close, non-material ties; it is this personality that has promoted the relationship and given it its character: son(s) of: those who believe are υἱοὶ Ἀβραάμ, because Abr. was the first whose relationship to God was based on faith Gal 3:7. In a special sense the devout, believers, are sons of God, i.e., in the light of the social context, people of special status and privilege (cp. PsSol 17:27; Just., D, 124, 1; Dio Chrys. 58 [75], 8 ὁ τοῦ Διὸς ὄντως υἱός; Epict. 1, 9, 6; 1, 3, 2; 1, 19, 9; Sextus 58; 60; 135; 376a; Dt 14:1; Ps 28:1; 72:15; Is 43:6 [w. θυγατέρες μου]; 45:11; Wsd 2:18; 5:5; 12:21 al.; Jdth 9:4, 13; Esth 8:12q; 3 Macc 6:28; SibOr 3, 702) Mt 5:45; Lk 6:35; Ro 8:14, 19 (‘Redeemer figures’ EFuchs, Die Freiheit des Glaubens, ’49, 108; against him EHommel in ThViat 4, ’52, 118, n. 26); 9:26 (Hos 2:1); 2 Cor 6:18 (w. θυγατέρες, s. Is 43:6 cited above); Gal 3:26 (cp. PsSol 17:27); 4:6a, 7ab (here the υἱός is the κληρονόμος and his opposite is the δοῦλος); Hb 2:10 (JKögel, Der Sohn u. die Söhne: Eine exeget. Studie zu Hb 2:5–18, 1904); 12:5–8 (in vs. 8 opp. νόθος, q.v.); Rv 21:7; 2 Cl 1:4; B 4:9. Corresp. there are sons of the devil (on this subj. cp. Hdb. on J 8:44) υἱὲ διαβόλου Ac 13:10. οἱ υἱοὶ τοῦ πονηροῦ (masc.) Mt 13:38b. τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ ἐν Ἅιδου ApcPt Rainer. In υἱοί ἐστε τῶν φονευσάντων τοὺς προφήτας Mt 23:31 this mng. is prob. to be combined w. sense 1c. The expr. υἱοὶ θεοῦ Mt 5:9 looks to the future (s. Betz, SM ad loc.; cp. KKöhler, StKr 91, 1918, 189f). Lk 20:36a signifies a status akin to that of angels (Ps 88:7; θεῶν παῖδες as heavenly beings: Maximus Tyr. 11, 5a; 12a; 13, 6a.—Hierocles 3, 424 the ἄγγελοι are called θεῶν παῖδες; HWindisch, Friedensbringer-Gottessöhne: ZNW 24, 1925, 240–60, discounts connection w. angels and contends for the elevation of the ordinary followers of Jesus to the status of Alexander the Great in his role as an εἰρηνηποιός [cp. Plut., Mor. 329c]; for measured critique of this view s. Betz, SM 137–42.).β. υἱός w. gen. of thing, to denote one who shares in it or who is worthy of it, or who stands in some other close relation to it, oft. made clear by the context; this constr. is prob. a Hebraism in the main, but would not appear barbaric (B-D-F §162, 6; Mlt-H. 441; Dssm., B p. 162–66 [BS 161–66]; PASA II 1884, no. 2 υἱὸς πόλεως [time of Nero; on this type of formulation SEG XXXIX, 1864]; IMagnMai 167, 5; 156, 12) οἱ υἱοὶ τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου (αἰών 2a) Lk 16:8a (opp. οἱ υἱοί τοῦ φωτός vs. 8b); 20:34. τῆς ἀναστάσεως υἱοί (to Mediterranean publics the functional equivalent of ἀθάνατοι ‘immortals’; cp. ἀνάστασις 2b) 20:36b. υἱοὶ τῆς ἀνομίας (ἀνομία 1; cp. CD 6:15) Hv 3, 6, 1; ApcPt 1:3; τῆς ἀπειθείας (s. ἀπείθεια) Eph 2:2; 5:6; Col 3:6; τῆς ἀπωλείας ApcPt 1:2. ὁ υἱὸς τῆς ἀπωλείας of Judas the informer J 17:12 (cp. similar expressions in Eur., Hec. 425; Menand., Dyscolus 88f: s. FDanker, NTS 7, ’60/61, 94), of the end-time adversary 2 Th 2:3. υἱοὶ τῆς βασιλείας (βασιλεία 1bη; s. SEG XXXIX, 1864 for related expressions) Mt 8:12; 13:38a. υἱοὶ βροντῆς Mk 3:17 (s. Βοανηργές). υἱὸς γεέννης (s. γέεννα) Mt 23:15; τ. διαθήκης (PsSol 17:15) Ac 3:25; εἰρήνης Lk 10:6. υἱοὶ τοῦ νυμφῶνος (s. νυμφών) Mt 9:15; Mk 2:19; Lk 5:34. υἱὸς παρακλήσεως Ac 4:36 (s. Βαρναβᾶς). υἱοὶ (τοῦ) φωτός (Hippol., Ref. 6, 47, 4 in gnostic speculation) Lk 16:8b (opp. υἱοὶ τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου); J 12:36. υἱοὶ φωτός ἐστε καὶ υἱοὶ ἡμέρας 1 Th 5:5 (EBuonaiuti, ‘Figli del giorno e della luce’ [1 Th 5:5]: Rivista storico-critica delle Scienze teol. 6, 1910, 89–93).ⓓ in various combinations as a designation of the Messiah and a self-designation of Jesusα. υἱὸς Δαυίδ son of David of the Messiah (PsSol 17:21) Mt 22:42–45; Mk 12:35–37; Lk 20:41–44; B 12:10c. Specif. of Jesus as Messiah Mt 1:1a; 9:27; 12:23; 15:22; 20:30f; 21:9, 15; Mk 10:47f; Lk 18:38f.—WWrede, Jesus als Davidssohn: Vorträge u. Studien 1907, 147–77; WBousset, Kyrios Christos2 1921, 4, Rel.3 226f; ELohmeyer, Gottesknecht u. Davidssohn ’45, esp. 68; 72; 77; 84; TNicklin, Gospel Gleanings ’50, 251–56; WMichaelis, Die Davidsohnschaft Jesu usw., in D. histor. Jesus u. d. kerygm. Christus, ed. Ristow and Matthiae, ’61, 317–30; LFisher, ECColwell Festschr. ’68, 82–97.β. ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ θεοῦ, υἱὸς θεοῦ (the) Son of God (for the phrase s. JosAs 6:2 al. Ἰωσὴφ ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ θεοῦ; there is no undisputed evidence of usage as messianic title in pre-Christian Judaism [s. Dalman, Worte 219–24, Eng. tr. 268–89; Bousset, Kyrios Christos2 53f; EHuntress, ‘Son of God’ in Jewish Writings Prior to the Christian Era: JBL 54, ’35, 117–23]; cp. 4Q 246 col. 2, 1 [JFitzmyer, A Wandering Aramean ’79, 90–93; JCollins, BRev IX/3, ’93, 34–38, 57]. Among polytheists on the other hand, sons of the gods in a special sense [s. Just., A I, 21, 1f] are not only known to myth and legend, but definite historical personalities are also designated as such. Among them are famous wise men such as Pythagoras and Plato [HUsener, Das Weihnachtsfest2 1911, 71ff], and deified rulers, above all the Roman emperors since the time of Augustus [oft. in ins and pap: Dssm., B 166f=BS 166f, LO 294f=LAE 346f; Thieme 33]. According to Memnon [I B.C./ I A.D.]: 434 Fgm. 1, 1, 1 Jac., Clearchus [IV B.C.] carried his boasting so far as Διὸς υἱὸν ἑαυτὸν ἀνειπεῖν. Also, persons who were active at that time as prophets and wonder-workers laid claim to the title υἱὸς τοῦ θεοῦ, e.g. the Samaritan Dositheus in Origen, C. Cels. 6, 11; sim. an Indian wise man who calls himself Διὸς υἱός Arrian, Anab. 7, 2, 3; cp. Did., Gen. 213, 18 ὁ Ἀβρὰμ υἱὸς θεοῦ διὰ δικαιοσύνην. S. GWetter, ‘Der Sohn Gottes’ 1916; Hdb. exc. on J 1:34; s. also Clemen2 76ff; ENorden, Die Geburt des Kindes 1924, 75; 91f; 132; 156f; EKlostermann, Hdb. exc. on Mk 1:11 [4th ed. ’50]; M-JLagrange, Les origines du dogme paulinien de la divinité de Christ: RB 45, ’36, 5–33; HPreisker, Ntl. Zeitgesch. ’37, 187–208; HBraun, ZTK 54, ’57, 353–64; ANock, ‘Son of God’ in Paul. and Hellen. Thought: Gnomon 33, ’61, 581–90 [=Essays on Religion and the Anc. World II, ’72, 928–39]—originality in Paul’s thought): Ps 2:7 is applied to Jesus υἱός μου εἶ σύ, ἐγὼ σήμερον γεγέννηκά σε Lk 3:22 D; GEb 18, 37.—Ac 13:33; Hb 1:5a; 5:5; 1 Cl 36:4. Likew. Hos 11:1 (w. significant changes): Mt 2:15, and 2 Km 7:14: Hb 1:5b. The voice of God calls him ὁ υἱός μου ὁ ἀγαπητός (s. ἀγαπητός 1) at his baptism Mt 3:17; Mk 1:11; Lk 3:22; GEb 18, 37 and 39 and at the Transfiguration Mt 17:5; Mk 9:7; Lk 9:35 (here ἐκλελεγμένος instead of ἀγαπ.); 2 Pt 1:17. Cp. J 1:34. The angel at the Annunciation uses these expressions in referring to him: υἱὸς ὑψίστου Lk 1:32; GJs 11:3 and υἱὸς θεοῦ Lk 1:35 (Ar. 15, 1 ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ θεοῦ τοῦ ὑψίστου. Cp. Just., A I, 23, 2 μόνος ἰδίως υἱὸς τῷ θεῷ γεγέννηται). The centurion refers to him at the crucifixion as υἱὸς θεοῦ Mt 27:54; Mk 15:39; GPt 11:45; cp. vs. 46 (CMann, ET 20, 1909, 563f; JPobee, The Cry of the Centurion, A Cry of Defeat: CFDMoule Festschr. ’70, 91–102; EJohnson, JSNT 31, ’87, 3–22 [an indefinite affirmation of Jesus]). The high priest asks εἰ σὺ εἶ ὁ Χριστὸς ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ θεοῦ Mt 26:63 (DCatchpole, NTS 17, ’71, 213–26). Passers-by ask him to show that he is God’s Son 27:40; sim. the devil 4:3, 6; Lk 4:3, 9. On the other hand, evil spirits address him as the Son of God Mt 8:29; Mk 3:11; 5:7; Lk 4:41; 8:28; and disciples testify that he is Mt 14:33; 16:16. S. also Mk 1:1 (s. SLegg, Ev. Sec. Marc. ’35).—Jesus also refers to himself as Son of God, though rarely apart fr. the Fourth Gosp.: Mt 28:19 (the Risen Lord in the trinitarian baptismal formula); Mt 21:37f=Mk 12:6 (an allusion in the parable of the vinedressers).—Mt 27:43; Mk 13:32; Rv 2:18. The main pass. is the so-called Johannine verse in the synoptics Mt 11:27=Lk 10:22 (s. PSchmiedel, PM 4, 1900,1–22; FBurkitt, JTS 12, 1911, 296f; HSchumacher, Die Selbstoffenbarung Jesu bei Mt 11:27 [Lk 10:22] 1912 [lit.]; Norden, Agn. Th. 277–308; JWeiss, Heinrici Festschr. 1914, 120–29, Urchristentum 1917, 87ff; Bousset, Kyrios Christos2 1921, 45ff; EMeyer I 280ff; RBultmann, Gesch. d. synopt. Trad.2 ’31, 171f; MDibelius, Die Formgeschichte des Evangeliums2 ’33, 259; MRist, Is Mt 11:25–30 a Primitive Baptismal Hymn? JR 15, ’35, 63–77; TArvedson, D. Mysterium Christi: E. Studie zu Mt 11:25–30, ’37; WDavies, ‘Knowledge’ in the Dead Sea Scrolls and Mt 11:25–30, HTR 45, ’53, 113–39; WGrundmann, Sohn Gottes, ZNW 47, ’56, 113–33; JBieneck, Sohn Gottes als Christusbez. der Synopt. ’51; PWinter, Mt 11:27 and Lk 10:22: NovT 1, ’56, 112–48; JJocz, Judaica 13, ’57, 129–42; OMichel/OBetz, Von Gott Gezeugt, Beih. ZNW [Jeremias Festschr.] 26, ’60, 3–23 [Qumran]).—Apart fr. the synoptics, testimony to Jesus as the Son of God is found in many parts of our lit. Oft. in Paul: Ro 1:3, 4, 9; 5:10; 8:3, 29, 32; 1 Cor 1:9; 15:28; 2 Cor 1:19; Gal 1:16; 2:20; 4:4; Eph 4:13; Col 1:13; 1 Th 1:10. Cp. Ac 9:20. In Hb: 1:2, 8; 4:14; 5:8; 6:6; 7:3, 28; 10:29. In greatest frequency in John (cp. Herm. Wr. 1, 6 the Λόγος as υἱὸς θεοῦ. Likew. Philo, Agr. 51 πρωτόγονος υἱός, Conf. Lingu. 146 υἱὸς θεοῦ.—Theoph. Ant. 2, 1 [p. 154, 12] ὁ λόγος ὁ τοῦ θεοῦ, ὅς ἐστιν καὶ υἱὸς αὐτοῦ; Iren. 3, 12, 2 [Harv. II 55, 2]): J 1:49; 3:16–18 (s. μονογενής 2), 35f; 5:19–26; 6:40; 8:35f; 10:36; 11:4, 27; 14:13; 17:1; 19:7; 20:31; 1J 1:3, 7; 2:22–24; 3:8, 23; 4:9f, 14f; 5:5, 9–13, 20; 2J 3, 9.—B 5:9, 11; 7:2, 9; 12:8; 15:5; Dg 7:4; 9:2, 4; 10:2 (τὸν υἱὸν αὐτοῦ τὸν μονογενῆ; also ApcEsdr 6:16 p. 31, 22 Tdf.; ApcSed 9:1f); IMg 8:2; ISm 1:1; MPol 17:3; Hv 2, 2, 8; Hs 5, 2, 6 (ὁ υἱὸς αὐτοῦ ὁ ἀγαπητός); 8; 11; 5, 4, 1; 5, 5, 2; 3; 5; 5, 6, 1; 2; 4; 7 (on the Christology of the Shepherd s. Dibelius, Hdb. on Hs 5, also ALink and JvWalter [πνεῦμα 5cα]); Hs 8, 3, 2; 8, 11, 1. Cp. 9, 1, 1; 9, 12, 1ff.—In trinitarian formulas, in addition to Mt 28:19, also IMg 13:1; EpilMosq 5; D 7:1, 3.—The deceiver of the world appears w. signs and wonders ὡς υἱὸς θεοῦ D 16:4 (ApcEsdr 4:27 p. 28, 32 Tdf. ὁ λέγων• Ἐγώ εἰμι ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ θεοῦ [of Antichrist]).—EKühl, Das Selbstbewusstsein Jesu 1907, 16–44; GVos, The Self-disclosure of Jesus 1926.—EBurton, ICC Gal 1921, 404–17; TNicklin, Gospel Gleanings ’50, 211–36; MHengel, The Son of God (tr. JBowden) ’76; DJones, The Title υἱὸς θεοῦ in Acts: SBLSP 24, ’85, 451–63.γ. ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου lit. ‘the son of the man’ (the pl. form οἱ υἱοὶ τῶν ἀνθρώπων appears freq. in the LXX to render בְּנֵי אָדָם = mortals, e.g. Gen 11:5; Ps 10:4; 11:2; cp. ὁ υἱὸς τῆς ἀπολείας J 17:12 [s. 2cβ]) ‘the human being, the human one, the man’ in our lit. only as a byname in ref. to Jesus and in an exclusive sense the Human One, the Human Being, one intimately linked with humanity in its primary aspect of fragility yet transcending it, traditionally rendered ‘the Son of Man.’ The term is found predom. in the gospels, where it occurs in the synoptics about 70 times (about half as oft. if parallels are excluded), and in J 12 times (s. EKlostermann, Hdb. exc. on Mk 8:31). In every case the title is applied by Jesus to himself. Nowhere within a saying or narrative about him is it found in an address to him: Mt 8:20; 9:6; 10:23; 11:19; 12:8, 32, 40; 13:37, 41; 16:13, 27f; 17:9, 12, 22; 18:10 [11] v.l.; 19:28; 20:18, 28; 24:27, 30, 37, 39, 44; 25:13 v.l., 31; 26:2, 24ab, 45, 64; Mk 2:10, 28; 8:31, 38; 9:9, 12, 31; 10:33, 45; 13:26; 14:21ab, 41, 62; Lk 5:24; 6:5, 22; 7:34; 9:22, 26, 44, 56 v.l., 58; 11:30; 12:8, 10, 40; 17:22, 24, 26, 30; 18:8, 31; 19:10; 21:27, 36; 22:22, 48, 69; 24:7.—John (FGrosheide, Υἱὸς τ. ἀνθρ. in het Evang. naar Joh.: TSt 35, 1917, 242–48; HDieckmann, D. Sohn des Menschen im J: Scholastik 2, 1927, 229–47; HWindisch, ZNW 30, ’31, 215–33; 31, ’32, 199–204; WMichaelis, TLZ 85, ’60, 561–78 [Jesus’ earthly presence]) 1:51; 3:13, 14; 5:27 (BVawter, Ezekiel and John, CBQ 26, ’64, 450–58); 6:27, 53, 62; 8:28; 9:35; 12:23, 34; 13:31. Whether the component of fragility (suggested by OT usage in ref. to the brief span of human life and the ills to which it falls heir) or high status (suggested by traditions that appear dependent on Da 7:13, which refers to one ‘like a human being’), or a blend of the two dominates a specific occurrence can be determined only by careful exegesis that in addition to extra-biblical traditions takes account of the total literary structure of the document in which it occurs. Much neglected in the discussion is the probability of prophetic association suggested by the form of address Ezk 2:1 al. (like the OT prophet [Ezk 3:4–11] Jesus encounters resistance).—On Israelite thought contemporary w. Jesus and alleged knowledge of a heavenly being looked upon as a ‘Son of Man’ or ‘Man’, who exercises Messianic functions such as judging the world (metaph., pictorial passages in En 46–48; 4 Esdr 13:3, 51f) s. Bousset, Rel.3 352–55; NMessel, D. Menschensohn in d. Bilderreden d. Hen. 1922; ESjöberg, Kenna 1 Henok och 4 Esra tanken på den lidande Människosonen? Sv. Ex. Årsb. 5, ’40, 163–83, D. Menschensohn im äth. Hen. ’46. This view is in some way connected w. Da 7:13; acc. to some it derives its real content fr. an eschatological tradition that ultimately goes back to Iran (WBousset, Hauptprobleme der Gnosis 1907, 160–223; Reitzenstein, Erlösungsmyst. 119ff, ZNW 20, 1921, 18–22, Mysterienrel.3 418ff; Clemen2 72ff; CKraeling, Anthropos and Son of Man: A Study in the Religious Syncretism of the Hellenistic Orient 1927); acc. to this tradition the First Man was deified; he will return in the last times and usher in the Kingdom of God.—Outside the gospels: Ac 7:56 (v.l. τοῦ θεοῦ; GKilpatrick, TZ 21, ’65, 209); Rv 1:13; 14:14 (both after Da 7:13; sim. allusion to Da in Just., D. 31, 1). The quot. fr. Ps 8:5 in Hb 2:6 prob. does not belong here, since there is no emphasis laid on υἱὸς ἀνθρώπου. In IEph 20:2 Jesus is described as υἱὸς ἀνθρώπου καὶ υἱὸς θεοῦ. Differently B 12:10 Ἰησοῦς, οὐχὶ υἱὸς ἀνθρώπου ἀλλὰ υἱὸς τοῦ θεοῦ Jesus, not a man’s son, but Son of God.—HLietzmann, Der Menschensohn 1896; Dalman, Worte 191–219 (Eng. tr., 234–67); Wlh., Einl.2 123–30; PFiebig, Der Menschensohn 1901; NSchmidt, The Prophet of Nazareth 1905, 94–134, Recent Study of the Term ‘Son of Man’: JBL 45, 1926, 326–49; FTillmann, Der Menschensohn 1907; EKühl, Das Selbstbewusstsein Jesu 1907, 65ff; HHoltzmann, Das messianische Bewusstsein Jesu, 1907, 49–75 (lit.), Ntl. Theologie2 I 1911, 313–35; FBard, D. Sohn d. Menschen 1908; HGottsched, D. Menschensohn 1908; EAbbott, ‘The Son of Man’, etc., 1910; EHertlein, Die Menschensohnfrage im letzten Stadium 1911, ZNW 19, 1920, 46–48; JMoffatt, The Theology of the Gospels 1912, 150–63; WBousset, Kyrios Christos2 1921, 5–22 (the titles of the works by Wernle and Althaus opposing his first edition [1913], as well as Bousset’s answer, are found s.v. κύριος, end); DVölter, Jesus der Menschensohn 1914, Die Menschensohnfrage neu untersucht 1916; FSchulthess, ZNW 21, 1922, 247–50; Rtzst., Herr der Grösse 1919 (see also the works by the same author referred to above in this entry); EMeyer II 335ff; HGressmann, ZKG n.s. 4, 1922, 170ff, D. Messias 1929, 341ff; GDupont, Le Fils d’Homme 1924; APeake, The Messiah and the Son of Man 1924; MWagner, Der Menschensohn: NKZ 36, 1925, 245–78; Guillaume Baldensperger, Le Fils d’Homme: RHPR 5, 1925, 262–73; WBleibtreu, Jesu Selbstbez. als der Menschensohn: StKr 98/99, 1926, 164–211; AvGall, Βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ 1926; OProcksch, D. Menschensohn als Gottessohn: Christentum u. Wissensch. 3, 1927, 425–43; 473–81; CMontefiore, The Synoptic Gospels2 1927 I 64–80; ROtto, Reich Gottes u. Menschensohn ’34, Eng. tr. The Kgdm. of God and the Son of Man, tr. Filson and Woolf2 ’43; EWechssler, Hellas im Ev. ’36, 332ff; PParker, The Mng. of ‘Son of Man’: JBL 60, ’41, 151–57; HSharman, Son of Man and Kingdom of God ’43; JCampbell, The Origin and Mng. of the Term Son of Man: JTS 48, ’47, 145–55; HRiesenfeld, Jésus Transfiguré ’47, 307–13 (survey and lit.); TManson, ConNeot 11, ’47, 138–46 (Son of Man=Jesus and his disciples in Mk 2:27f); GDuncan, Jesus, Son of Man ’47, 135–53 (survey); JBowman, ET 59, ’47/48, 283–88 (background); MBlack, ET 60, ’48f, 11–15; 32–36; GKnight, Fr. Moses to Paul ’49, 163–72 (survey); TNicklin, Gospel Gleanings ’50, 237–50; TManson (Da, En and gospels), BJRL 32, ’50, 171–93; TPreiss, Le Fils d’Homme: ÉThR 26/3, ’51, Life in Christ, ’54, 43–60; SMowinckel, He That Cometh, tr. Anderson, ’54, 346–450; GIber, Überlieferungsgesch. Unters. z. Begriff des Menschensohnes im NT, diss. Heidelb. ’53; ESjöberg, D. verborgene Menschensohn in den Ev. ’55; WGrundmann, ZNW 47, ’56, 113–33; HRiesenfeld, The Mythological Backgrd. of NT Christology, CHDodd Festschr. ’56, 81–95; PhVielhauer, Gottesreich u. Menschensohn in d. Verk. Jesu, GDehn Festschr. ’57, 51–79; ESidebottom, The Son of Man in J, ET 68, ’57, 231–35; 280–83; AHiggins, Son of Man- Forschung since (Manson’s) ‘The Teaching of Jesus’: NT Essays (TW Manson memorial vol.) ’59, 119–35; HTödt, D. Menschensohn in d. synopt. Überl. ’59 (tr. Barton ’65); JMuilenburg, JBL 79, ’60, 197–209 (Da, En); ESchweizer, JBL 79, ’60, 119–29 and NTS 9, ’63, 256–61; BvIersel, ‘Der Sohn’ in den synopt. Jesusworten, ’61 (community?); MBlack, BJRL 45, ’63, 305–18; FBorsch, ATR 45, ’63, 174–90; AHiggins, Jesus and the Son of Man, ’64; RFormesyn, NovT 8, ’66, 1–35 (barnasha=‘I’); SSandmel, HSilver Festschr. ’63, 355–67; JJeremias, Die älteste Schicht der Menschensohn-Logien, ZNW 58, ’67, 159–72; GVermes, MBlack, Aram. Approach3, ’67, 310–30; BLindars, The New Look on the Son of Man: BJRL 63, ’81, 437–62; WWalker, The Son of Man, Some Recent Developments CBQ 45, ’83, 584–607; JDonahue, Recent Studies on the Origin of ‘Son of Man’ in the Gospels, CBQ 48, ’86, 584–607; DBurkitt, The Nontitular Son of Man, A History and Critique: NTS 40, ’94 504–21 (lit.); JEllington, BT 40, ’89, 201–8; RGordon, Anthropos: 108–13.—B. 105; DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. Sv. -
16 ὡς
ὡς (Hom.+; loanw. in rabb.) relative adv. of the relative pron. ὅς. It is used as① a comparative particle, marking the manner in which someth. proceeds, as, likeⓐ corresponding to οὕτως=‘so, in such a way’: σωθήσεται, οὕτως ὡς διὰ πυρός he will be saved, (but only) in such a way as (one, in an attempt to save oneself, must go) through fire (and therefore suffer fr. burns) 1 Cor 3:15. τὴν ἑαυτοῦ γυναῖκα οὕτως ἀγαπάτω ὡς ἑαυτόν Eph 5:33; cp. vs. 28. ἡμέρα κυρίου ὡς κλέπτης οὕτως ἔρχεται 1 Th 5:2. The word οὕτως can also be omitted ἀσφαλίσασθε ὡς οἴδατε make it as secure as you know how = as you can Mt 27:65. ὡς οὐκ οἶδεν αὐτός (in such a way) as he himself does not know = he himself does not know how, without his knowing (just) how Mk 4:27. ὡς ἀνῆκεν (in such a way) as is fitting Col 3:18. Cp. 4:4; Eph 6:20; Tit 1:5 (cp. Just., A I, 3, 1 ὡς πρέπον ἐστίν). ὡς πᾶσα γυνὴ γεννᾷ GJs 11:2; ὡς ἀπεκαλύφθη AcPlCor 1:8.ⓑ special usesα. in ellipses (TestAbr A 12 p. 90, 22 [Stone p. 28] θρόνος … ἐξαστράπτων ὡς πῦρ; TestJob 20:3 χρήσασθαι … ὡς ἐβούλετο; JosAs 12:7 πρὸς σὲ κατέφυγον ὡς παιδίον ἐπὶ τὸν πατέρα) ἐλάλουν ὡς νήπιος I used to speak as a child (is accustomed to speak) 1 Cor 13:11a; cp. bc; Mk 10:15; Eph 6:6a; Phil 2:22; Col 3:22. ὡς τέκνα φωτὸς περιπατεῖτε walk as (is appropriate for) children of light Eph 5:8; cp. 6:6b. ὡς ἐν ἡμέρᾳ as (it is one’s duty to walk) in the daylight Ro 13:13. The Israelites went through the Red Sea ὡς διὰ ξηρᾶς γῆς as (one travels) over dry land Hb 11:29. οὐ λέγει ὡς ἐπὶ πολλῶν ἀλλʼ ὡς ἐφʼ ἑνός he speaks not as one would of a plurality (s. ἐπί 8), but as of a single thing Gal 3:16.—Ro 15:15; 1 Pt 5:3. Also referring back to οὕτως (GrBar 6:16 ὡς γὰρ τὰ δίστομα οὕτως καὶ ὁ ἀλέκτωρ μηνύει τοῖς ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ like articulate beings the rooster informs earth’s inhabitants) οὕτως τρέχω ὡς οὐκ ἀδήλως I run as (a person) with a fixed goal 1 Cor 9:26a. Cp. ibid. b; Js 2:12.β. ὡς and the words that go w. it can be the subj. or obj., of a clause: γενηθήτω σοι ὡς θέλεις let it be done (= it will be done) for you as you wish Mt 15:28. Cp. 8:13; Lk 14:22 v.l. (for ὅ; cp. ὡς τὸ θέλημά σου OdeSol 11:21). The predicate belonging to such a subj. is to be supplied in οὐχ ὡς ἐγὼ θέλω (γενηθήτω) Mt 26:39a.—ἐποίησεν ὡς προσέταξεν αὐτῷ ὁ ἄγγελος he did as (= that which) the angel commanded him (to do) Mt 1:24; cp. 26:19 (on the structure s. RPesch, BZ 10, ’66, 220–45; 11, ’67, 79–95; cp. the formula Job 42:9 and the contrasting negation Ex 1:17; s. also Ex 3:21f); 28:15.—Practically equivalent to ὅ, which is a v.l. for it Mk 14:72 (JBirdsall, NovT 2, ’58, 272–75; cp. Lk 14:22 above).γ. ἕκαστος ὡς each one as or according to what Ro 12:3; 1 Cor 3:5; 7:17ab; Rv 22:12. ὡς ἦν δυνατὸς ἕκαστος each person interpreted them as best each could Papias (2:16).δ. in indirect questions (X., Cyr. 1, 5, 11 ἀπαίδευτοι ὡς χρὴ συμμάχοις χρῆσθαι) ἐξηγοῦντο ὡς ἐγνώσθη αὐτοῖς ἐν τῇ κλάσει τοῦ ἄρτου they told how he had made himself known to them when they broke bread together Lk 24:35. Cp. Mk 12:26 v.l. (for πῶς); Lk 8:47; 23:55; Ac 10:38; 20:20; Ro 11:2; 2 Cor 7:15.② a conjunction marking a point of comparison, as. This ‘as’ can have a ‘so’ expressly corresponding to it or not, as the case may be; further, both sides of the comparison can be expressed in complete clauses, or one or even both may be abbreviated.ⓐ ὡς is correlative w. οὕτως=so. οὕτως … ὡς (so, in such a way) … as: οὐδέποτε ἐλάλησεν οὕτως ἄνθρωπος ὡς οὗτος λαλεῖ ὁ ἄνθρωπος J 7:46. ὡς … οὕτως Ac 8:32 (Is 53:7); 23:11; Ro 5:15 (ὡς τὸ παράπτωμα, οὕτως καὶ τὸ χάρισμα, both halves to be completed), 18. ὡς κοινωνοί ἐστε τῶν παθημάτων, οὕτως καὶ τῆς παρακλήσεως as you are comrades in suffering, so (shall you be) in comfort as well 2 Cor 1:7. Cp. 7:14; 11:3 v.l.—ὡς … καί as … so (Plut., Mor. 39e; Ath. 15, 2) Mt 6:10; Ac 7:51; 2 Cor 13:2; Gal 1:9; Phil 1:20.ⓑ The clause beginning w. ὡς can easily be understood and supplied in many cases; when this occurs, the noun upon which the comparison depends can often stand alone, and in these cases ὡς acts as a particle denoting comparison. οἱ δίκαιοι ἐκλάμψουσιν ὡς ὁ ἥλιος the righteous will shine out as the sun (shines) Mt 13:43. ὡς ἐπὶ λῃστὴν ἐξήλθατε συλλαβεῖν με as (one goes out) against a robber, (so) you have gone out to arrest me 26:55 (Mel., P. 79, 574 ὡς ἐπὶ φόνιον λῄστην). γίνεσθε φρόνιμοι ὡς οἱ ὄφεις be (as) wise as serpents (are) 10:16b. Cp. Lk 12:27; 21:35; 22:31; J 15:6; 2 Ti 2:17; 1 Pt 5:8.ⓒ Semitic infl. is felt in the manner in which ὡς, combined w. a subst., takes the place of a subst. or an adj.α. a substantiveא. as subj. (cp. Da 7:13 ὡς υἱὸς ἀνθρώπου ἤρχετο; cp. 10:16, 18) ἐνώπιον τοῦ θρόνου (ἦν) ὡς θάλασσα ὑαλίνη before the throne there was something like a sea of glass Rv 4:6. Cp. 8:8; 9:7a. ἀφʼ ἑνὸς ἐγενήθησαν ὡς ἡ ἄμμος from one man they have come into being as the sand, i.e. countless descendants Hb 11:12.ב. as obj. (JosAs 17:6 εἶδεν Ἀσενὲθ ὡς ἅρμα πυρός) ᾂδουσιν ὡς ᾠδὴν καινήν they were singing, as it were, a new song Rv 14:3. ἤκουσα ὡς φωνήν I heard what sounded like a shout 19:1, 6abc; cp. 6:1.β. as adjective, pred. (mostly εἶναι, γίνεσθαι ὡς; the latter also in rendering of ךְּ to express the basic reality of something: GDelling, Jüd. Lehre u. Frömmigkeit ’67, p. 58, on ParJer 9:7) ἐὰν μὴ γένησθε ὡς τὰ παιδία if you do not become child-like Mt 18:3. ὡς ἄγγελοί εἰσιν they are similar to angels 22:30. πᾶσα σὰρξ ὡς χόρτος 1 Pt 1:24. Cp. Mk 6:34; 12:25; Lk 22:26ab; Ro 9:27 (Is 10:22); 29a (Is 1:9a); 1 Cor 4:13; 7:7f, 29–31; 9:20f; 2 Pt 3:8ab (Ps 89:4); Rv 6:12ab al. (cp. GrBar 14:1 ἐγένετο φωνὴ ὡς βροντή). Sim. also ποίησόν με ὡς ἕνα τῶν μισθίων σου treat me like one of your day laborers Lk 15:19.—The adj. or adjectival expr. for which this form stands may be used as an attribute πίστιν ὡς κόκκον σινάπεως faith like a mustard seed=faith no greater than a tiny mustard seed Mt 17:20; Lk 17:6. προφήτης ὡς εἷς τῶν προφητῶν Mk 6:15. Cp. Ac 3:22; 7:37 (both Dt 18:15); 10:11; 11:5. ἐγένετο ὡς εἷς τῶν φευγόντων AcPl Ha 5, 18. ἀρνίον ὡς ἐσφαγμένον a lamb that appeared to have been slaughtered Rv 5:6.—In expressions like τρίχας ὡς τρίχας γυναικῶν 9:8a the second τρίχας can be omitted as self-evident (Ps 54:7 v.l.): ἡ φωνὴ ὡς σάλπιγγος 4:1; cp. 1:10; 9:8b; 13:2a; 14:2c; 16:3.ⓓ other noteworthy usesα. ὡς as can introduce an example ὡς καὶ Ἠλίας ἐποίησεν Lk 9:54 v.l.; cp. 1 Pt 3:6; or, in the combination ὡς γέγραπται, a scripture quotation Mk 1:2 v.l.; 7:6; Lk 3:4; Ac 13:33; cp. Ro 9:25; or even an authoritative human opinion Ac 17:28; 22:5; 25:10; or any other decisive reason Mt 5:48; 6:12 (ὡς καί).β. ὡς introduces short clauses: ὡς εἰώθει as his custom was Mk 10:1. Cp. Hs 5, 1, 2. ὡς λογίζομαι as I think 1 Pt 5:12. ὡς ἐνομίζετο as was supposed Lk 3:23 (Diog. L. 3, 2 ὡς Ἀθήνησιν ἦν λόγος [about Plato’s origin]; TestAbr A 5 p. 82, 32 [Stone p. 12] ὡς ἐμοὶ δοκεῖ; Just., A I, 6, 2 ὡς ἐδιδάχθημεν). ὡς ἦν as he was Mk 4:36. ὡς ἔφην Papias (2:15) (ApcMos 42; cp. Just., A I, 21, 6 ὡς προέφημεν).γ. The expr. οὕτως ἐστὶν ἡ βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ ὡς ἄνθρωπος βάλῃ τὸν σπόρον Mk 4:26 may well exhibit colloquial syntax; but some think that ἄν (so one v.l. [=ἐάν, which is read by many mss.]) once stood before ἄνθρωπος and was lost inadvertently. S. the comm., e.g. EKlostermann, Hdb. z. NT4 ’50 ad loc.; s. also Jülicher, Gleichn. 539; B-D-F §380, 4; Mlt. 185 w. notes; Rdm.2 154; Rob. 928; 968.③ marker introducing the perspective from which a pers., thing, or activity is viewed or understood as to character, function, or role, asⓐ w. focus on quality, circumstance, or roleα. as (JosAs 26:7 ἔγνω … Λευὶς … ταῦτα πάντα ὡς προφήτης; Just., A I, 7, 4 ἵνα ὡς ἄδικος κολάζηται) τί ἔτι κἀγὼ ὡς ἁμαρτωλὸς κρίνομαι; why am I still being condemned as a sinner? Ro 3:7. ὡς σοφὸς ἀρχιτέκτων 1 Cor 3:10. ὡς ἀρτιγέννητα βρέφη as newborn children (in reference to desire for maternal milk) 1 Pt 2:2. μή τις ὑμῶν πασχέτω ὡς φονεύς 4:15a; cp. b, 16.—1:14; 1 Cor 7:25; 2 Cor 6:4; Eph 5:1; Col 3:12; 1 Th 2:4, 7a.—In the oblique cases, genitive (ApcSed 16:2 ὡς νέου αὐτοῦ ἐπαράβλεπον τὰ πταίσματα αὐτοῦ; Just., A I, 14, 4 ὑμέτερον ἔστω ὡς δυνατῶν βασιλέων): τιμίῳ αἵματι ὡς ἀμνοῦ ἀμώμου Χριστοῦ with the precious blood of Christ, as of a lamb without blemish 1 Pt 1:19. δόξαν ὡς μονογενοῦς παρὰ πατρός glory as of an only-begotten son, coming from the Father J 1:14. Cp. Hb 12:27. Dative (Ath. 14, 2 θύουσιν ὡς θεοῖς; 28, 3 πιστεύειν ὡς μυθοποιῷ; Stephan. Byz. s.v. Κυνόσαργες: Ἡρακλεῖ ὡς θεῷ θύων): λαλῆσαι ὑμῖν ὡς πνευματικοῖς 1 Cor 3:1a; cp. bc; 10:15; 2 Cor 6:13; Hb 12:5; 1 Pt 2:13f; 3:7ab; 2 Pt 1:19. Accusative (JosAs 22:8 ἠγάπα αὐτὸν ὡς ἄνδρα προφήτην; Just., A I, 4, 4 τὸ ὄνομα ὡς ἔλεγχον λαμβάνετε; Tat. 27, 1 ὡς ἀθεωτάτους ἡμᾶς ἐκκηρύσσετε; Ath. 16, 4 οὐ προσκυνῶ αὐτὰ ὡς θεοὺς): οὐχ ὡς θεὸν ἐδόξασαν Ro 1:21; 1 Cor 4:14; 8:7; Tit 1:7; Phlm 16; Hb 6:19; 11:9. παρακαλῶ ὡς παροίκους καὶ παρεπιδήμους 1 Pt 2:11 (from the perspective of their conversion experience the recipients of the letter are compared to temporary residents and disenfranchised foreigners, cp. the imagery 1 Pt 1:19 above and s. παρεπίδημος and πάροικος 2).—This is prob. also the place for ὸ̔ ἐὰν ποιῆτε, ἐργάζεσθε ὡς τῷ κυρίῳ whatever you have to do, do it as work for the Lord Col 3:23. Cp. Eph 5:22. εἴ τις λαλεῖ ὡς λόγια θεοῦ if anyone preaches, (let the pers. do so) as if (engaged in proclaiming the) words of God 1 Pt 4:11a; cp. ibid. b; 2 Cor 2:17bc; Eph 6:5, 7.β. ὡς w. ptc. gives the reason for an action as one who, because (X., Cyr. 7, 5, 13 κατεγέλων τῆς πολιορκίας ὡς ἔχοντες τὰ ἐπιτήδεια; Appian, Liby. 56 §244 μέμφεσθαι τοῖς θεοῖς ὡς ἐπιβουλεύουσι=as being hostile; Polyaenus 2, 1, 1; 3, 10, 3 ὡς ἔχων=just as if he had; TestAbr B 8 p. 112, 17 [Stone p. 72] ὡς αὐτῷ ὄντι φίλῳ μου (do it for) him [Abraham] as a friend of mine; TestJob 17:5 καθʼ ἡμῶν ὡς τυραννούντων against us as though we were tyrants; ApcMos 23 ὡς νομίζοντες on the assumption that (we would not be discovered); Jos., Ant. 1, 251; Ath. 16, 1 ὁ δὲ κόσμος οὐχ ὡς δεομένου τοῦ θεοῦ γέγονεν; SIG 1168, 35); Paul says: I appealed to the Emperor οὐχ ὡς τοῦ ἔθνους μου ἔχων τι κατηγορεῖν not that I had any charge to bring against my (own) people Ac 28:19 (PCairZen 44, 23 [257 B.C.] οὐχ ὡς μενῶν=not as if it were my purpose to remain there). ὡς foll. by the gen. abs. ὡς τὰ πάντα ἡμῖν τῆς θείας δυνάμεως αὐτοῦ δεδωρημένης because his divine power has granted us everything 2 Pt 1:3. Cp. Dg. 5:16.—Only in isolated instances does ὡς show causal force when used w. a finite verb for, seeing that (PLeid 16, 1, 20; Lucian, Dial. Mort. 17, 2, end, Vit. Auct. 25; Aesop, Fab. 109 P.=148 H.; 111 H-H.: ὡς εὐθέως ἐξελεύσομαι=because; Tetrast. Iamb. 1, 6, 3; Nicetas Eugen. 6, 131 H. Cp. Herodas 10, 3: ὡς=because [with the copula ‘is’ to be supplied]) Mt 6:12 (ὡς καί as Mk 7:37 v.l.; TestDan 3:1 v.l.; the parallel Lk 11:4 has γάρ). AcPlCor 1:6 ὡς οὖν ὁ κύριος ἠλέησεν ἡμᾶς inasmuch as the Lord has shown us mercy (by permitting us). So, more oft., καθώς (q.v. 3).γ. ὡς before the predicate acc. or nom. w. certain verbs functions pleonastically and further contributes to the aspect of perspective ὡς προφήτην ἔχουσιν τὸν Ἰωάννην Mt 21:26. Cp. Lk 16:1. λογίζεσθαί τινα ὡς foll. by acc. look upon someone as 1 Cor 4:1; 2 Cor 10:2 (for this pass. s. also c below). Cp. 2 Th 3:15ab; Phil 2:7; Js 2:9.ⓑ w. focus on a conclusion existing only in someone’s imagination or based solely on someone’s assertion (PsSol 8:30; Jos., Bell. 3, 346; Just., A I, 27, 5; Mel., P. 58, 422) προσηνέγκατέ μοι τὸν ἄνθρωπον τοῦτον ὡς ἀποστρέφοντα τὸν λαόν, καὶ ἰδοὺ … you have brought this fellow before me as one who (as you claim) is misleading the people, and now … Lk 23:14. τί καυχᾶσαι ὡς μὴ λαβών; why do you boast, as though you (as you think) had not received? 1 Cor 4:7. Cp. Ac 3:12; 23:15, 20; 27:30. ὡς μὴ ἐρχομένου μου as though I were not coming (acc. to their mistaken idea) 1 Cor 4:18. ὡς μελλούσης τῆς πόλεως αἴρεσθαι assuming that the city was being destroyed AcPl Ha 5, 16.ⓒ w. focus on what is objectively false or erroneous ἐπιστολὴ ὡς διʼ ἡμῶν a letter (falsely) alleged to be from us 2 Th 2:2a (Diod S 33, 5, 5 ἔπεμψαν ὡς παρὰ τῶν πρεσβευτῶν ἐπιστολήν they sent a letter which purported to come from the emissaries; Diog. L. 10:3 falsified ἐπιστολαὶ ὡς Ἐπικούρου; Just., A, II, 5, 5 ὡς ἀπʼ αὐτοῦ σπορᾷ γενομένους υἱούς). τοὺς λογιζομένους ἡμᾶς ὡς κατὰ σάρκα περιπατοῦντας 2 Cor 10:2 (s. also aγ above). Cp. 11:17; 13:7. Israel wishes to become righteous οὐκ ἐκ πίστεως ἀλλʼ ὡς ἐξ ἔργων not through faith but through deeds (the latter way being objectively wrong) Ro 9:32 (Rdm.2 26f). ὡς ἐκ παραδόσεως ἀγράφου εἰς αὐτὸν ἥκοντα (other matters he recounts) as having reached him through unwritten tradition (Eus. about Papias) Papias (2:11).④ conj., marker of result in connection with indication of purpose=ὥστε so that (Trag., Hdt.+, though nearly always w. the inf.; so also POxy 1040, 11; PFlor 370, 10; Wsd 5:12; TestJob 39:7; ApcMos 38; Jos., Ant. 12, 229; Just., A I, 56, 2; Tat. 12, 2. W. the indic. X., Cyr. 5, 4, 11 οὕτω μοι ἐβοήθησας ὡς σέσῳσμαι; Philostrat., Vi. Apoll. 8, 7 p. 324, 25f; Jos., Bell. 3, 343; Ath. 15, 3; 22, 2) Hb 3:11; 4:3 (both Ps 94:11). ὡς αὐτὸν καθόλου τὸ φῶς μὴ βλέπειν Papias (3:2) (s. φῶς 1a). ὡς πάντας ἄχθεσθαι (s. ἄχθομαι) AcPl Ha 4, 14. ὡς πάντας … ἀγαλλιᾶσθαι 6, 31 al.⑤ marker of discourse content, that, the fact that after verbs of knowing, saying (even introducing direct discourse: Maximus Tyr. 5:4f), hearing, etc.=ὅτι that (X., An. 1, 3, 5; Menand., Sam. 590 S. [245 Kö.]; Aeneas Tact. 402; 1342; PTebt 10, 6 [119 B.C.]; 1 Km 13:11; EpArist; Philo, Op. M. 9; Jos., Ant. 7, 39; 9, 162; 15, 249 al.; Just., A I, 60, 2; Tat. 39, 2; 41, 1; Ath. 30, 4.—ORiemann, RevPhilol n.s. 6, 1882, 73–75; HKallenberg, RhM n.s. 68, 1913, 465–76; B-D-F §396) ἀναγινώσκειν Mk 12:26 v.l. (for πῶς); Lk 6:4 (w. πῶς as v.l.). μνησθῆναι Lk 24:6 (D ὅσα); cp. 22:61 (=Lat. quomodo, as in ms. c of the Old Itala; cp. Plautus, Poen. 3, 1, 54–56). ἐπίστασθαι (Jos., Ant. 7, 372) Ac 10:28; 20:18b v.l. (for πῶς). εἰδέναι (MAI 37, 1912, 183 [= Kl. T. 110, 81, 10] ἴστε ὡς [131/132 A.D.]) 1 Th 2:11a. μάρτυς ὡς Ro 1:9; Phil 1:8; 1 Th 2:10.—ὡς ὅτι s. ὅτι 5b.⑥ w. numerals, a degree that approximates a point on a scale of extent, about, approximately, nearly (Hdt., Thu. et al.; PAmh 72, 12; PTebt 381, 4 [VSchuman, ClW 28, ’34/35, 95f: pap]; Jos., Ant. 6, 95; Ruth 1:4; 1 Km 14:2; TestJob 31:2; JosAs 1:6) ὡς δισχίλιοι Mk 5:13. Cp. 8:9; Lk 1:56; 8:42; J 1:39; 4:6; 6:10, 19; 19:14, 39; 21:8; Ac 4:4; 5:7, 36; 13:18, 20; 27:37 v.l. (Hemer, Acts 149 n. 140); Rv 8:1.⑦ a relatively high point on a scale involving exclamation, how! (X., Cyr. 1, 3, 2 ὦ μῆτερ, ὡς καλός μοι ὁ πάππος! Himerius, Or. 54 [=Or. 15], 1 ὡς ἡδύ μοι τὸ θέατρον=how pleasant … ! Ps 8:2; 72:1; TestJob 7:12) ὡς ὡραῖοι οἱ πόδες τῶν εὐαγγελιζομένων ἀγαθά Ro 10:15 (cp. Is 52:7). Cp. 11:33. ὡς μεγάλη μοι ἡ σήμερον ἡμέρα GJs 19:2.⑧ temporal conjunction (B-D-F §455, 2; 3; Harnack, SBBerlAk 1908, 392).ⓐ w. the aor. when, after (Hom., Hdt. et al.; Diod S 14, 80, 1; pap [POxy 1489, 4 al.]; LXX; TestAbr B 3 p. 107, 6 [Stone p. 62]; JosAs 3:2; ParJer 3:1; ApcMos 22; Jos., Bell. 1, 445b; Just., D. 2, 4; 3, 1) ὡς ἐπλήσθησαν αἱ ἡμέραι Lk 1:23. ὡς ἐγεύσατο ὁ ἀρχιτρίκλινος J 2:9.—Lk 1:41, 44; 2:15, 39; 4:25; 5:4; 7:12; 15:25; 19:5; 22:66; 23:26; J 4:1, 40; 6:12, 16; 7:10; 11:6, 20, 29, 32f; 18:6; 19:33; 21:9; Ac 5:24; 10:7, 25; 13:29; 14:5; 16:10, 15; 17:13; 18:5; 19:21; 21:1, 12; 22:25; 27:1, 27; 28:4. AcPl Ha 3, 20.ⓑ w. pres. or impf. while, when, as long as (Menand., Fgm. 538, 2 K. ὡς ὁδοιπορεῖς; Cyrill. Scyth. [VI A.D.] ed. ESchwartz ’39 p. 143, 1; 207, 22 ὡς ἔτι εἰμί=as long as I live) ὡς ὑπάγεις μετὰ τοῦ ἀντιδίκου σου while you are going with your opponent Lk 12:58. ὡς ἐλάλει ἡμῖν, ὡς διήνοιγεν ἡμῖν τὰς γραφάς while he was talking, while he was opening the scriptures to us 24:32.—J 2:23; 8:7; 12:35f ( as long as; cp. ἕως 2a); Ac 1:10; 7:23; 9:23; 10:17; 13:25; 19:9; 21:27; 25:14; Gal 6:10 ( as long as); 2 Cl 8:1; 9:7; IRo 2:2; ISm 9:1 (all four as long as).—ὡς w. impf., and in the next clause the aor. ind. w. the same subject (Diod S 15, 45, 4 ὡς ἐθεώρουν …, συνεστήσαντο ‘when [or ‘as soon as’] they noticed …, they put together [a fleet]’; SIG 1169, 58 ὡς ἐνεκάθευδε, εἶδε ‘while he was sleeping [or ‘when he went to sleep’] [in the temple] he saw [a dream or vision]’) Mt 28:9 v.l.; J 20:11; Ac 8:36; 16:4; 22:11.— Since (Soph., Oed. R. 115; Thu. 4, 90, 3) ὡς τοῦτο γέγονεν Mk 9:21.ⓒ ὡς ἄν or ὡς ἐάν w. subjunctive of the time of an event in the future when, as soon as.α. ὡς ἄν (Hyperid. 2, 43, 4; Herodas 5, 50; Lucian, Cronosolon 11; PHib 59, 1 [c. 245 B.C.] ὡς ἂν λάβῃς; UPZ 71, 18 [152 B.C.]; PTebt 26, 2. Cp. Witkowski 87; Gen 12:12; Josh 2:14; Is 8:21; Da 3:15 Theod.; Ath. 31, 3 [ἐάν Schwartz]) Ro 15:24; 1 Cor 11:34; Phil 2:23.β. ὡς ἐάν (PFay 111, 16 [95/96 A.D.] ὡς ἐὰν βλέπῃς) 1 Cl 12:5f; Hv 3, 8, 9; 3, 13, 2.ⓓ w. the superlative ὡς τάχιστα (a bookish usage; s. B-D-F §244, 1; Rob. 669) as quickly as possible Ac 17:15 (s. ταχέως 1c).⑨ a final particle, expressing intention/purpose, with a view to, in order toⓐ w. subjunctive (Hom.+; TestAbr A 4 p. 80, 33 [Stone p. 8]; SibOr 3, 130; Synes., Hymni 3, 44 [NTerzaghi ’39]) ὡς τελειώσω in order that I might finish Ac 20:24 v.l. (s. Mlt. 249).ⓑ w. inf. (X.; Arrian [very oft.: ABoehner, De Arriani dicendi genere, diss. Erlangen 1885 p. 56]; PGen 28, 12 [II A.D.]; ZPE 8, ’71, 177: letter of M. Ant. 57, cp. 44–46; 3 Macc 1:2; Joseph.; cp. the use of the opt. Just., D. 2, 3) Lk 9:52. ὡς τελειῶσαι Ac 20:24. ὡς ἔπος εἰπεῖν Hb 7:9 (s. ἔπος).ⓒ used w. prepositions to indicate the direction intended (Soph., Thu., X. [Kühner-G. I 472 note 1]; Polyb. 1, 29, 1; LRadermacher, Philol 60, 1901, 495f) πορεύεσθαι ὡς ἐπὶ τὴν θάλασσαν Ac 17:14 v.l.—WStählin, Symbolon, ’58, 99–104. S. also ὡσάν, ὡσαύτως, ὡσεί 2, ὥσπερ b, ὡσπερεί, ὥστε 2b. DELG. M-M. -
17 ἵνα
ἵνα (Hom.+) conjunction, the use of which increased considerably in H. Gk. as compared w. earlier times because it came to be used periphrastically for the inf. and impv. B-D-F §369; 379; 388–94 al.; Mlt. index; Rob. index.① marker to denote purpose, aim, or goal, in order that, that, final senseⓐ w. subjunctive, not only after a primary tense, but also (in accordance w. Hellenistic usage) after a secondary tense (B-D-F §369, 1; Rob. 983; Mlt-Turner 100–102; JKnuenz, De enuntiatis Graecorum finalibus 1913, 15ff):α. after a present tense Mk 4:21; 7:9; Lk 6:34; 8:16; J 3:15; 5:34; 6:30; Ac 2:25 (Ps 15:8); 16:30; Ro 1:11; 3:19; 11:25; 1 Cor 9:12; Gal 6:13; Phil 3:8; Hb 5:1; 6:12; 1J 1:3 and oft.β. after a perfect Mt 1:22; 21:4; J 5:23, 36; 6:38; 12:40, 46; 14:29; 16:1, 4; 17:4; 1 Cor 9:22b al.γ. after a pres. or aor. impv. Mt 7:1; 14:15; 17:27; 23:26; Mk 11:25; J 4:15; 5:14; 10:38; 1 Cor 7:5; 11:34; 1 Ti 4:15; Tit 3:13. Likew. after the hortatory subj. in the first pers. pl. Mk 1:38; Lk 20:14; J 11:16; Hb 4:16.δ. after a fut. Lk 16:4; 18:5; J 5:20; 14:3, 13, 16; 1 Cor 15:28; Phil 1:26.ε. after a secondary tense: impf. Mk 3:2; 6:41; 8:6; Lk 6:7; 18:15 al.—Plpf. J 4:8.—Aor. Mt 19:13; Mk 3:14; 11:28; 14:10; Lk 19:4, 15; J 7:32; 12:9; Ro 7:4; 2 Cor 8:9; Hb 2:14; 11:35; 1J 3:5.ⓑ w. fut. ind. (LXX e.g. Sus 28; En 15:5; TestSol 13:7; SIG 888, 87ff; OGI 665, 35; POxy 299; 1071, 5 ἵνα ποιήσουσιν καὶ πέμψουσιν; Gen 16:2 [Swete; ARahlfs, Genesis 1926 v.l.] al.; Just., D. 115, 6), beside which the aor. subj. is usu. found in the mss. (B-D-F §369, 2; Rob. 984; Mlt-Turner 100) ἵνα σταυρώσουσιν Mk 15:20 v.l. ἵνα ἐρεῖ σοι Lk 14:10. ἵνα δώσουσιν 20:10. ἵνα θεωρήσουσιν J 7:3. ἵνα δώσει 17:2 v.l.; Rv 8:3. ἐπισκιάσει Ac 5:15 v.l.; ξυρήσονται 21:24. κερδανῶ 1 Cor 9:21 v.l.; καυθήσομαι 13:3 v.l. καταδουλώσουσιν Gal 2:4. κερδηθήσονται 1 Pt 3:1. ἵνα … δηλώσεις Hv 3, 8, 10. The fut. ind. is also used oft. when ἵνα has no final mng., esp. in Rv: 1 Cor 9:18 (ἵνα as answer, as Epict. 4, 1, 99); Rv 6:4, 11; 9:4, 5, 20; 13:12; 14:13; 22:14. Occasionally the fut. ind. and aor. subj. are found in the same sentence Rv 3:9; cp. also Phil 2:10f v.l. (on this interchange s. Reinhold 106; JVogeser, Zur Sprache d. griech. Heiligenlegenden, diss. Munich 1907, 34f; Knuenz, op. cit. 23ff; 39; Dio Chrys. 26 [43], 7 ἵνα μὴ παρῶ … μηδὲ ἕξουσιν; POxy 1068, 5 ἵνα διαπέμψεται, ἵνα δυνηθῶ …).—On the interchange of pres. subj. and fut. ind. in J 15:8 s. GLee, Biblica 51, ’70, 239f.ⓒ ἵνα is found w. the pres. ind. only in passages where the subj. is also attested in the mss.; its presence is prob. due to corruption of the text (B-D-F §369, 6; Rob. 984f; Mlt-Turner 100f. But see the clear instance in PAnt III, 188, 15: ἵνα μή ἐσμεν, and cp. BGU 1081, 3 ἐχάρην, ἵνα σὲ ἀσπάζομαι; TestNapht 8:2; PassPtPl 60 [Aa I, 170, 8] ἵνα κατευθύνει; AcPtPl 58 [Aa I, 203, 17]; AcPlTh 11 [Aa I, 243, 11 v.l.]). φυσιοῦσθε 1 Cor 4:6 and ζηλοῦτε Gal 4:17 could be subj. (B-D-F §91; Rob. 984). But Gal 6:12 v.l. διώκονται; Tit 2:4 v.l. σωφρονίζουσιν; J 5:20 v.l. θαυμάζετε; 17:3 v.l. γινώσκουσιν; 1J 5:20 v.l. γινώσκομεν; Rv 12:6 v.l. τρέφουσιν; 13:17 v.l. δύναται; ἵνα σύνετε B 6:5 v.l. (in text συνιῆτε; v.l. συνῆτε); ἵνα … ᾂδετε IEph 4:2 (Lghtf. ᾂδητε); μετέχετε ibid. (v.l. μετέχητε). διατάσσομαι ITr 3:3 (v.l. διατάσσωμαι). βλασφημεῖται 8:2 v.l.ⓓ The opt. after ἵνα is not used in our lit. (B-D-F §369, 1; 386, 3; Rob. 983). Mk 12:2 v.l. ἵνα λάβοι (for λάβῃ). Eph 1:17 ἵνα δῴη (v.l. δῷ) is certainly subj., and δώῃ is the correct rdg. (B-D-F §95, 2; Mlt. 196f). Likew. ἵνα παραδοῖ J 13:2.ⓔ after a demonstrative (Epict. 2, 5, 16 ἐν τούτῳ … ἵνα) εἰς τοῦτο for this (purpose, namely) that J 18:37; 1J 3:8; Ro 14:9; 2 Cor 2:9; 1 Pt 3:9; 4:6; B 5:1, 11; 14:5. εἰς αὐτὸ τοῦτο for this very purpose, that Eph 6:22; Col 4:8. διὰ τοῦτο for this reason … that (Himerius, Or. 14, 3) 2 Cor 13:10; Phlm 15; 1 Ti 1:16; the ἵνα clause can also precede διὰ τοῦτο J 1:31. τούτου χάριν … ἵνα for this reason … that Tit 1:5.ⓕ ἵνα with ‘I should like to say this’ supplied is found also in earlier Gk (Soph. Ph. 989) Mk 2:10 (B-D-F §470, 3. Differently [a virtual impv.] DSharp, ET 38, 1927, 427f). The necessary supplement precedes in ἵνα δείξῃ (he said this), in order to show B 7:5.—Cp. J 15:13.② marker of objective, that. Very oft. the final mng. is greatly weakened or disappears altogether. In this case the ἵνα-constr. serves as a substitute for an inf. that supplements a verb, or an acc. w. inf. (cp. Od. 3, 327 and a spurious document in Demosth. 18, 155. Later very common, also in ins, pap [Rdm.2 191ff]; LXX).ⓐ after verbs w. the senseα. ‘wish, desire, strive’ (PGiss 17, 5 [II A.D.] ἠγωνίασα … ἵνα ἀκούσω; BGU 1081, 3 ἐχάρην, ἵνα σὲ ἀσπάζομαι) θέλειν ἵνα (TestAbr A 19, 101, 9 [Stone p. 50]) Mt 7:12; Mk 9:30; 10:35; Lk 6:31; J 17:24; 1 Cor 14:5. βουλεύεσθαι J 11:53; 12:10. συμβουλεύεσθαι Mt 26:4. συντίθεσθαι J 9:22. ἀγαλλιᾶσθαι joyfully strive after 8:56 (s. ἀγαλλιάω). ζητεῖν 1 Cor 4:2; 14:12; AcPlCor 2:8. ζηλοῦν 14:1. εὔχεσθαι ‘wish’ IPhld 6:3.β. ‘take care, be ashamed, be afraid’ φυλάσσεσθαι 2 Pt 3:17. προσέχειν take care that B 16:8. βλέπειν see to it, that 1 Cor 16:10.γ. ‘request, demand’: δεῖσθαι request (Dionys. Hal. 4, 12, 1; Lucian, Dom. 9; Jos., Ant. 6, 321; 12, 125 al.) Lk 9:40; 21:36; 22:32; B 12:7; Pol 6:2; Hv 3, 1, 2; Hs 5, 4, 1. ἐρωτᾶν request (s. ἐρωτάω 2) Mk 7:26; Lk 7:36; 16:27; J 4:47; 17:15 al. (JEarwaker, ET 75, ’64, 316f so interprets the third ἵνα in 17:21). παρακαλεῖν request, exhort (EpArist 318; 321, Jos., Ant. 14, 168) Mt 14:36; Mk 5:18; 6:56; 7:32; 8:22; Lk 8:32; 1 Cor 1:10 al. αἰτεῖσθαι Col 1:9 (Just., D. 30, 2 αἰτοῦμεν). προσεύχεσθαι Mt 24:20; 26:41; Mk 14:35; Lk 22:46; 1 Cor 14:13 al. εὔχεσθαι pray (s. εὔχομαι 1 end) Hs 5, 2, 10. εὐχαριστεῖν Eph 1:16f. ἀξιοῦν demand, request (CIG 4892, 13 [III A.D.]; Jos., Ant. 14, 22) Hv 4, 1, 3. καταξιοῦν ISm 11:1; IPol 7:2.δ. ‘summon, encourage, order’ (Epict, 4, 11, 29; 1 Esdr 8:19; EpArist 46) ἀπαγγέλλειν Mt 28:10. παραγγέλλειν (CIG 4957, 48 [68 A.D.] restored) Mk 6:8. διαμαρτύρεσθαι 1 Ti 5:21. ἐντέλλεσθαι (Jos., Ant. 7, 356) Mk 13:34; J 15:17. κηρύσσειν Mk 6:12. διαστέλλεσθαι Mt 16:20; Mk 5:43; 7:36; 9:9. ἐπιτιμᾶν warn Mt 16:20; 20:31; Mk 8:30; 10:48; Lk 18:39. ἐξορκίζειν Mt 26:63. ὁρκίζειν Hs 9, 10, 5. λέγειν order Mt 4:3; 20:21; Mk 3:9; 9:18; Lk 4:3; 10:40; Hv 2, 2, 6. γράφειν write (Jos., Ant. 11, 7; 127) Mk 9:12; 12:19; Lk 20:28. ἀποστέλλειν Ac 16:36.ε. ‘cause, bring about’ πείθειν Mt 27:20. ποιεῖν J 11:37; Col 4:16; cp. Rv 3:9; 13:16. τιθέναι appoint J 15:16. ἀγγαρεύειν Mt 27:32; Mk 15:21.ζ. ‘permit, grant’ ἀφιέναι Mk 11:16. On J 12:7 s. CBarrett, The Gospel According to St. John2, ’78, 413–14. διδόναι 10:37; Rv 9:5.η. συνευδοκεῖν Hs 5, 2, 8.ⓑ after impers. expr.: ἀρκετόν (ἐστι) it is sufficient Mt 10:25. λυσιτελεῖ (εἰ … ἢ ἵνα) Lk 17:2. συμφέρει Mt 5:29f; 18:6; J 11:50. ἐμοὶ εἰς ἐλάχιστόν ἐστιν it is a matter of little consequence to me 1 Cor 4:3. ἔδει B 5:13. πολλὰ λείπει Hv 3, 1, 9.ⓒ after nouns and adjs., esp. when they are parts of fixed expressions:α. χρείαν ἔχειν J 2:25; 16:30; 1J 2:27. ἔστιν συνήθεια J 18:39. θέλημά ἐστιν Mt 18:14; J 6:40; 1 Cor 16:12b. βουλὴ ἐγένετο Ac 27:42. ἐντολή (cp. Polyb. 36, 17, 10 νόμος) J 15:12; 11:57; 13:34; Ac 17:15; 2J 6. δέησις Eph 6:19. ἐξουσία Ac 8:19. ἐμὸν βρῶμά ἐστιν J 4:34. τίς ἐστιν ὁ μισθός; ἵνα … 1 Cor 9:18.β. οὐκ εἰμὶ ἱκανός Mt 8:8; Lk 7:6. οὐκ εἰμὶ ἄξιος J 1:27; cp. Hs 9, 28, 5. S. B-D-F §379; Rob. 996.ⓓ after nouns mng. time: χρόνον διδόναι, ἵνα give time Rv 2:21. ἔρχεται ἡ ὥρα the time comes (Aesop, Fab. 242 H. ἡ ἡμέρα, ἵνα=the day on which) J 12:23; 13:1; 16:2, 32. S. B-D-F §382, 1; 393.ⓔ ἵνα can also take the place of the explanatory inf. after a demonstrative (B-D-F §394; Rdm.2 192.—Wsd 13:9; Just., D. 14, 2 τοῦτο γάρ ἐστι τὸ σύμβολον τῶν ἀζύμων, ἵνα μὴ …) Mk 11:28. πόθεν μοι τοῦτο ἵνα ἔλθῃ (for τὸ ἐλθεῖν τὴν κτλ.) Lk 1:43 (cp. GJs 12:2). τοῦτο προσεύχομαι ἵνα Phil 1:9. cp. 1 Cor 9:18. This is a favorite usage in J: τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ ἔργον τοῦ θεοῦ ἵνα πιστεύητε (for τὸ πιστεύειν ὑμᾶς) 6:29; cp. vs. 50. μείζονα ταύτης ἀγάπην οὐδεὶς ἔχει ἵνα … θῇ (for τοῦ θεῖναι) 15:13; cp. 3J 4.—J 6:39; 17:3; 1J 3:11, 23; 4:21; 5:3; 2J 6a. ἐν τούτῳ: ἐν τούτῳ ἐδοξάσθη ὁ πατήρ μου ἵνα … φέρητε (for ἐν τῷ φέρειν ὑμᾶς ἐδοξάσθη) J 15:8; cp. 1J 4:17.—S. also Hs 9, 28, 4, and ποταπὴν ἀγάπην ἵνα 1J 3:1.ⓕ ἵνα is used elliptically ἀλλʼ ἵνα but this has happened that, where the verb to be supplied must be inferred fr. the context (Epict. 1, 12, 17): ἀλλʼ ἵνα μαρτυρήσῃ (sc. ἦλθεν) J 1:8. ἀλλʼ (ἐγένετο ἀπόκρυφον) ἵνα ἔλθῃ εἰς φανερόν but it was hidden that it might be revealed Mk 4:22 (but cp. CCadoux, JTS 42, ’41, 169 n. 3). ἀλλʼ (κρατεῖτέ με) ἵνα πληρωθῶσιν but you are holding me (prisoner), that 14:49. ἀλλʼ (ἐγένετο τυφλὸς) ἵνα φανερωθῇ J 9:3. ἀλλʼ (ἀποθνῄσκει) ἵνα … συναγάγῃ 11:52.—13:18; Hv 3, 8, 10 (cp. 1b above).ⓖ ἵνα w. subjunctive as a periphrasis for the impv. (B-D-F §387, 3; Mlt. 178; 210f; 248; Rob. 994; Mlt-Turner 94f; FSlotty, D. Gebr. des Konj. u. Opt. in d. griech. Dialekten I 1915, 35; CCadoux, The Impv. Use of ἵνα in the NT: JTS 42, ’41, 165–73; in reply HMeecham, JTS 43, ’42, 179f, also ET 52, ’40/41, 437; AGeorge, JTS 45, ’44, 56–60. Goodsp., Probs. 57f.—Soph., Oed. Col. 155; Epict. 4, 1, 41, Enchir. 17; PTebt 408, 17 [3 A.D.]; BGU 1079, 20; PFay 112, 12; POxy 299, 5 ἵνʼ εἰδῇς ‘know’; PGM 4, 2135; Tob 8:12 BA; 2 Macc 1:9. ἵνα πρὶν τούτων ἴδητε τὴν ἀπώλειαν τῶν υἱῶν ‘before these events, you shall behold the destruction of your sons’ En 14:6. κύριε, ἵνα γινώσκῃ τὸ σὸν κράτος ὅτι ‘Lord, may you in your majesty know, that …’ TestAbr A 4 p. 80, 35f [Stone pp. 8 and 10]). ἵνα ἐπιθῇς τὰς χεῖρας αὐτῇ please lay your hands on her Mk 5:23. ἡ δὲ γυνὴ ἵνα φοβῆται τ. ἄνδρα the wife is to respect her husband Eph 5:33. Cp. Mt 20:33; Mk 10:51; 1 Cor 7:29; 16:16; 2 Cor 8:7; Gal 2:10. ἵνα ἀναπαήσονται let them rest Rv 14:13. W. θέλω: θέλω ἵνα δῷς Mk 6:25 (=δός Mt 14:8.).—On Mk 2:10 s. 1f above.ⓗ ἵνα without a finite verb, which can be supplied fr. the context (Epict. 3, 23, 4 ἵνα ὡς ἄνθρωπος, i.e. ἐργάζῃ) ἵνα ἡμεῖς εἰς τὰ ἔθνη, αὐτοὶ δὲ εἰς τὴν περιτομήν (i.e. εὐαγγελιζώμεθα and εὐαγγελίζωνται) Gal 2:9. ἵνα κατὰ χάριν (γένηται) Ro 4:16. ἵνα ἄλλοις ἄνεσις (γένηται) 2 Cor 8:13. ἵνα (γένηται) καθὼς γέγραπται 1 Cor 1:31 (B-D-F §481; Rob. 1202f).③ marker serving as substitute for the inf. of result, so that (‘ecbatic’ or consecutive use of ἵνα: B-D-F §391, 5; Mlt. 206–9; Rob. 997–99 and in SCase, Studies in Early Christianity [Porter-Bacon Festschr.] 1928, 51–57; EBlakeney, ET 53, ’41/42, 377f, indicating that the result is considered probable, but not actual. But this distinction is not always strictly observed. Cp. Epict. 1, 24, 3; 25, 15; 27, 8 al.; 2, 2, 16 οὕτω μωρὸς ἦν, ἵνα μὴ ἴδῃ; Vett. Val. 185, 31; 186, 17; 292, 20; Jos., Bell. 6, 107; Just., D. 112, 5; PLond III, 964, 13 p. 212 [II/III A.D.]. Many exx. in AJannaris, An Historical Greek Grammar 1897 §1758 and 1951) ἦν παρακεκαλυμμένον ἀπʼ αὐτῶν ἵνα μὴ αἴσθωνται αὐτό it was concealed from them, so that they might not comprehend it Lk 9:45. τίς ἥμαρτεν, ἵνα τυφλὸς γεννηθῇ; Who sinned, so that he was born blind? J 9:2. Cp. 2 Cor 1:17; Gal 5:17; 1 Th 5:4; 1J 1:9; Rv 9:20; 13:13; Hs 7:2; 9, 1, 10.—In many cases purpose and result cannot be clearly differentiated, and hence ἵνα is used for the result that follows according to the purpose of the subj. or of God. As in Semitic and Gr-Rom. thought, purpose and result are identical in declarations of the divine will (Ps.-Callisth. 2, 16, 10 the rule of the Persian king is being overthrown by the deity ἵνα Δαρεῖος … φυγὰς γενόμενος κτλ. Here ἵνα means both ‘in order that’ and ‘so that’): Lk 11:50; J 4:36; 12:40; 19:28; Ro 3:19; 5:20; 7:13; 8:17; 11:31f al. (ESutcliffe, Effect or Purpose, Biblica 35, ’54, 320–27). The formula ἵνα πληρωθῇ is so to be understood, since the fulfillment is acc. to God’s plan of salvation: Mt 1:22; 2:15; 4:14; 12:17; 21:4; 26:56; J 12:38; 17:12; 19:24, 36.—The ἵνα of Mk 4:12=Lk 8:10, so much in dispute, is prob. to be taken as final (w. AvVeldhuizen, NTS 8, 1925, 129–33; 10, 1927, 42–44; HWindisch, ZNW 26, 1927, 203–9; JGnilka, Die Verstockung Israels ’61, 45–48; B-D-F §369, 2 [here, and B-D-R p. 386f n. 2, the lit. on ‘causal’ ἵνα, which is allowed at least for Rv 22:14 and perh. 14:13, where P47 has ὅτι; see 2g]. S. also FLaCava, Scuola Cattol. 65, ’37, 301–4; MBlack, An Aramaic Approach3, ’67, 211–16; ISluiter, Causal ἵνα, Sound Greek: Glotta 70, ’92, 39–53. On J 12:7 s. τηρέω 2a).④ marker of retroactive emphasis, that. At times, contrary to regular usage, ἵνα is placed elsewhere than at the beginning of its clause, in order to emphasize the words that come before it (B-D-F §475, 1; cp. the position of ὅτι Gal 1:11): τὴν ἀγάπην ἵνα γνῶτε 2 Cor 2:4. εἰς τὸν ἐρχόμενον μετʼ αὐτὸν ἵνα πιστεύσωσιν Ac 19:4. τῷ ὑμετέρῳ ἐλέει ἵνα Ro 11:31. Cp. J 13:29; 1 Cor 7:29; Gal 2:10; Col 4:16b.—EStauffer, Ἵνα u. d. Problem d. teleol. Denkens b. Pls: StKr 102, 1930, 232–57; JGreenlee, ἵνα Substantive Clauses in the NT: Asbury Seminarian 2, ’47, 154–63; HRiesenfeld, Zu d. johanneischen ἵνα-Sätzen, StTh 19, ’65, 213–20; MBlack, An Aramaic Approach3, ’67, 76–81.—Frisk. M-M. EDNT. TW. -
18 ὑπέρ
ὑπέρ (Hom.+) prep. w. gen. and acc. (lit. s.v. ἀνά, beg. In addition to this, for ὑπέρ: LWenger, Die Stellvertretung im Rechte der Papyri 1896; ARobertson, The Use of ὑπέρ in Business Documents in the Papyri: Exp. 8th ser., 28, 1919, 321–27). The loc. sense ‘over, above’ is not found in our lit. (not in the LXX either, but in JosAs 14:4; ApcEsdr 1:9; Just., Tat., Ath.) but does appear in nonliteral senses. The mss. oft. fluctuate between ὑπέρ and περί; see A3 below.A. w. gen.① a marker indicating that an activity or event is in some entity’s interest, for, in behalf of, for the sake of someone/someth.ⓐ w. gen. of pers. or human collectiveα. after words that express a request, prayer, etc. After the verbs δέομαι (q.v. b), εὔχομαι (q.v. 1), προσεύχομαι (q.v.), ἐντυγχάνω (q.v. 1a; cp. b), ὑπερεντυγχάνω (q.v.), λιτανεύω (q.v.) etc. After the nouns δέησις (q.v., end) and προσευχή (q.v. 1). S. also 1 Ti 2:1f.β. after words and expressions that denote working, caring, concerning oneself about. After the verbs ἀγρυπνέω (q.v. 2), ἀγωνίζομαι (q.v. 2b), μεριμνάω (q.v. 2), πρεσβεύω (q.v.) etc. After the nouns ζῆλος (q.v. 1), σπουδή (q.v. 2), ἔχειν πόνον (πόνος 1). ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν διάκονος Col 1:7.γ. after expressions having to do w. sacrifice: ἁγιάζω (q.v. 2), ἁγνίζομαι (s. ἁγνίζω 3). τὸ πάσχα ἡμῶν ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν ἑτύθη Χριστός 1 Cor 5:7 v.l. ἕως οὗ προσηνέχθη ὑπὲρ ἑνὸς ἑκάστου αὐτῶν ἡ προσφορά Ac 21:26 (προσφέρω 2a).—Eph 5:2; Hb 9:7.δ. gener. εἶναι ὑπέρ τινος be for someone, be on someone’s side (PIand 16, 8 τὸ νόμιμον ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν ἐστιν.—Opp. εἶναι κατά τινος) Mk 9:40; Lk 9:50; Ro 8:31.—ἐπιτρέπεταί σοι ὑπὲρ σεαυτοῦ λέγειν Ac 26:1 v.l. (for περί). ἵνα μὴ εἷς ὑπὲρ τοῦ ἑνὸς φυσιοῦσθε κατὰ τοῦ ἑτέρου 1 Cor 4:6b. Cp. 2 Cor 1:11ab; 5:20b (δεόμεθα ὑπὲρ Χριστοῦ=as helpers of Christ we beg you. Also prob. is we beg you by or in the name of Christ [Apollon. Rhod. 3, 701 λίσσομʼ ὑπὲρ μακάρων=by the gods, in imitation of Il. 22, 338.—Theaetetus, III B.C.: Anth. Pal. 7, 499, 2]). τοῦτο φρονεῖν ὑπὲρ πάντων ὑμῶν to be thus minded in behalf of you all Phil 1:7 (perh. simply=about; s. 3 below); cp. 4:10 (think of me = care for, be interested in me).ε. after expressions of suffering, dying, devoting oneself, etc. (JosAs 28:1 κύριος πολεμεῖ καθʼ ἡμῶν ὑπὲρ Ἀσενεθ ‘against us in behalf of Aseneth’; ApcEsdr 6:18 p. 31, 28 Tdf. δικάζεσθαι ὑπὲρ τοῦ γένους τῶν ἀνθρώπων) ἀποθνῄσκειν ὑπέρ τινος die for someone or someth. (ἀποθνῄσκω 1aα; also Jos., Ant. 13, 6) J 11:50–52; 18:14; Ro 5:7ab. τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ τίθησιν ὑπὲρ τινος (cp. Jos., Bell. 2, 201; Sir 29:15; ApcSed 1:5; Ar. 15, 10; Mel., P. 103, 791) J 10:11, 15; 13:37f; 15:13; 1J 3:16b.—Ro 16:4; 2 Cor 12:15; Eph 3:1, 13; Col 1:24a.—So esp. of the death of Christ (already referred to at least in part in some of the passages already mentioned. S. also above 1aγ and below 1c) for, in behalf of humanity, the world, etc.: Mk 14:24; Lk 22:19f; Ro 5:6, 8; 8:32; 14:15; 1 Cor 1:13 (where the hypothetical question μὴ Παῦλος ἐσταυρώθη ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν; was chosen for no other reason than its ref. to the redeeming death of Christ); 11:24; 15:3; Gal 2:20; 3:13; Eph 5:25; 1 Th 5:10 (v.l. περί); 1 Ti 2:6; Tit 2:14; Hb 2:9; 6:20; 1 Pt 2:21 (v.l. περί); 3:18a v.l.; 18b; 1J 3:16a; MPol 17:2ab (Just., A I, 50, 1 ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν γενόμενος ἄνθρωπος).—AMetzinger, Die Substitutionstheorie u. das atl. Opfer, Biblica 21, ’40, 159–87, 247–72, 353–77; EBlakeney, ET 55, ’43/44, 306.ⓑ w. gen. of thing, in which case it must be variously translated ὑπὲρ (τῶν) ἁμαρτιῶν in order to atone for (the) sins or to remove them 1 Cor 15:3; Gal 1:4; Hb 5:1b; 7:27; 9:7 (here ὑπὲρ … τῶν ἀγνοημάτων); 10:12; B 7:3, 4 (prophetic saying of unknown origin), 5f.—ὑπὲρ τῆς τοῦ κόσμου ζωῆς to bring life to the world J 6:51. ὑπὲρ τῆς δόξης τοῦ θεοῦ to reveal the glory of God 11:4. ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ (cp. Sb 7681, 7 [312 A.D.] ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματός μου=in behalf of) to spread his name Ro 1:5; cp. 3J 7. ὑπὲρ ἀληθείας θεοῦ=in order to show that God’s promises are true Ro 15:8. ὑπὲρ τῆς ὑμῶν παρακλήσεως in order to comfort you 2 Cor 1:6ab. Cp. 12:19. ὑπὲρ τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν for the strengthening of your faith 1 Th 3:2.ⓒ in place of, instead of, in the name of (Eur.; Polyb. 3, 67, 7; ApcEsdr 1:11 p. 25, 3 Tdf.; Jos., C. Ap. 2, 142; Just., D. 95, 2.—In pap very oft. ὑπὲρ αὐτοῦ to explain that the writer is writing ‘as the representative of’ an illiterate pers.; Dssm. LO 285, 2 [LAE 335, 4]; other exx. of pap in DWallace, Greek Grammar Beyond the Basics ’96, 384–86) ἵνα ὑπὲρ σοῦ μοι διακονῇ Phlm 13. Somet. the mng. in place of merges w. on behalf of, for the sake of Ro 9:3. οἱ βαπτιζόμενοι ὑπὲρ τῶν νεκρῶν 1 Cor 15:29a is debated; cp. 29b (s. the lit. s.v. βαπτίζω 2c; also KBornhäuser, Die Furche 21, ’34, 184–87; JWhite, JBL 116, ’97, 487–99 [esp. 497f] favors a causal sense). εἷς ὑπὲρ πάντων ἀπέθανεν 2 Cor 5:14; cp. 15ab, 21 (Eur., Alc. 701 κατθανεῖν ὑπέρ σου).② marker of the moving cause or reason, because of, for the sake of, for (Diod S 10, 21, 2 τὴν ὑπὲρ τῶν ἁμαρτημάτων τιμωρίαν; schol. on Pind., O. 6, 154b [=OxfT 91]), w. verbs of suffering, giving the reason for it ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματος Ac 5:41; 9:16; 21:13; ὑπὲρ Χριστοῦ Phil 1:29ab; cp. 2 Th 1:5; ὑπὲρ θεοῦ ἀποθνῄσκω IRo 4:1. Likew. used w. nouns that denote suffering ὑπὲρ Χριστοῦ for Christ’s sake 2 Cor 12:10.—εὐχαριστεῖν ὑπέρ τινος give thanks for someth. 1 Cor 10:30; Eph 5:20; D 9:2; 10:2 (cp. Sb 3926, 12 [I B.C.] τὸ κατεσκευασμένον ὑπὲρ [=in gratefulness for] τῆς ἡμετέρας σωτηρίας Ἰσιδεῖον; Just., A I, 65, 3). δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν ὑπέρ τινος praise God for someth. Ro 15:9.—ὑπὲρ τούτου with reference to someth. (Synes., Ep. 67 p. 209c) 2 Cor 12:8.—This is prob. the place for ὑπὲρ τῆς εὐδοκίας with (God’s) good pleasure in view Phil 2:13 (εὐδοκία 1).③ marker of general content, whether of a discourse or mental activity, about, concerning (about equivalent to περί [τινος], w. which it is freq. interchanged in the mss.; s. Kühner-G. I p. 487 [w. exx. fr. Hom., Pla. et al.]. Also quite common in Polyb., Diod S, Dionys. Hal., Joseph., ins [e.g. ISardGauthier 2, 3 ‘write about’] and pap [Schmidt 396]; but Ath. differentiates between λόγος ὑπὲρ [in defense of] τῆς ἀληθείας and λόγος περὶ [about] τῆς ἀληθείας R 1 p. 48, 19; Mlt. 105; Rdm.2 p. 140; Johannessohn, Präp 216–21; LDeubner, Bemerkungen z. Text der Vita Pyth. des Iamblichos: SBBerlAk ’35, XIX 27; 71), oft. at the same time in the sense ‘in the interest of’ or ‘in behalf of’ οὗτός ἐστιν ὑπὲρ οὗ ἐγὼ εἶπον J 1:30 (v.l. περί). Ἠσαί̈ας κράζει ὑπὲρ τοῦ Ἰσραήλ Ro 9:27 (v.l. περί). Cp. 2 Cor 1:8 (v.l. περί); 5:12; 7:4, 14; 8:24; 9:2f; 12:5ab (in all the passages in 2 Cor except the first dependent on καυχάομαι, καύχημα, καύχησις); 2 Th 1:4 (ἐγκαυχᾶσθαι). With reference to (Demosth. 21, 121) 2 Cor 8:23; 2 Th 2:1. ἡ ἐλπὶς ἡμῶν βεβαία ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν our hope with reference to you is unshaken 2 Cor 1:7 (ἐλπὶς ὑ. τινος ‘for someth.’ Socrat., Ep. 6, 5 [p. 234, 28 Malherbe]).B. w. acc. marker of a degree beyond that of a compared scale of extent, in the sense of excelling, surpassing, over and above, beyond, more than (so always PsSol; TestAbr A 4 p. 81, 29 [Stone p. 10] al.; TestJob 38:6 τὰ ὑπὲρ ἡμᾶς; JosAs 1:6 al.; Ath. 17, 1; 32, 1) κεφαλὴ ὑπὲρ πάντα the supreme Head Eph 1:22 (Appian, Bell. Civ. 5, 74 §314 ὑπὲρ ἅπαντα). ὑπὲρ δύναμιν beyond one’s strength 2 Cor 1:8; cp. 8:3 v.l. (OGI 767, 19f ὑπὲρ δύναμιν; Cyranides p. 63, 22 ὑπὲρ λόγον). Also ὑπὲρ ὸ̔ δύνασθε 1 Cor 10:13. μὴ ὑπὲρ ἃ γέγραπται not (to go) beyond what is written 1 Cor 4:6a (s. WLütgert, Freiheitspredigt u. Schwarmgeister in Korinth 1908, 97ff; ASchlatter, Die korinth. Theologie 1914, 7ff; OLinton, StKr 102, 1930, 425–37; LBrun, ibid. 103, ’31, 453–56; PWallis, TLZ 75, ’50, 506–8; ALegault, NTS 18, ’71/72, 227–31; PMarshall, Hybrists Not Gnostics in Corinth: SBLSP 23, 84, 275–87; on the prob. imagery of a school exercise in which children learn to stay between the lines, s. RTyler, CBQ 60, ’98, 97–103; a public foundational document containing bylaws, JHanges, JBL 117, ’98, 275–98 [pap and ins]). ὑπὲρ ἃ λέγω ποιήσεις you will do even more than I ask Phlm 21. ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθʼ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι I feel an exceeding and overwhelming joy B 1:2.—After an adj. in comp. or superl. for ἤ than: mostly so after the comp. (Judg 11:25 B; 15:2 B; 18:26 B; 3 Km 19:4; Ps 18:11; Hab 1:8) τομώτερος ὑπὲρ πᾶσαν μάχαιραν Hb 4:12. Cp. Lk 16:8; J 12:43 v.l.; MPol 18:2. In an unusually compressed statement: τοὺς ἀποστόλους ὄντας ὑπὲρ πᾶσαν ἁμαρτίαν ἀνομωτέρους the apostles, who were more lawless than (people who commit) any and every sin B 5:9; rarely after the superl. (TestAbr A 2 p. 78, 25 [Stone p. 4]) γλυκυτάτη ὑπὲρ τὸ μέλι Hm 5, 1, 6. Likew. after verbs that express the idea of comparison ἡσσώθητε (=ἐγένεσθε ἥσσονες) ὑπὲρ τὰς λοιπὰς ἐκκλησίας, were you treated worse than the other churches? 2 Cor 12:13.—‘More than’ also takes on the sense more exalted or excellent or glorious than; as the timeless one (ἄχρονος), Christ is called ὁ ὑπὲρ καιρόν the one who is exalted beyond time IPol 3:2. ὑπὲρ θάνατον exalted above death ISm 3:2. οὐκ ἔστιν μαθητὴς ὑπὲρ τὸν διδάσκαλον a disciple is not superior to his teacher Mt 10:24a; Lk 6:40.—Mt 10:24b; Ac 26:13; Phil 2:9. οὐκέτι ὡς δοῦλον ἀλλὰ ὑπὲρ δοῦλον no longer as a slave, but as someth. better than a slave Phlm 16. τῷ δυναμένῳ ὑπὲρ πάντα ποιῆσαι to (God) who is able to do greater things than all (we can ask or imagine) Eph 3:20.— More than (PsSol 17:43; TestGad 7:1) ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου (JosAs 13:11) B 1:4; cp. 4:6; 19:5; D 2:7. φιλεῖν Mt 10:37ab. ἀρέσει αὐτῷ ὑπὲρ μόσχον 1 Cl 52:2 (Ps 68:32). λάμπειν IEph 19:2. προκόπτειν Gal 1:14. στίλβειν Hs 9, 2, 2.C. adv. use even more. The adv. use of ὑπέρ is, so far, almost unknown outside the NT (but s. L-S-J-M s.v. ὑπέρ E; Schwyzer II 518; Ursing 49 cites fr. an Aesop-ms. ὅπερ ἔτι ὑπὲρ ἀπεδέξατο, where all the other mss. have μᾶλλον [Phil 3:4 ἐγὼ μᾶλλον]. On the adv. use of other prepositions s. Kühner-G. I p. 526f). διάκονοι Χριστοῦ εἰσιν; ὑπὲρ ἐγώ are they assistants of of Christ? I am so even more (than they) 2 Cor 11:23 (W-H. accent ὕπερ; s. Mlt-Turner 250). Wallis (s. B above) classes 1 Cor 4:6 here.—RBieringer: The Four Gospels, Festschr. FNeirynck, ed. FvanSegbroeck et al. ’92, I 219–48. On ὑπὲρ ἄγαν, ὑπὲρ ἐκεῖνα, ὑπὲρ ἐκπερισσοῦ, ὑπὲρ λίαν s. ὑπεράγαν, ὑπερέκεινα, ὑπερεκπερισσοῦ (-ῶς), ὑπερλίαν.—DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. -
19 ποιέω
+ V 850-941-576-490-533=3390 Gn 1,1.7.11.12.16to make [τι] Gn 3,7; to make sth into sth [τί τι] Lv 24,5; to create (a position) [τινα] Gn 41,34; to build [τι] Gn 13,4; to create [τινα] Gn 1,21; id. [τι] Gn 1,1; to produce, to bear, to yield [τι] Gn41,47; to cause, to bring about [τι] 2 Mc 1,4; to do, to execute, to carry out [τι] Ex 24,3; to execute, to perform [τι]Ex 13,5; to commit [τι] Dt 22,8; to execute, to work, to show (kindness) [τι] Gn 47,29to make ready, to prepare [τι] Gn 19,3; to prepare, to give as food [τι] Gn 18,8; to keep, to celebrate [τι] Ex 23,15; to observe [τι] Ex 31,16; to sacrifice [τινα] Ex 29,36; to spend [τι] (a period of time) Prv 13,23; to make sb sth [τινα +pred.] Gn 27,37; id. [τινα εἴς τινα] Gn 12,2; to appoint [τινα] 1 Sm 12,6; to make sth into sth [τι +pred.] Nm 6,17; to do, to act [abs.] Gn 29,28; to do [τι] Gn 3,13; to do sth to sb [τί τινι] Gn 26,10; id. [τί τινα] Nm 24,14; to do to [τινα] Dt 22,3; id. [τι] Dt 3,21; to do with [τι] Ex 22,29; to do with, to deal with [μετά τινος] Jgs 9,19; to do for [τί τινι] Hos 10,3; to cause to [+inf.] Ex 23,33οὐδὲ ἐποίησεν τὸν μύστακα αὐτοῦ neither did he trim his moustache 2 Sm 19,25; τάδε ποιήσαι μοι κύριος the Lord may do so to me (wording of the oath) Ru 1,17; Σὺ νῦν οὕτως ποιεῖς βασιλέα ἐπὶ Ισραηλ; is this the way you reign as king over Israel? 1 Kgs 20(21),7; διάστημα ποιεῖτε ἀνὰ μέσον ποίμνης καὶ ποίμνης put a distance between drove and drove or between one flock and the other Gn 32,17 *Is 32,10 μνείαν ποιήσασθε remember-זכר for MT תרגזנה you will be troubled; *Is 41,29(28) οἱ ποιοῦντες ὑμᾶς your makers-יכםשׂע for MT יהםשׂמע their works; *Jer 7,29 τὴν ποιοῦσαν ταῦτα that does these things-דנה עבד (Aram.?) for MT עברתו his wrath; *Jer 30,2(49,8) ἐποίησεν he commited-השׂע for MT ושׂע Esau; *Ez 23,44 ποιῆσαι to work-ותשׂלע for MT תשׁא the women of; *Zph 3,20 καλῶς ποιήσω I shall deal well-אטיב for MT אביא I shall bring; *Jb 29,4 ὅτε ἐπισκοπὴν ἐποιεῖτο when he took care-בסוך for MT בסוד when the intimacy; *Jb 30,24 ποιήσει he shall do-השׂיע for MT ועשׁ he cries out; *Prv 20,11 ὁ ποιῶν αὐτά he that makes them-הםשׂע for MT ניהםשׁ the two of them; *Eccl 8,11 ἀπὸ τῶν ποιούντων on the part of those who do-ישׂע/מ for MT השׂמע a workCf. DOGNIEZ 1992 32.115.187.198; DORIVAL 1994, 496; HARL 1971=1992a 188-189.192; 1986a 86.174;HELBING 1928 3-8.54-56; LE BOULLUEC 1989, 301; LEE, J. 1983, 51; WALTERS 1973, 274; WEVERS1990 502; 1993 1.150.183. 437.488.547.690.700.809(→ἀναποιέω, ἀντιποιέω, ἀποποιέω, ἐκποιέω, ἐμποιέω, περιποιέω, προσποιέω, συμποιέω,,) -
20 ἀναβάλλω
A throw up,χοῦν ἐξ ὀρύγματος Th.4.90
, cf. X.Cyr.7.5.10, Ostr. 1399 (i A. D.); foss and dyke,X.
An.5.2.5.2 ἀ. τινὰ ἐπὶ τὸν ἵππον put on horseback, mount him, Id.An. 4.4.4, Eq.6.12; of the horse, ἀ. τὸν ἀναβάτην unseat his rider, ib.8.7.3 ἀ. τὰ ὄμματα cast up one's eyes, so as to show the whites, Arist.Pr. 876a31;τὰ λευκά Alex.222.9
, Ctes.Fr.20.6 lift, remove a tumour, Antyll.(?)ap.Orib.45.17.6.7 [voice] Pass., to be lifted up, in prayer,εὔχονται σπλάγχνοισι κακῶς ἀναβαλλομένοισι Aristeas Epic.1
.II put back, put off,μηκέτι νῦν ἀνάβαλλε.. ἄεθλον Od.19.584
(the only place in which Hom. uses the [voice] Act.); ἀ. τινά put off [with excuses], D.8.52;ἀ. τὰ πράγματα 4.14
; distract one's attention, Philostr.Im.2.24:—[voice] Pass., ἀνεβλήθη ἡ ἐκκλησία it was adjourned, Th.5.45; ὥστε.. εἰς τοὺς παῖδας ἀναβληθήσεσθαι τὰς τιμωρίας will be put off to the time of the sons, Isoc.11.25;ὑμεναίους οὐκ ἀναβαλλομένους Call.Aet.3.1.43
; cf. infr. B. 11.2 [tense] pf. part. [voice] Pass. ἀναβεβλημένος slow, measured,αὔλημα D.Chr.1.1
, cf. Hld.2.8: so in Adv.- μένως
slowly,D.H.
Dem.54.b of style, diffuse,τὸ ὕπτιον καὶ ἀ. Hermog.Id.2.11
; λέξις ἀ., opp. συνεστραμμένη, Aristid. Rh.2p.540S.B more freq. in [voice] Med., strike up, begin to play or sing (cf.ἀναβολή 11
),ἀναβάλλετο καλὸν ἀείδειν Od.1.155
, 8.266, Theoc.6.20: abs.,ἀναβάλεο Pi.N.7.77
; : c. acc.,εὐχὴν ἀ. τῷ Ἔρωτι Philostr.Im.1.29
.II put off, delay a thing in which oneself is concerned (v. supr.11),μηδ' ἔτι δηρὸν ἀμβαλλώμεθα ἔργον Il.2.436
, cf. Hes. Op. 410, Pi.O.1.80, N.9.29, Hdt.3.85;τὸ μέν τι νυνὶ μὴ λάβῃς, τὸ δ' ἀναβαλοῦ Ar.Nu. 1139
; ; εἰς τὴν ὑστεραίαν ἀναβαλέσθαι [τὴν δίαιταν] to adjourn till the morrow, D.21.84, cf. Pl.Mx. 234b;ἀ. τινας Act.Ap.24.22
: abs., defer payment, Isoc.3.33: c. [tense] fut. inf.,ἀ. κυρώσειν ἐς τέταρτον μῆνα Hdt.6.86
.β; ἀ. ἐς τρίτην ἡμέρην ἀποκρινέεσθαι 5.49
;ἀ. ποιήσειν τὰ δέοντα D.3.9
: c. [tense] aor. inf.,ἀ. ὑποκρίνασθαι Hdt.9.8
; .III throw one's cloak up or back, throw it over the shoulder, so as to let it hang in folds,ἀναβάλλεσθαι χλαῖναν Ar.V. 1132
: so also ἀναβάλλεσθαι alone, Id.Ec.97;ἀ. ἐπιδέξια Pl. Tht. 175e
, cf. Ar.Av. 1568; εἴσω τὴν χεῖρα ἔχοντα ἀναβεβλημένον with one's cloak thrown up or back, D.19.251;ἀναβεβλ. ἄνω τοῦ γόνατος Thphr. Char.4.4
; cf.ἀναβολή 1.2
.Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ἀναβάλλω
Страницы
- 1
- 2
См. также в других словарях:
time will tell — Cf. MENANDER Monosticha 11 H ἄγει δὲ πρὸς φῶς τὴν ἀλήθειαν χρόνος, time brings the truth to light. 1539 R. TAVERNER tr. Erasmus’ Adages 37 Tempus omnia reuelat. Tyme discloseth all thynges. 1616 T. DRAXE Adages 205 Time reuealeth all things. 1771 … Proverbs new dictionary
Time Will Tell — might refer to:* Time Will Tell (documentary) a 1991 Island Records documentary about Bob Marley * Automatic/Time Will Tell, a song by Utada Hikaru * Time Will Tell (Millie album) (2004) * Time Will Tell (Proof album) (2007) * Time Will Tell (TV… … Wikipedia
Time Will Tell (TV series) — infobox television show name = Time will Tell caption = format = Game show runtime = 30 minutes creator = starring = Ernie Kovacs (host) Robert Russell country = USA network = DuMont first aired = August 27, 1954 last aired = October 15, 1954 num … Wikipedia
Automatic/Time Will Tell — Single infobox Name = Automatic / Time Will Tell Artist = Utada Hikaru from Album = First Love Released = December 9, 1998 Format = CD, Double A side Single Recorded = August 1998 Genre = Pop/R B Length = N/A Label = EMI Music Japan Writer =… … Wikipedia
Time zone — Timezone and TimeZone redirect here. For other uses, see Time zone (disambiguation). Local time redirects here. For the mathematical concept, see Local time (mathematics). This article is about time zones in general. For a list of time zones by… … Wikipedia
Show Me Love (Not a Dream) — Single by Hikaru Utada from the album Utada Hikaru Single Collection Vol. 2 Released November 17, 2010 … Wikipedia
Will Shivers — is an American comedic actor and filmmaker. As an actor, Will is best known for appearing in commercials and film. As a filmmaker, Will gained underground notoriety for the David Duchovny Video that he co conceived, edited and directed and which… … Wikipedia
time scale — time scales also time scale N COUNT: oft on N with supp The time scale of an event is the length of time during which it happens or develops. The likelihood is that these companies now will show excellent profits on a two year time scale... He… … English dictionary
Will Ingwersen — (ca. 1916–ca. 1990), nurseryman and alpine specialist of renown. Will won numerous gold medals at the Chelsea Flower Show and wrote or co authored many books which can still be found in second hand shops in some cases at a premium. An occasional… … Wikipedia
Will & Grace — Infobox Television show name = Will Grace caption = rated = format = Sitcom runtime = approx. 23 minutes creator = David Kohan Max Mutchnick director = James Burrows starring = Eric McCormack Debra Messing Sean Hayes Megan Mullally Shelley… … Wikipedia
show — 1 verb past tense showed past participle shown /SUn/ 1 PROVE (T) to provide facts or information that make it clear that something is true or that something exists: show (that): The latest poll clearly shows that most voters are unaware of this.… … Longman dictionary of contemporary English
